JP6692585B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine such as a so-called ball-type game machine (hereinafter also referred to as “pachinko machine”) or a rotary game machine (hereinafter also referred to as “slot”).

  In the gaming machine, by winning the game ball into the starting opening or operating the lever by the player, the special symbol is changed and then stopped, and when the winning is determined by the stop mode of the symbol, the payout operation of the game medium is performed. Those that do are common. Then, during the special game operation performed when the stop mode of the special symbol is a hit, various game specifications and effects may be performed for the purpose of enhancing the interest to the player.

JP, 2011-125373, A

  However, it is difficult to prevent the deterioration of the interest in the game with the technology equivalent to the conventional technology.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine in which a player can more enjoy the effects and the like performed in the gaming machine. ..

The present invention is
A front door provided with a production operation unit that can be operated by a player,
An effect display unit for displaying a predetermined effect related to the game,
An operation-compatible light emitting unit capable of emitting light based on a touch operation on the effect operation unit,
The effect operation unit is capable of accepting a single operation that is a single touch operation by a player, and as the mode of the single operation, a plurality of modes according to the content of the accepted operation are provided,
The effect display unit is capable of displaying a predetermined image based on a single operation performed on the effect operation unit,
The operation-corresponding light emitting unit is a plurality of light emitters arranged between the effect operation unit and the effect display unit, and at least a part of the plurality of light emitters is provided on the front door. Yes,
Further, when the mode of the single operation performed on the effect operation unit is a special mode among a plurality of modes, the operation-corresponding light emitting unit is configured by special light emission control corresponding to the special mode. A special light emission control means for causing the plurality of light emitters to emit light ,
When the mode of the single operation performed on the effect operation unit is another mode that is not the special mode among a plurality of modes, the plurality of light-emitting bodies that form the operation-compatible light-emitting unit are used. A predetermined light emission control different from the special light emission control is performed.
The plurality of light emitting bodies that emit light by the special light emission control and the plurality of light emitting bodies that emit light by the predetermined light emission control are the same .
Further, the following means will be disclosed for reference as an invention different from the present invention.
Means 1:
In gaming machines,
A game board having a game area into which a game medium is driven by a player's operation,
A main frame for supporting the game board,
Door frame,
An effect device that includes a first display device that displays effect information that is effected according to the game state,
A second display device for displaying information for explaining the effect;
Display mode switching means for switching the display mode of the information for explaining the effect,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The first display device and the second display device are arranged at a predetermined location of the gaming machine so that the player can see them.
By the switching by the display mode switching means, the information for explaining the effect can be switched between the stop display and the moving display.

  According to the configuration of the means 1, a display device for displaying the effect information and a display device other than the display device are provided, and the information for explaining the effect is displayed between the stop display and the moving display by switching by the display mode switching means. It can be switched with. As a result, even if the information for explaining the effect is set to be the normal movement display, if the movement speed of the display is too fast, etc., it is stopped by the operation of the display mode switching means at the position desired by the player. Since it is possible to switch the display, it is possible to achieve a display mode that suits the player's preference.

Means 2:
In the gaming machine described in means 1, the display mode switching means is provided on the second display device.

  According to the configuration of the means 2, by providing the display mode switching means on the second display device, the player can easily operate the display mode switching means. Further, by providing the display mode switching means on the second display device on which the information describing the effect is displayed, it is possible to intuitively understand the switching of the display mode of the information describing the effect.

Means 3:
In the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2, when the display mode of the information for explaining the effect is the moving display, the information for explaining the effect is displayed so as to be sequentially moved, and is displayed by the display mode switching means. When an operation is performed, it is stopped and displayed by displaying information for explaining the effect at the time when the operation by the display mode switching unit is performed.

  According to the configuration of the means 3, when the information for explaining the effect is moved and displayed, by the operation by the display mode switching means, the information for explaining the effect displayed at that time is stopped and displayed, so that the game is played. Since the player can stop and display the display at a desired time, it is possible for the player to surely understand the content of the information for explaining the effect by seeing the information for explaining the effect that is stopped and displayed. Become.

Means 4:
In the gaming machine according to means 3, when the information for explaining the effect is stopped and displayed, and when the operation by the display mode switching means is performed, the information for explaining the effect is sequentially moved again. It is characterized by being displayed in.

  According to the configuration of the means 4, when the information for explaining the effect is stopped and displayed, the information for explaining the effect is displayed so as to be sequentially moved again by the operation of the display mode switching means. After the player grasps the content of the information for explaining the effect, it is possible to continue to see the continuation of the information for explaining the effect.

Means 5:
In gaming machines,
A game board having a game area into which a game medium is driven by a player's operation,
A main frame for supporting the game board,
Door frame,
An effect device that includes a first display device that displays effect information that is effected according to the game state,
A second display device for displaying information for explaining the effect;
Display mode switching means for switching the display mode of the information for explaining the effect,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The first display device and the second display device are arranged at a predetermined location of the gaming machine so that the player can see them.
By the switching by the display mode switching means, the information for explaining the effect can be switched between the normal moving display and the low speed moving display.

  According to the configuration of the means 5, a display device for displaying the effect information and a display device other than the display device are provided, and the information for explaining the effect is displayed in the normal movement display and the low speed movement display by switching by the display mode switching means. It can be switched between. Thereby, even if the information for explaining the effect is set to be the normal movement display of the normal speed, when the display movement speed is too fast, the display mode switching means of the display mode switching means near the position desired by the player Since the display can be switched to a low-speed moving display by an operation, it is possible to achieve a display mode that suits the player's preference.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the player can enjoy the effects and the like performed in the gaming machine.

It is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a front perspective view of an outer frame. It is a front perspective view of a body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the body frame. It is a perspective view of a door frame. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board of FIG. 8, and was seen from the front. It is a front view which expands and shows the function display unit in a game board in the state attached to the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 11. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a lending device connection terminal board for gaming balls or the like that relays electrical connection between a payout control board, which constitutes a main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 11. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of a peripheral control MPU. FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the vicinity of a VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and sound control unit. It is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 17. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit and the like of the payout control unit. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows a CR unit input / output circuit. FIG. 6 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 8 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 30 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 29 to the peripheral control board. It is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of main control side power supply turn-on. 33 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control-side power-on process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power supply of a payout control part. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power supply of the payout control part of FIG. FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating a continuation of the payout control unit power-on process following FIG. 36. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of rotation angle switch history creation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a sprocket fixed position determination skip process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of ball glide judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a prize ball stock number addition processing for ball rental. It is a flow chart which shows an example of stock monitoring processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a pay-out ball gaze operation judgment setting processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a payout setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of ball gaze operation setting processing. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of retry operation monitoring processing. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a mismatch counter reset determination process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of error cancellation operation judging processing. It is a timing chart which shows the signal processing (a) at the time of the payout operation by ball lending, and the input signal confirmation processing (a) from the CR unit. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part blackout notice signal interruption processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of a maintenance screen. It is a figure which shows the display content to the effect that a salesclerk should be called during a big hit. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of a service mode screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of a break timer setting screen. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the screen during a break. It is a figure which shows an example of an operation menu screen. It is a figure which shows an example of an operation menu screen. It is a figure which shows an example of an operation menu screen. It is a figure which shows an example of an operation menu screen. It is a figure which shows an example of an operation menu screen. It is a figure which shows an example in which the title of the selection display object was displayed. It is a figure which shows an example in which the title of the selection display object was displayed. It is a figure which shows an example of an operation menu screen. It is a figure which shows an example of an operation menu screen. It is a figure which shows an example of an operation menu screen. It is a figure which shows an example of an operation menu screen. It is a figure which shows an example of a volume adjustment screen. It is a figure which shows an example of a volume adjustment screen. It is a figure which shows an example of a volume adjustment screen. It is a figure which shows an example of a volume adjustment screen. It is a figure which shows an example of a volume adjustment screen. It is a front view of a game machine. It is a perspective view of a door frame. It is an enlarged view of the touch panel vicinity. It is a front view of a game board. It is a front enlarged view of the gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the first winning lottery on the main control board. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the second winning lottery on the main control board. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure regarding the production | generation on a peripheral control board. It is a figure showing an example of a specific hit production using a game board side liquid crystal display device, a plate side liquid crystal display device, a touch panel, and a plurality of light emitting devices. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific hit effect of FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific hit effect of FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific hit production of FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific hit production of FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific hit production of FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific hit production of FIG. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example of the specific deviation effect using the gaming board side liquid crystal display device, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device, the touch panel, and the plurality of light emitting devices, which is an effect that appears next to the light emitting mode of FIG. 91. FIG. 90 is a view showing a continuation of the specific deviation effect in FIG. 93. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific deviation effect of FIG. It is a figure which shows the variation of the light emission mode of the link lamp in the case of a hit. It is a figure which shows the variation of the light emission aspect of the link lamp in the case of detachment. It is a figure showing an example of suggestion to a touch panel part. It is a figure which shows the example of a suggestion to a touch panel part. It is an enlarged view of the touch panel part vicinity. It is a figure which shows an example of the light emission mode at the time of suggesting operation to a touch panel. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the light emission mode at the time of suggesting operation to a touch panel. It is a figure which shows another example of the light emission mode at the time of suggesting operation to a touch panel. It is a figure which shows the continuation of another example of the light emission mode at the time of suggesting operation to a touch panel. It is a figure which shows another example of the light emission mode at the time of suggesting operation to a touch panel, and the state when a player does not perform operation after suggestion. It is a figure which shows another example of the light emission mode at the time of suggesting operation to a touch panel, and the continuation of the state when a player does not perform an operation after suggestion. It is a figure which shows the light emission aspect at the time of showing the operation state of the touch panel by a light emitting device. It is a figure which shows the light emission aspect at the time of showing the operation state of the touch panel by a light emitting device. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure which shows the example of the light emission aspect of the game board light-emitting device at the time of suggesting operation to a touch panel. It is a figure which shows another example of the light emission mode of the game board light-emitting device at the time of suggesting operation to a touch panel. It is a figure which shows the example of the light emission mode at the time of showing the operation state of the touch panel by a game board light-emitting device. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure which shows the example of the light emission aspect of the game board light-emitting device at the time of suggesting operation to a touch panel. It is a figure which shows the example of the light emission mode at the time of showing the operation state of the touch panel by a game board light-emitting device. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure which shows the example of the light emission aspect of the game board light-emitting device at the time of suggesting operation to a touch panel. It is a figure which shows the example of the light emission mode at the time of showing the operation state of the touch panel by a game board light-emitting device. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific production using the 1st liquid crystal display device, the 2nd liquid crystal display device, and a touch panel. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific effect of FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific production of FIG. 120 in the case where the winning / judging determination result is a win. FIG. 121 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the specific winning effect of FIG. 120 when the winning / judging determination result is miss. It is a figure which shows an example in other embodiment of the specific production using a 1st liquid crystal display device, a 2nd liquid crystal display device, and a touch panel. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific hit effect of FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific hit effect of FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific hit production of FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the specific effect of FIG. FIG. 127 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the specific hit effect of FIG. 126 when the winning / judging determination result is miss. It is a figure which shows an example of an operation means switching screen. It is an example of a bonus screen in the operation menu screen. It is an example of a wave change effect confirmation screen on the bonus screen. It is a figure showing an example of a wave change effect image. It is a figure showing an example of a wave change effect completion image. It is a figure showing a series of flows of change production after wave change. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a 1st liquid crystal display device and an upper plate side liquid crystal display device in embodiment regarding effect description information. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a 1st liquid crystal display device and an upper plate side liquid crystal display device in embodiment regarding effect description information. It is the figure which shows the production information table which shows the correspondence of production display and production explanation information and the like. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a 1st liquid crystal display device and an upper plate side liquid crystal display device in another embodiment regarding effect description information. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a 1st liquid crystal display device and an upper plate side liquid crystal display device in another embodiment regarding effect description information. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device in the modified example regarding effect description information. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device in the modified example regarding effect description information. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device in the modified example regarding effect description information. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device in another modification regarding effect description information. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device in another modification regarding effect description information. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device in another modification regarding effect description information. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device in another modification regarding effect description information. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device in another modification regarding effect description information. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device in another modification regarding effect description information.

[1. Overall configuration of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, a pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. Yes, FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) in a game hall, and a box whose front side is open and pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A frame-shaped main body frame 3, a game board 4 having a game area 1100 that is mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side and a game ball as a game medium is driven, and the front surfaces of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4 are on the player side. It is provided with a door frame 5 which is rotatably supported by the main body frame 3 so as to be closed. On the door frame 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be seen from the player side, and a game ball arranged below the game window 101 to store game balls. A dish-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7), and a handle device 500 operated by the player to drive the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. , Are provided.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are each formed in a vertically long rectangular shape extending in the vertical direction in a front view, and the horizontal widths of the left and right sides thereof are substantially the same. The main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than the outer frame 2 in the vertical width. A decorative cover 23 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position lower than the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is completely closed by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. It has become so. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that their upper ends are substantially aligned, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are rotatably supported at a position on the left front side of the outer frame 2. The main frame 3 and the door frame 5 are supported by the outer frame 2 and the right ends of the main frame 3 and the door frame 5 move to the front side to be in an open state.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, in a front view, a game area 1100 into which a game ball is driven is exposed through a substantially circular game window 101, and the game area 1100 projects forward to the lower side of the game window 101. As described above, the two upper plates 301 and the lower plate 302 are arranged one above the other. Further, a handle device 500 for a player to operate is arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player operates the handle device 500 in a state where game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotary operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the hitting ball strength according to the rotation angle, and the player can play the game.

  Although the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by the transparent glass unit 590 and the player can see the inside of the game area 1100, the player inserts a hand or the like into the game area 1100 to play the game. It is not possible to touch the game balls, obstacle nails, various winning openings, and accessories in the area 1100.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
Next, the outer frame 2 installed in the island facility of the game hall will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of the outer frame. As shown in FIG. 4, the outer frame 2 includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 extending in the vertical (up and down) direction, and respective frame plates. Four connecting members 14 for connecting the end portions of 10, 11, 12, 13 are provided, and by connecting the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 with the connecting member 14, a vertically long rectangular shape ( It is assembled into a square shape. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 are made of a solid material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. In addition, upper support fittings 20 described later are attached to the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10.

  On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are light-weight metal mold members (for example, aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape. In addition, a plurality of vertically extending grooves are formed on the outer and inner side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and work is performed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in a pachinko island facility in a game hall. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily held by a person's finger and the design of the appearance can be improved.

  The outer frame 2 is fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10, and the lower support fixed to a predetermined position inside the lower part of the left side frame plate 12 so as to face the upper support metal 20. A support metal fitting 21, a reinforcement metal fitting 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support metal fitting 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13, and a decorative cover fixed to the front surface of the reinforcement metal fitting 22. 23 is provided. The upper support fitting 20 and the lower support fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 in an openable and closable manner. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 5) of an upper shaft support metal fitting 630 in the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c of the upper support metal fitting 20. The main body frame pivotal support formed on the main body frame pivotal support bracket 644 of the main body frame 3 to be described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fixture 21. After the body frame 3 is inserted into the support hole of the body frame shaft support metal fitting 644, the body support frame 3 can be easily mounted by locking the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the body frame 3 into the support hook hole 20c. It is designed so that it can be freely opened and closed.

  Further, the outer frame 2 has two closing plates 24 and 25 (see FIG. 1) mounted and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13 so as to be vertically separated by a predetermined distance. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view. The closing plates 24 and 25 are hook portions 1054 and 1065 (see FIG. 1) of the locking device 1000 (locking device) that are attached along the open side of the body frame 3 when the body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Although the details will be described later, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it to one side, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are connected. The engagement is released, and the closed state of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 can be released.

[3. Overall structure of main frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 that is provided on the front side of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. 5 is a front perspective view of the body frame, and FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view of the board unit in the body frame. As shown in FIG. 5, the main body frame 3 forms a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and also has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for penetrating in the front-rear direction and holding the game board 4. An upper shaft support bracket 630 and a lower shaft support bracket 640, which are attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front and are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 and pivotally support the door frame 5, respectively. A hitting ball launching device 650 which is attached to the lower front surface of the main body frame base 600 for driving a game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and a top plate 301 of the plate unit 300 which is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. From the prize ball unit 700 to the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 when the door frame 5 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600 and the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the prize ball unit 700 for paying out the balls. It includes a ball outlet opening and closing unit 790 to shut off the flow of skill sphere, the.

  Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards for controlling the door frame 5 except the game board 4 and electric parts provided in the main body frame 3, a power supply board 851, and the like. The board unit 800 that is a unit of the above, a back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and a side crime prevention plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking device 1000 that is attached to the right end of the main body frame base when viewed from the front and that locks and unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

[3-1. Body frame base]
Next, the main body frame base 600 will be described. The main body frame base 600 is integrally formed of synthetic resin, and has an outer shape in a front view in a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is formed to have a predetermined depth in the front-rear direction. Has been done. The main body frame base 600 has a game board holding port 601 capable of fitting and holding the outer periphery of the game board 4 by penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within a range of about 3/4 of the whole from the upper part to the lower part, and a main body frame. A U-shaped front end frame portion 602 that forms the front end outer periphery of the base 600 excluding the left side in front view, and a recessed rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and from the lower end of the door frame base body 110 in the door frame 5 to the rear side. The protruding door frame protrusion 110c (see FIG. 1), the upper bending protrusion 167 (see FIG. 1) protruding rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 And an engaging groove 603 into which an open side outward bending protrusion 164 (see FIG. 1) protruding rearward is inserted and engaged.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, and is recessed rearward by a predetermined amount from the front end of the front end frame portion 602, and a lower rear wall portion which spreads laterally in a plate shape. 604, and a peripheral wall portion 605 that projects rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. The peripheral wall portion 605 connects the free ends (upper and lower left end portions in a front view) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 so that the main body frame base 600 has a frame-like outer shape. It has become.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 forms the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, and the game board placing portion 606 on which the game board 4 is placed and the game board placing portion 606. Positioning projections 607 protruding upward from the substantially center in the left-right direction and engaging with out-ball discharge grooves of the game panel 1150 in the game board 4, and the game board stopper of the game board 4 formed at a predetermined position on the inner wall on the right side in the front view of the peripheral wall portion 605. A game board locking portion to which the tool 1120 is fixed, and a plurality of upper end regulating ribs 609 that are downwardly hung from the upper inner wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 and have a plate shape such that the lower end can abut the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. And are equipped with. The positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 is fitted into the out-ball discharge groove of the game board 4 so that the lower end of the game board 4 can be restricted from moving leftward and rightward and backward. There is. Further, the game board locking portion can restrict movement of the right side of the game board 4 in the front view in the front-rear direction when the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4 is locked. .. The front left side of the game board 4 will be described later in detail, but the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side crime prevention plate 950.

  Further, in the main body frame base 600, the lower rear wall portion 604 is formed at a position recessed one step rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and the hitting ball launching device is provided on the right front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view. The hitting ball launching device 650 is attached from the front side so that the launching solenoid 654 of 650 is housed in the solenoid housing recess. In a state in which the ball striking device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall part 604, a far space 626 that spreads leftward and downward is formed on the left side in front view of the upper end of the launch rail 660 of the ball striking device 650. It is like this. In the present embodiment, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e (see FIG. 1) of the foul cover unit 540 is located below the foul space 626. The game ball descending the foul space 626 is received by the foul ball inlet 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and is discharged to the lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7) of the plate unit 300.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 has an opening penetrating in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction on the left side of the left-right center of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view, and a plurality of openings are formed on the upper side of the opening and both left and right sides in front view. And a through hole 615 penetrating therethrough. The opening of the main body frame base 600 is closed from the front side by the relay terminal board cover 692, and the board unit attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 through the opening 692a of the relay terminal board cover 692. The main door relay terminal plate 880 of 800 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are arranged to face the front side.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 detects the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in front view. A door frame opening switch 618 for operating the door frame 5 is attached, and when the door frame 5 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 3, the pressing is released and the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. It is like this. Further, in the main body frame base 600, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached on the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached, When the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released and the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

[3-2. Upper shaft support bracket and lower shaft support bracket]
Next, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 will be described. The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the metal fitting mounting portions on the upper left and lower rear surfaces of the main body frame base 600 in a front view using predetermined screws, respectively, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the main body frame 3. The main frame 3 can be opened and closed, and the main body frame 3 can be opened and closed.

  The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is attached to the upper metal fitting mounting portion of the main body frame base 600, and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped frontward extension that extends forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. The portion 632, the shaft support pin 633 protruding so as to extend upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension 632, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 arranged on the left side of the shaft support pin 633 in a front view (see FIG. 7). (Refer to FIG. 4) and a door frame shaft support hole 634 that penetrates in the up-down direction and the front extension portion 632 hangs downward from the left end of the front extension portion 632 when viewed from the front to regulate the pivotal end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. And a stopper. In the upper shaft support metal fitting 630, the mounting portion 631, the front extending portion 632, and the stopper are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is arranged below the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 for pivotally supporting the door frame 5 and for supporting the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. Of the main body frame shaft support metal fittings 644. The door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is attached to the metal fitting mount portion on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped mount portion that extends forward from the lower end of the mount portion. A plate-shaped front extending portion 642b, a door frame shaft support hole 642c through which a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 7) of the door frame 5 is inserted in the vicinity of the front end of the front extending portion 642b in the vertical direction, and A stopper 642d is provided upright from the left end of the extending portion 642b when viewed from the front, and the stopper 642d that restricts the pivoting end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. In this door frame shaft support fitting 642, the mounting portion, the front extending portion 642b, and the stopper 642d are integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  Further, the main body frame support metal fitting 644 of the lower support metal fitting 640 is attached to a metal fitting mounting portion on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-shaped mounting portion that spreads in the vertical and horizontal directions, and extends from the lower end of the mounting portion to the front. The front extending portion 644b is provided, and a main body frame shaft support hole that penetrates in the vertical direction is provided near the front end of the front extending portion 644b. In the body frame support metal fitting 644, the mounting portion and the front extending portion 644b are also integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

  The lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is in a state where the mounting portion of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 and the mounting portion of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction, and the lower frame support metal fitting 642 of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 is attached. The front extension portion 642b and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support fitting 644 are attached to the lower fitting attachment portion of the main body frame base 600 in a state of being vertically separated by a predetermined distance.

  The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are mounted on the body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the body frame shaft support hole of the lower shaft support bracket 640 are coaxial with each other. The main body frame shaft support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is fitted to the support protrusion 21d (see FIG. 4) of the lower support metal fitting 21 in the outer frame 2. The front extension portion 644b of the main body frame support metal fitting 644 is placed on the support projecting piece 21c of the lower support metal fitting 21 (see FIG. 4) so as to be inserted, and then the shaft of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is inserted. By inserting the support pin 633 into the support hook hole 20c (see FIG. 4) of the upper support fitting 20 in the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. It is like this.

  Further, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the door frame shaft support hole of the lower shaft support bracket 640 are attached. 642c is located coaxially with the door frame so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 642c of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640. 5 of the lower shaft support 158 (see FIG. 7) is placed on the front extending portion 642b of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642, and then the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is connected to the door frame of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630. The door frame 5 can be rotatably supported by the main body frame 3 by being inserted into the shaft support hole 634. In the present embodiment, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. By sliding the shaft pin 155 downward so that the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension part 632 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 vertically overlap with each other, and then the shaft pin 155 is slid upward. It can be inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634.

[3-3. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hit ball launching device 650 will be described. The hitting ball launching device 650 is attached to the body frame base 600 at a predetermined position on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and is a metal plate launching base 652, and is attached to the lower rear surface of the launching base 652 so that the rotary drive shaft 654a projects forward. Firing solenoid 654, a hammer 656 fixed to the rotary drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654 so as to be rotatable integrally, a hammer tip 658 fixed to the tip of the hammer 656, and a predetermined trajectory on the trajectory of the hammer tip 658. A hammer 658 at the tip of the ball striking hammer 656 passes between the launch rail 660 that extends obliquely to the upper left in a front view from the position and is attached to the front surface of the launch base 652, and the launch rail 660 above the proximal end of the launch rail 660. Ball stopper that holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660 by forming a gap through which the game ball cannot pass at the same time 662 and a stopper that restricts the batting mallet 656 (hammer tip 658) from rotating to the firing rail 660 side from the batting position where the gaming ball held at the base end of the firing rail 660 by the ball stopping piece 662 can be hit. 664 and.

  Although not shown in detail, the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball firing device 650 is configured such that the rotary drive shaft 654a reciprocally rotates at a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotational operation angle of the handle device 500. .. In addition, the batting mallet 656 of the batting launcher 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the rotary drive shaft 654a of the firing solenoid 654, and a tip extending in a gentle arc from the fixed portion 656a so that the tip is at the axis of the rotary drive shaft 654a. On the other hand, a rod portion 656b in which the mallet tip 658 is fixed to the tip end in the direction of the normal line, and a stopper portion 656c that extends toward the opposite side with the fixing portion 656a interposed between the rod portion 656b and the stopper 664 and can contact the stopper portion 656c. Is equipped with. Since the stopper portion 656c of the hitting mallet 656 contacts the stopper 664, the hammer tip 658 at the tip is rotated toward the launch rail 660 side from the hitting position (the turning end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). It is becoming regulated.

  In the state where the hitting ball launch device 650 is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the launch rail 660 is substantially the center in the left-right direction, that is, the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604, that is, the game board mounting portion. It is designed to be located below 606 (the lower side of the game board holding port 601) and has a predetermined width in the left-right direction between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. A foul space 626 that spreads downwards is formed. Then, the hit ball launching device 650 launches the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side in front view with respect to the launch rail 660, so that the game ball can be driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. It has become. In the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 is located at the bottom of the foul space 626, and the game is played. The game ball that has become a foul ball without being driven into the area 1100 drops in the foul space 626, is received by the foul ball inlet 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

[3-4. Prize Ball Unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 700 will be described. In the pachinko island facility in the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, the gaming balls supplied from the pachinko island facility side to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are stored, and then the upper plate 301 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 based on a predetermined payout instruction. Pay out to. This prize ball unit 700 is a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball tank attached to the upper portion of the rear surface of the prize ball base 710 for receiving and storing game balls supplied from the Pachinko Island facility side. 720, a tank rail unit 730 which is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and which aligns the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and sends the game balls to the downstream side, and the game balls arranged by the tank rail unit 730 in a predetermined manner. The prize ball device 740 that is paid out based on the payout instruction and the game balls that are paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the upper plate 301 is paid out when the game balls are full. It is mainly equipped with a full tank branching unit 770 capable of branching and guiding the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

  The prize ball unit 700 also includes an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710 and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784.

[3-4-1. Prize ball tank]
In the prize ball tank 720, the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. In addition, the prize ball tank 720, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the discharge port 723, so that the game balls on the bottom wall portion 721 roll toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

  Further, the prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. One end side of the ball leveling member 727 is pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725, a weight is held inside, and the other end side is hung by its own weight. The ball leveling member 727 is adapted to hang down in a tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, and is capable of leveling and aligning game balls circulating in the tank rail unit 730.

[3-4-2. Tank rail unit]
The tank rail unit 730 includes a tank rail 731 that is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and extends in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 is a gutter having a predetermined depth with an open upper side, and has a width (depth) in which game balls can be arranged in two rows in the front-rear direction, and a left end (axial support side) end in front view. The bottom is slanted to be low.

  Further, the tank rail unit 730 is connected to the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported above the discharge port of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 that covers the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 as viewed from the front. A ball pressing plate 734 closing the upper part of the rail 731, and a ball stopper 735 capable of advancing and retracting into the tank rail 731 and stopping rolling of the game ball in the tank rail 731 to the discharge port side. , Are provided. The two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to the two flow paths of the game sphere partitioned into two rows by the partition wall of the tank rail 731.

[3-4-3. Prize Ball Device]
The prize ball device 740 is for paying out the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. The prize ball device 740 is connected to the lower end of the supply passage and a supply passage having a width slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball and extending to a position slightly lower than the center in the vertical direction. A distribution space having a space, a prize ball passage that communicates with the lower end (open side) of the distribution space when viewed from the rear (open side), opens in the left side when viewed in a dogleg shape, and the rear view of the distribution space is viewed from the right. (Spindle support side), a ball passage that communicates with the lower end and extends downward and opens at the lower end. The supply passage, the distribution space, the prize ball passage, and the ball removal passage are formed to be open rearward.

  The prize ball device 740 includes a first gear that is fixed to the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 so as to be integrally rotatable, and that is disposed on the rear side of the motor support plate, a second gear that meshes with the first gear, and a mesh with the second gear. The third gear, the payout rotating body that is integrally rotated together with the third gear and is disposed in the distribution space, and the payout rotating body are integrally rotatably fixed on the opposite side with the third gear interposed therebetween in the circumferential direction. A rotation detection board having a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) detection slits formed at intervals, and a ball break switch 750 for detecting the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage, and a prize ball passage Holds a counting switch 751 for detecting a game ball flowing down, a rotation angle switch 752 for detecting a detection slit formed in a rotation detection plate that rotates integrally with a payout rotating body, and a rotation angle switch 752. Rotation angle switch board 53, a payout motor 744, burn out switch 750, a counting switch 751, and the rotation angle prize balls casing substrate 754 that relays the connection between dispensing the below-described control board and the switch 752, the.

  The payout rotating body is provided with three recesses each having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. When the payout rotating body rotates, the game ball supplied from the supply passage is one. The balls are housed in the recesses one by one and can be paid out to the prize ball passage or the ball passage passage side. Further, the three detection slits formed on the rotation detection plate that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body are equally formed (every 120 degrees) on the outer circumference of the rotation detecting plate and correspond to the recesses of the payout rotating body. The rotation angle switch 752 detects the detection slits provided at the respective positions, so that the rotation position of the payout rotating body can be detected. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board (dispensing rotor) is designed to correspond to the rotation of the dispensing motor 744 in 18 steps.

  In the prize ball device 740, when the payout motor 744 rotates the payout rotating body in the counterclockwise direction in rear view, the game balls in the supply passage are paid out to the prize ball passage. The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage by the rotation of the body are counted by the counting switch 751 one by one, and then passed to the prize ball passage. On the other hand, when the ball-removing operation member is operated by a clerk in the hall or the like, the game balls in the supply passage are to be dispensed to the ball-removing passage, and the game balls dispensed to the ball-removing passage are removed from the ball. The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be discharged from the lower end of the passage to the outside of the rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 via a full tank branching unit 770 described later.

[3-4-4. Full tank branch unit]
The full tank branching unit 770 is formed in a box shape such that the whole is lowered as it goes from the rear end to the front end. A prize ball receiving port that receives the game ball that has flowed down the ball passage, a branch space that is located below the prize ball receiving port and expands in the left-right direction, and a game from directly below the prize ball receiving port in the branch space to the front side A normal passage that guides the ball, a normal ball outlet 774 that releases the game ball that has flowed through the normal passage to the front and opens at the front end right end of the front end, and separates to the right side in the rear view from directly below the prize ball receiving port in the branch space. A full tank passage that guides the game ball toward the front side from the open position, and a full tank outlet 776 that discharges the game ball flowing through the full passage to the front and opens on the left side of the normal ball outlet 774 in front view. ing.

  In addition, the full tank branching unit 770 has a ball withdrawal opening and a ball withdrawal opening that opens upward at the left end in front view of the rear end and receives a game ball that has flowed down the ball removal passage of the prize ball device 740. At a position behind the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the left end when viewed from the front, releasing the ball passage that guides the game ball received in the mouth to the front side and the game ball flowing through the ball passage to the front. And an open ball outlet.

  In the full tank branching unit 770, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 776 are respectively the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. And, the game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 is designed to communicate with the second ball inlet 542c (see FIG. 1) so as to face the dish through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540. The game balls supplied to the upper plate 301 of the unit 300 and discharged from the full tank ball outlet 776 are supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. ing. Further, the ball outlet is formed so as to communicate with the right upper end of the body frame base ball passage of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the rear, and the game balls emitted from the ball outlet are the main body frame of the main body frame base 600. It is designed to be delivered to the base ball passage.

  When the upper bowl 301 of the dish unit 300 is filled with game balls and further game balls are paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740), the first ball outlet of the foul cover unit 540 is moved upward. The game ball that cannot be discharged to the side of the dish 301 stays in the first ball passage of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually the normal passage upstream 774 of the full tank branching unit 770 is filled up in the normal passage. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space from the prize ball receiving slot cannot normally enter the passage, and starts moving laterally in the branch space, and the game ball that has moved laterally is full. It enters into the tongue passage and is supplied to the lower tray 302 of the dish unit 300 from the full tank outlet through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540, the second ball passage, and the second ball outlet. Has become.

[3-5. Board unit]
Next, the board unit 800 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, the board unit 800 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 in front view, and a board. A power supply board box holder 840 mounted on the rear surface of the unit base 810, and a power supply board box mounted on the rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 and having a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820. 850, a payout control board box 860 attached to the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820, and a terminal board box 870 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 as viewed from the front. And the board unit base A main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is attached to the front surface 10, and a.

  The power supply board box holder 840 has a discharge ball receiving portion 841 that is opened upward and receives a game ball discharged downward from the out ball discharging portion of the game board 4 on the front left side of the left and right center in front view, A discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game balls received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 and a front side of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841 (right side in front view) are opened forward and upward. The power supply board box holder 840 is provided with a box accommodating portion formed so that the entire rear surface thereof is recessed to the front side and capable of accommodating the front end of the power supply board box 850.

  Further, the power supply board box holder 840 is configured such that the opened front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening of the board unit base 810 faces the discharge passage 842. The main body frame base 600 is formed and flows through the main body frame base ball-removing passage formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion of the main body frame base 600, and flows down to the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening of the board unit base 810. The gaming ball and the gaming ball discharged from the out ball discharging section of the game board 4 and received by the discharging ball receiving section 841 can be discharged to the lower rear side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the discharge passage 842. Is becoming

  The power supply board box 850 is formed in a horizontally long box shape having an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close a front end opening thereof. The power supply board box 850 is configured to accommodate various electronic components mounted on the power supply board 851, and heat generated from the electronic components and the like can be externally transmitted through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released to. A power switch 852 attached to the power board 851 faces the rear surface of the power board box 850.

  The payout control board box 860 includes a horizontally long and thin box-shaped box base 861 whose rear is opened, a thin box-shaped cover 862 which is fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and whose front is opened, and the box base 861. And a dispensing control board 4110 attached to the rear surface of the cover and covered with the cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 is provided with a plurality of separating / cutting portions 863 formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862 so as to project outward from the left end in rear view, and at one place of the plurality of separating / cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are caulked and fixed. As a result, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862 from each other, the separation cutting section 863 cannot be separated without cutting, and when the payout control board box 860 is opened, a trace thereof remains. . Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been illegally opened and closed. In this embodiment, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection and the like.

  Further, in the payout control board box 860, the operation switch 860a (error canceling section) attached to the payout control board 4110, the inspection output terminal 860c, and the like are exposed rearward through the cover 862. Further, in the payout control board box 860, various connection terminals for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like are exposed rearward through the cover 862. The operation switch 860a is operated when clearing the RAM built in the microprocessor of the payout control board 4110 and the RAM built in the microprocessor of the main control board 4100 when the power is turned on, or after the power is turned on. When an error is reported, it is operated to cancel the error. The function to clear the RAM when the power is turned on and the function to clear the RAM after the power is turned on (the period for performing the function as RAM clear has passed) Later), the function to release the error. A detailed description of this point will be given later.

  The terminal board box 870 includes a board base 871 mounted on the rear surface of the speaker box 820, a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 mounted on the rear surface of the board base 871 and having peripheral panel relay terminals 872 fixed rearward, and a board base. Board for lending device connection terminal plate 869 for playing game balls and the like attached to the rear surface of 871 and having CR unit relay terminal 873 fixed rearward, peripheral panel relay terminal 872 and CR unit relay terminal 873 facing the rear side And a substrate cover 874 that covers the rear side of the base 871. The peripheral panel relay terminal 872 is for connecting to a frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided on the side of the pachinko gaming machine on which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, and the CR unit relay The terminal 873 is for connecting to a CR unit installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main door relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are provided in the door frame 5 and the peripheral control board 4140 and the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3. It is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500, each decorative substrate, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are attached to a board mounting portion formed on the front surface of the board unit base 810 so as to face from the front surface of the main body frame base 600 to the front side. The wiring extending from the door frame 5 can be connected.

  The main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are configured such that the front sides thereof are covered with a relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and the relay terminal plate cover 692 has Only the connection terminal is exposed to the front side through the opening 692a, so that the front surface of the main body frame 3 has a neat appearance.

  Further, the main door relay terminal plate 880, the ball rental button 361 of the ball rental unit 360 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side, the return button 362, the lending remaining display portion 363, the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, and the touch. It is for relaying the connection between the switch 516, the firing stop switch 518, the full-tank switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Regarding the ball rental button 361 of the ball rental unit 360, the return button 362, the lending remaining display portion 363, the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500, the touch switch 516, the firing stop switch 518, and the full tank switch 550 of the foul cover unit 540. The description will be given later.

  Further, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is provided in each of the decoration units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, each of the decoration boards provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. , For relaying the connection between the dial drive motor 414, various switches for detecting the operations of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, and the peripheral control board 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Is. The decorative units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, the decorative units provided on the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the dial drive motor 414 and the dial operation provided on the operation unit 400. Various switches for detecting the operation of the section 401 and the pressing operation section 405 will be described later.

[4. Overall structure of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the door frame. As shown in FIG. 7, the door frame 5 includes a door frame base unit 100 having a game window 101 whose outer shape is a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape), and a door. A right side decoration unit 200 that is attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the frame base unit 100, and a left side that faces the right side decoration unit 200 and is attached to the left outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame base unit arranged below the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. And a pair of side speaker covers 290 attached to the front surface of 100.

  Further, the door frame 5 is attached to the front of the door frame base unit 100, the dish unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the dish unit 300, and the right side of the dish unit 300. The upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and the capacitive touch panel having a contact surface that is provided so as to cover the display area of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 (second display device) and that can detect the contact state. 480 (contact type input device), a handle device 500 that penetrates the dish unit 300 and is attached to the lower right corner of the door frame base unit 100 for performing a game ball driving operation, and the door frame base unit 100 is sandwiched. A foul cover unit 540 arranged on the rear side of the dish unit 300 and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, and A ball feeding unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the cover unit 540, and a glass unit 590 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the game window 101. There is.

[4-1. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 will be described. The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base main body 110 that has a game window 101 that is formed in a vertically long rectangular outer shape and that has a game window 101 that penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a vertically elongated inner periphery. An upper bracket 120 attached to the center of the upper part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the base body 110, and a pair of sides attached to the lower left and right outer sides of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base body 110. The speaker 130 and a handle bracket for supporting the handle device 500, which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base body 110 in a front view, are provided.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 (see FIG. 1) fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110, and the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. A security cover 180 (see FIG. 1) attached so as to cover the lower portion, and a glass unit locking member 190 (see FIG. 1) rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110. 1)), and a firing cover 191 (see FIG. 1) that is arranged on the left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction in rear view and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101. The main control board mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 below the firing cover 191 and provided on the potentiometer 512 of the handle device 500 described later and the game board 4 described later. The handle relay terminal plate 192 (see FIG. 1) that relays the connection with 100, the handle relay terminal plate cover 193 (see FIG. 1) that covers the rear side of the handle relay terminal plate 192, and the center in the left-right direction. A frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 that is arranged on the side opposite to the firing cover 191 and the handle relay terminal board 192 (on the right side of the center in the left-right direction in the rear view (on the side of the pivotal support)) and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body. (See FIG. 1) and a frame decoration drive amplifier board cover 195 (see FIG. 1) that covers the rear side of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is electrically connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and is also electrically connected to the peripheral control board 4140 provided in the game board 4 described later. In addition, an amplifier circuit for amplifying the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control board 4140 and outputting it to each speaker 130 is provided. Although not specifically shown, in the present embodiment, the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the decorative units provided on the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the dial drive motor provided on the operation unit 400. And a switch, a handle relay terminal plate 192, a ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, and the like, and wirings for electrically connecting the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control board 4140, and the like, in a rear view of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. After being bundled together in a position on the right side (shaft support side), they are extended to the rear and connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 of the main body frame 3.

[4-1-1. Door frame base body]
The door frame base body 110 is formed of a synthetic resin in a vertically long frame shape, and is formed in such a manner that the game window 101 having a vertically elongated inner shape and a generally elliptical shape penetrating in the front-rear direction is offset upward as a whole. Has been done. The game window 101 is formed in a smooth curved shape in which the left and right inner edges are continuous, while the lower inner edge is formed in a straight line extending left and right. Further, on the inner peripheral edge of the lower side of the game window 101 in the door frame base main body 110, a rectangular notch portion is formed on the shaft support side (left side in front view) so that the first ball outlet of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted. The speaker mounting portion for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130, which is disposed on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101, the right (open side) end of the front surface which is disposed in the lower right corner when viewed from the front and bulges forward. The handle mounting portion for mounting the handle bracket at an angle so as to retreat, the wiring passage opening through which the wiring from the handle device 500 can pass through at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion in the front-rear direction, and the upper side of the handle mounting portion. At this point, a lock hole 116 is formed which is formed in a tubular shape that extends shortly toward the front side and through which a cylinder lock 1010 described later can be inserted. The door frame base main body 110 has an upper side formed by the game window 101, and the widths of the left and right side sides are such that an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, a shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of a reinforcing unit 150 described later. The width is substantially the same as the width of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in the front view.

[4-1-2. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 150 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 (see FIG. 1) attached along the rear surface of the upper side of the door frame base body 110, and a shaft support attached along the rear side of the side wall of the door frame base body 110. The side reinforcing sheet metal 152 (see FIG. 1), the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 (see FIG. 1) attached along the rear side of the open side of the door frame base body 110, and the game window 101 of the door frame base body 110. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (see FIG. 1) attached along the back surface of the lower side is provided, and they are fastened to each other with screws or rivets to form a rectangular shape.

  An upper shaft supporting portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided on the upper surface thereof and a lower shaft supporting portion 158 having a shaft pin 157 on the lower surface thereof are provided at upper and lower ends of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 152. It is equipped as one. Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal support 640 formed above and below the shaft support side of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is moved relative to the main body frame 3. It can be opened and closed freely.

  Further, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 is provided at the lower rear portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. The hook cover 165 engages with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the locking device 1000 (locking device) attached along the open side of the body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the body frame 3. By inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it to one side (rotating in the direction opposite to the direction in which the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2), the door frame hook portion is obtained. The engagement between 1041 and the hook cover 165 is released, and the closed state of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released.

[4-2. Plate unit]
Next, the plate unit 300 will be described. The plate unit 300 includes an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302 for storing the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740, and also hits the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 via a ball feeding unit. It can be supplied to the device 650.

  The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 is formed in a curved shape so as to project forward from the left direction toward the center in a front view, and linearly forward from the center toward the right direction. It is formed to project. An operation unit attachment portion to which the operation unit 400 is attached is formed at the center of the upper portion of the dish unit 300, and a liquid crystal attachment portion 314d for attaching the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 470 is formed on the right side of the operation unit attachment portion. .. The upper plate upper panel 314 in which the liquid crystal mounting portion 314d is formed is formed in a plate shape, and when this portion is pressed downward by a player, for example, the portion is bent downward. When the pressing force exceeds a predetermined force, the upper plate upper panel 314 is broken. This is because the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is expensive, and when the player presses the screen of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 with the hand, the force is received by the upper plate upper panel 314. The upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is prevented from being damaged by bending the upper plate upper panel 314. That is, the upper plate upper panel 314 is damaged before the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is damaged. If the upper plate upper panel 314 is damaged, the plate unit 300 will be replaced. In this case, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is detached from the broken upper plate upper panel 314 and attached to the upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 to be replaced for reuse.

  Further, in the plate unit 300, an upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 for removing the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 according to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341, and a lower plate ball removing button 354. In accordance with the operation of the lower plate 302, the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 for pulling out the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 through the lower plate ball removing hole 324b, and the pachinko machine 1 which is installed adjacent to The ball rental unit 360 for operating the CR unit.

[4-2-1. Operation unit]
The operation unit 400 is arranged on the front surface of the upper plate 301 at the substantially center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and has a dial operation unit 401 (operation unit) which can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 405 (which can be pressed by the player). The operation unit) is provided, and the operation of the player can be accepted or the dial operation unit 401 can be moved according to the game state, and not only the operation of driving the game ball to the player, , It is also possible to participate in the production during the game. The rotation (rotational direction) of the dial operation unit 401 is detected by a rotation detection switch included in the operation unit 400, and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 is detected by a pressing detection switch included in the operation unit 400.

  Further, the operation unit 400 can rotate the dial operation unit 401 in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. Further, the operation unit 400 causes the dial operation unit 401 to rotate in a stepwise manner by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using a stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, It is possible to assist the rotation, prevent it from turning intentionally, and give a click feeling to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by alternately repeating the rotation for rotating the dial drive motor 414 in small increments and the rotation for rotating it in reverse.

[4-2-2. Ball rental unit]
The ball lending unit 360 includes a ball lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed rearward, and a lending balance display portion 363 between the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362. When the ball lending button 361 is operated, it is detected by the ball lending switch 365a, and when the return button 362 is operated, it is detected by the return switch 365b. The display content of the remaining number display 365c can be visually confirmed through the remaining lending display unit 363. A CR unit lamp 365d is arranged adjacent to the remaining number display 365c, and the light emission mode of the CR unit lamp 365d can be visually confirmed through the lending remaining display portion 363. The ball lending switch 365a, the return switch 365b, the remaining count display 365c, and the CR unit lamp 365d are mounted on the count display plate 365, and the count display plate 365 is mounted inside the ball rental unit 360. . In this ball rental unit 360, when a ball or a prepaid card is inserted into a ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a ball lending button 361 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls are placed in a dish unit. It is possible to rent (pay out) into the upper plate 301 of 300, and when the return button 362 is pressed, the balance of the cash and the prepaid card inserted after subtracting the balance of the loan will be returned. ing. In addition, the remaining balance display unit 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

[4-3. Ball feeding unit]
Next, the ball feeding unit 580 will be described. The ball feeding unit 580 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be supplied to the upper plate ball. It is possible to pull out to the lower tray 302 by operating the upper tray ball removing button 341 of the removing mechanism 340.

  In the ball feeding unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharging port of the upper plate 301 and the ball feeding opening of the door frame base body 110, and the penetration port penetrated in the front-back direction. , And a box-shaped front cover that has a ball outlet that opens below the entrance and that is open to the rear, and a box-shaped that closes the rear end of the front cover and opens the front, and penetrates in the front-back direction. Then, the rear cover having a hitting ball supply port 582a for supplying the game ball that has entered from the entrance port of the front cover to the hitting ball launching device 650, and pivoting around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover and the front cover. A ball-removing member that is pivotally supported and has a partition portion that separates the entry opening and the ball-removing opening at the rear side of the front cover, and one game ball on the partition portion of the ball-removing member Upward and downward between the front cover and the rear cover to the supply port 582a And Tamaoku member rotatably supported around an axis extending to, and a Tamaoku solenoid 585 to rotate the Tamaoku member.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member receives one game ball, while the ball feeding solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member receives it. The game ball is adapted to be sent (supplied) to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

[4-4. Handle device]
Next, the handle device 500 will be described. The handle device 500 includes a handle base that is fixed to a handle bracket attached to the front surface of the door frame base body 110, has a cylindrical shape, and has a front end that bulges out in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and that is rotatable relative to the handle base. It is arranged on the front of the rotary handle main body 506, which is fixed to the front of the rotary handle main body, which is fixed to the front of the rotary handle main body, which is arranged on the front side, and which is integrally rotatable with the rear of the rotary handle main body. And a front end cover 508 which is fixed to the handle base and cooperates with the handle base to rotatably support the front of the rotary handle body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle body.

  Further, the handle device 500 is attached and fixed so as to project from the front side to the rear side at the center of rotation in front of the rotary handle body, and is fitted to the shaft member having a non-circular bearing portion at the rear end, and the bearing portion of the shaft member. A potentiometer 512 having a detection shaft part that is rotatable together and non-rotatably fitted to the front surface of the handle base, and a potentiometer 512 fixed to the front surface of the handle base so as to sandwich the potentiometer 512 with the handle base. A switch support member having a through hole through which the shaft portion can pass, a touch switch 516 attached to the rear surface of the switch support member, and a touch stop switch 516 attached to a different position on the rear surface of the switch support member. , A single-shot button that is rotatably supported by the switch support member and actuates the firing stop switch 518 And a handle that is disposed so as to cover the outer periphery of the shaft member and that urges the front of the rotating handle body 506 and the rear of the rotating handle body to return to the original rotation position (the rotation end in the counterclockwise direction in front view). And a return spring. The potentiometer 512 is for electrically adjusting the strength with which the game ball is launched toward the game area 1100 according to the rotational position of the front of the rotary handle body 506. In addition, after the rotary handle main body 506 and after the rotary handle main body, the rotary handle body is rotated from the original rotation position to the limit rotation position that is the maximum rotation position in the clockwise direction in the front view (the rotation end in the clockwise direction in the front view). To do.

  Further, in the handle device 500, the potentiometer 512 is a variable resistor, and when the front of the rotary handle main body 506 and the rear of the rotary handle main body are rotated, the detection shaft portion of the potentiometer 512 rotates via the shaft member. .. Then, the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512 changes according to the rotation position (rotation angle) of the detection shaft portion, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 654 in the ball striking device 650 changes according to the internal resistance of the potentiometer 512, and the rotation handle A game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a launching intensity (comparable) according to the rotation angle before the main body 506 and after the rotary handle main body, that is, the rotational position before the rotary handle main body 506 and after the rotary handle main body. There is.

[4-5. Foul cover unit]
Next, the foul cover unit 540 will be described. The foul cover unit 540 is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 below the game window 101, and has a game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700 or a ball that has been shot by the ball striking device 650. The game balls (foul balls) that have not reached the area 1100 are guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 includes a cover base that is open on the front side and has a plurality of flow paths for gaming balls inside, and a front cover that closes the front end of the cover base.

  The cover base of the foul cover unit 540 has a first ball entrance 542a which is arranged in the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a first base entrance 542a which communicates with the first ball entrance and expands to the right in the front view as it goes to the front end of the cover base 542. Inside the cover base that communicates with the one ball passage and the second ball passage 542c that is arranged outside the first ball inlet 542a (right side in rear view) and is larger than the first ball inlet 542a. , A second sphere entrance 542c that extends downward and inclines so as to decrease toward the lower right corner in front view. The first ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are the normal ball exit 774 and the full ball exit 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Are formed at positions facing each other. In addition, the second ball passage in the cover base, the height of the portion extending in the left-right direction along the lower end is about three times the height of the outer diameter of the game ball, a predetermined amount of game balls An accommodating space capable of accommodating is formed.

  In addition, the cover base 542 is a foul ball inlet 542e which is disposed in the substantially center upper portion in the left-right direction and is opened upward, and a foul capable of guiding the game ball to an upper part near the downstream of the second ball passage, communicating with the foul ball inlet 542e. And a ball passage. Further, the cover base includes an opening / closing operation piece for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the rear surface of the second ball entrance lower side. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece abuts on a spherical contact portion of the opening / closing crank in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, thereby rotating the opening / closing crank to open the opening / closing shutter 792. It can be opened.

  The front cover of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base, is arranged in the upper left corner of the front view, and communicates with the first ball passage of the cover base, and penetrates in the front-back direction. An outlet and a second ball outlet that is disposed in the lower right corner when viewed from the front and communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 542 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet of the front cover is connected to the upper plate ball supply port of the plate unit 300 through the cutout portion of the door frame base unit 100. The second ball outlet is connected to the rear end of the lower dish ball supply gutter of the dish unit 300 through the ball passage port of the door frame base body 110.

  The foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball inlet 542a through the first ball passage to the dish unit 300. The upper plate 301 can be supplied to the upper plate 301 through the upper plate ball supply port. In addition, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game balls supplied from the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branching unit 770 of the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball inlet 542c through the second ball passage to the second ball outlet. The lower plate 302 can be supplied to the lower plate 302 through the lower plate ball supply gutter and the lower plate ball supply port of the plate unit 300.

  Further, in the foul cover unit 540, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball inlet 542e is located below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3, and the ball striking device is provided. When the game ball shot by 650 becomes a foul ball without reaching the game area 1100 and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 can discharge (supply) the game ball received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet to the lower plate 302 of the dish unit 300 through the foul ball passage and the second ball passage. You can do it.

  Further, the foul cover unit 540 forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side in front view) of the accommodation space in the second ball passage, and is pivotally supported by the cover base so as to be pivotable by the game balls stored in the accommodation space. The member, a full tank switch 550 that detects the swing of the swing member, and a spring that biases the swing member in a direction in which the full member switch 550 does not detect the swing member are provided. The swing member has a lower end rotatably supported with respect to the cover base, and an upper end that rotates leftward when viewed from the front. To form. Further, the swinging member is biased by the spring to a position where it is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the swing member has a detection piece protruding outward on a side surface opposite to the accommodation space side, and this detection piece is detected by the full-tank switch 550. In other words, based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, it is possible to determine whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full.

[5. Overall structure of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. 8 is a front view of the game board, and FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 8 viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, the game board 4 has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a player operates the handle device 500 so that a game ball as a game medium is hit in a game area 1100. A frame-shaped front component member 1110 that defines the outer periphery, and a position where the front component member 1110 can be seen from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the lower right corner when viewed from the front. And a plurality of openings 1158 that are attached to the front side of the front component member 1110 so as to close the game area 1100 and that penetrate through the game area 1100 in a predetermined shape in the front-rear direction. A plate-shaped game panel 1150 having, a front unit 2000 attached to the opening 1158 of the game panel 1150 from the front side, and a game panel A back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface 150, and a.

  Further, the game board 4 is disposed between the game panel 1150 and the back unit 3000, and is inserted from the rear side of the game panel 1150 into a plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed so as to penetrate the game panel 1150. A panel lens member 2500, a liquid crystal display device that is detachably attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 and can display a predetermined effect image that can be visually recognized from the player side according to the game state, and a lower portion of the back unit 3000. A board holder 1160 attached to the lower rear surface of the game panel 1150 so as to cover the rear side, and a main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1160 are provided.

[5-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component 1110 will be described. The outer shape of the front component member 1110 is a substantially rectangular shape that can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction. The outer periphery of the area 1100 is partitioned. The front constituent member 1110 has an outer rail 1111 that extends in a circular arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a front view in a clockwise direction and extends in an arc shape along a circumferential direction in a clockwise direction, and extends to a diagonally upper right portion after passing through an upper end in the left-right direction in a front view. An inner rail 1112 that is disposed inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view so that the inner rail 1112 smoothly continues from a lower end of the inner rail 1112. An inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the counterclockwise circumferential direction in front view, the end (upper end) of the inner peripheral rail 1113 and the outer rail 1111. The end portion (upper end) of the game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1111 can be contacted with the stop portion 1114, the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113. At the boundary of the game area 1100, the outer opening guide surface 1115, which is arranged at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 and becomes lower toward the rear, is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and closes the outer rail 1111. As described above, it is rotatable only between a closed position that extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1112 and an open position that rotates clockwise in a front view to open the space between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111. The backflow prevention member 1116 is biased by a spring so as to return to the closed position side.

  When the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, the front component 1110 has a lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, and the launch rail 660 of the hitting ball launching device 650 of the main body frame 3 (see FIG. 1). (See) is located on the extension line. Between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, a space that is widened in the left-right direction and downward is formed, and a game ball launched along the launch rail 660 of the ball launching device 650. By jumping over the space, it can be driven into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball hit between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1112 is installed. , By turning to the open position side against the biasing force, it is possible to enter the game area 1100.

  Further, when the game ball is strongly hit in the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the stop portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. It is possible to forcibly change the rolling direction of the game ball by bringing the game ball into contact with this stopper 1114, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It is designed to prevent movement. Even if the game ball that has entered (struck) into the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the biasing force. Thus, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

  Further, when the game ball hit into the game area 1100 is not received in the starting ports 2101 and 2102 of the front unit 2000 and the winning holes 2103, 2104 and 2201, etc., it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100, An outer outlet guide surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113 is guided to the outer outlet 1151 of the game panel 1150 and discharged from the outer outlet 1151 to the lower rear side of the game board 4. ..

  On the other hand, when the game ball shot from the hitting ball launching device 650 cannot cross the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112 and enter the game area 1100, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 Rolling downwards in the opposite direction, and a foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the firing rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 ( 1) (see FIG. 1) and is received by the foul ball inlet 542e (see FIG. 1) of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5 located in the lower part of the foul space 626, and is received in the dish unit 300. It is adapted to be discharged to the lower plate 302 (see FIG. 7).

  The outer rail 1111 of the front component member 1110 has a metal plate attached to its surface to improve wear resistance due to rolling of the game ball and to allow the game ball to roll smoothly. ing. Further, the stopper portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin arranged on the surface thereof, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides, the impact is mitigated. In addition to being able to play, the game ball can be repelled inward.

  Further, the front component 1110 is arranged at the left end in the front view in the vertical direction with a space therebetween in the vertical direction, and a pair of positioning recesses 1119 that are recessed from the front to the rear and open at the left end, and are spaced apart in the vertical direction at the right end in the front view. A pair of game board stoppers 1120 that are arranged, a fixed recess 1121 that is arranged on the left side of the outer rail 1111 on the left side in front view and is opened downward and is formed in an arc shape on the upper side, and is recessed from the front side, and the lower end on front view. A ball passage notch 1122, which is notched in a rectangular shape and extends in the left-right direction upward from the lower end, is provided in the vicinity of the left end of the. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component member 1110 is fitted to a positioning member 956 (see FIG. 5) attached to the inside of the side crime prevention plate 950 in the main body frame 3 to make a game board holding port 601 (see FIG. 5). The front end of the game board 4 inserted in) can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably engaged with the game board engaging portion of the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 is attached to the game board member. The front end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 in front view can be restricted from moving in the front-rear direction by locking the stop portion.

  Further, the fixed recess 1121 of the front component member 1110, in a state in which the game board 4 is inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, a game board fixing tool 690 pivotally supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 (see FIG. 5). (See FIG. 5) is rotated clockwise in a front view, a fixing piece 690a (see FIG. 5) of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the game board 4 is played by the game board fixture 690. The lower end of the is restricted from moving forward. Further, the ball passage cutout 1122 of the front component member 1110 has a similar ball passage cutout 1152 formed at the same position of the game panel 1150, and the game board 4 is provided with a game board holding port 601 of the main frame 3. The front end of the full tank branching unit 770 (see FIG. 5) is inserted into the ball passage cutouts 1122 and 1152 in the state of being inserted into.

  A function display unit 1180, which will be described later, is arranged on the lower right side of the front component 1110 when viewed from the front.

[5-2. Table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 of the game board 4 will be described. The table unit 200 is an attacker unit 2100 which is disposed above the outlet 1151 in the lower center of the left and right direction in the game area 1100 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 1150, and on the left side of the attacker unit 2100, the outer circumference of the game area 1100. A side winning hole member 2200 arranged along the front side of the game panel 1150 and supported by a frame-shaped center accessory 2300 supported by the game panel 1150 arranged substantially in the center of the game area 1100. There is.

  The table unit 2000 is adapted to be inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 formed at a position corresponding to the game area 1100 in the game panel 1150 and then attached to the front surface of the game panel 1150. The portion projecting to the front side of the game panel 1150 is located in the game area 1100. As a result, the table unit 2000 comes into contact with the game ball that is driven into the game area 1100 at an appropriate position, and together with the obstacle nail that is planted on the front surface of the game panel 1150, with respect to the movement of the game ball. It is possible to add a change. In addition, the table unit 2000 can decorate the inside of the game area 1100.

[5-2-1. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described. The attacker unit 2100 has a plurality of inlets (winning holes) in which the game balls driven into the game area 1100 can be received. A starting opening 2101, a lower starting opening 2102 arranged below the upper starting opening 2101, and a rectangular shape extending below the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102 in the left-right direction. It is provided with a special winning opening 2103 and a general winning opening 2104 arranged on the left and right sides of the big winning opening 2103 and slightly upward. The game balls received in the upper starting opening 2101, the lower starting opening 2102, the large winning opening 2103, and the general winning opening 2104 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150.

  The upper start port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 is open on the upper side, and game balls can be always accepted (winning). On the other hand, the lower starting port 2102 arranged below the upper starting port 2101 is provided with a pair of movable pieces 2106 which can be opened by a starting port solenoid 2105 (see FIG. 99) between the lower starting port 2102 and the upper starting port 2101. In the state where the pair of movable pieces 2106 stand up substantially vertically, the upper starting opening 2101 and the pair of movable pieces 2106 make it impossible to receive the game ball into the lower starting opening 2102, whereas the pair of movable pieces 2106 can move. When the piece 2106 is opened in the left-right direction, the game ball can be received in the lower starting opening 2102. That is, the lower starting opening 2102 is a variable winning opening by the pair of movable pieces 2106. The pair of movable pieces 2106 is opened and closed by driving the starting opening solenoid 2105 based on detection of passage of a game ball by the gate switch 2352 of the gate portion 2350 in the center accessory 2300 described later.

  Further, the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 can be opened and closed by an opening / closing member 2107 having a horizontally long rectangular shape capable of closing the opening. The opening / closing member 2107 has a lower side pivotally supported so that it can close the special winning opening 2103 in a substantially vertical state to make it difficult to receive a game ball, and the upper side moves to the front side. When it is turned to, the special winning opening 2103 can be opened to easily accept the game ball. This opening / closing member 2107 is in a state in which the large winning opening 2103 is closed in a normal gaming state, and a special lottery is performed when a game ball is received (starting winning) in the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102. According to the lottery result (when the result of the special lottery is "big hit" or "small hit"), the attacker solenoid 2108 (see FIG. 99) is driven to open and close.

  Further, the general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened upward, and the game balls can be always received (winning).

  Although not shown in detail, the attacker unit 2100 has a lower start opening switch 2109 for detecting a game ball received in the lower start opening 2102 and a count switch for detecting a game ball received in the special winning opening 2103. 2110 is further provided, and the game ball detected by the lower start opening switch 2109 and the count switch 2110 is discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160. It should be noted that an upper starting opening switch 3022 for detecting a game ball received in the upper starting opening 2101 and a general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting a gaming ball received in the general winning opening 2104 are provided in the back unit 3000. ..

[5-2-2. Side winning mouth member]
Next, the side winning opening member 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described. The side winning opening member 2200 is inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 1158 formed on the left side of the opening 1158 into which the attacker unit 2100 is inserted and fixed, in the lower part to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the game panel 1150. Above, the two are fixed to the front of the game panel 1150, and are arranged so as to face each other along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 so as to be aligned with the general winning opening 2104 on the left side in the front view of the attacker unit 2100. A general winning opening 2201 is provided. These two general winning openings 2201 are open upward so that game balls can be always received (winning), and the gaming balls received in the general winning openings 2201 are guided from the front side to the rear side of the game panel 1150. After that, it is detected by a general winning opening switch 3020 provided in the back unit 3000 described later.

  In addition, the side winning opening member 2200 is arranged at a position where the left end portion of the side winning opening member 2200 is substantially in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 1100, and the first winning portion is inclined so as to become lower toward the right end portion. The shelf portion 2202 and the first shelf portion 2202 are arranged on the opposite side and the lower side with two general winning openings 2201 sandwiched therebetween, and the center side of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction (the lower starting opening 2102 and the big winning opening of the attacker unit 2100). It is provided with a second shelf portion 2203 that becomes lower toward the 2103 side), and the game balls that have flowed down along the outer periphery of the game area 1100 by the first shelf portion 2202 can be moved to the center side of the game area 1100. You can do it.

  It should be noted that the two general winning openings 2201 are arranged on the right side of the right end portion of the first shelf portion 2202, and even if the game balls are brought to the center side of the game area 1100 by the first shelf portion 2202, There is a possibility of winning a prize in the general winning opening 2201. Further, the upper side between the two general winning openings 2201 is also provided with a third shelf 2204 that is inclined so as to be lower toward the center of the game area 1100.

  The side winning opening member 2200 is formed to have translucency as a whole, and although detailed illustration is omitted, a side winning opening decoration substrate is provided on the rear side of the second shelf 2203. At the same time, a side lamp decoration board 3014 in a back unit 3000, which will be described later, is arranged on the rear side of the side winning opening member 2200. With the side winning opening decoration board and the side lamp decoration board 3014, the side winning opening member 2200 is provided. Is said to be capable of luminescent decoration.

[5-2-3. Center goods]
Next, the center accessory 2300 of the table unit 2000 will be described. The center accessory 2300 is inserted from the front side into an opening 1158 that is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 1150, and then fixed to the front surface of the game panel 1150. It is formed in a frame shape in a size that occupies most of the area 1100, and the outer peripheral surface on the right side in front view has an arc shape so that a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed between the outer peripheral surface of the game area 1100 and the outer peripheral surface. While being formed, the left outer peripheral surface is formed on a substantially straight line that hangs so as to form a region of a predetermined width with the outer periphery of the game region 1100.

  This center accessory 2300 is an upper shelf portion 2301 inclined downward to the left from a position slightly rightward of the center in the left-right direction on the outer peripheral surface on the upper side of the front wall portion located on the front surface of the game panel 1150. Is provided, and the game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 flows down through the left side of the center role object 2300 when flowing down to the upper shelf portion 2301 and on the right side of the upper shelf portion 2301. The game ball flowing down (invading) to the center character 2300 passes rightward and flows down to the lower part of the game area 1100 at a stretch. In other words, if the game ball is hit so that the game ball enters the right side of the upper shelf portion 2301 of the center accessory 2300, the chance of enjoying the flow of the game ball is reduced, so that the hitting of the game ball is strong. It is possible to adjust the length appropriately, and to maintain a sense of tension so as to prevent a boring game.

  Further, the center accessory 2300 has entered the warp entrance 2302 and the warp entrance 2302 in which the game balls flowing down the game area 1100 can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150. A warp outlet (not shown) that discharges the game ball into the frame, and the game ball discharged from the warp exit is rolled in the left-right direction and then discharged into the game area 1100 above the attacker unit 2100 to be a center accessory. The stage 2310 formed on the upper surface of the lower side of the frame in 2300 is mainly provided.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 has a first stage to which the game ball discharged from the warp exit is supplied and a game ball from the first stage arranged on the front side of the first stage. It is provided with a second stage which is supplied and is capable of releasing a game ball into the game area 1100. The stage 2310 is formed in a curved surface shape such that the substantially center in the left-right direction is lowered. In addition, a chance entrance 2313 into which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the center in the left-right direction of the first stage, and the game ball that entered the chance entrance 2313 is a chance at the bottom end front surface of the center accessory 2300. It is designed to be discharged from the outlet 2314 into the game area 1100. The chance exit 2314 is arranged directly above the upper start opening 2101 in the attacker unit 2100, and the game ball discharged from the chance exit 2314 is accepted (wins) in the upper start opening 2101 with a high probability. ing.

  The stage 2310 of the center accessory 2300 is formed of a transparent member, and through this stage 2310, the ornamental body arranged below the stage 2310 of the back unit 3000 can be seen from the player side. Is becoming

  In addition, the center accessory 2300 is transparent on the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150, above the warp entrance 2302, and to the left so as to substantially contact the inner rail 1112. The arch part 2315 is further provided. The arch portion 2315 extends in a thin plate shape from a substantially front end of the front wall portion, and forms a space through which a game ball can pass between the arch portion 2315 and the front surface of the game panel 1150. As a result, the game ball that has been driven into the upper portion of the game area 1100 and guided to the left of the center role object 2300 by the upper shelf portion 2301 flows down to the downstream side through the rear side of the arch portion 2315. ..

  Further, the center accessory 2300 is provided with a gate portion 2350 for detecting passage of a game ball near the arch portion 2315 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall portion located on the front side of the game panel 1150. The gate portion 2350 is arranged on the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion on the upper side of the arch portion 2315 and detects a gate entrance into which a game ball flowing down the game area 1100 can enter, and a game ball entering the gate entrance. It is provided with a gate switch 2352 for turning on and a gate outlet for discharging the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 from the outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion to the game area 1100. In this embodiment, although not shown in detail, the gate exit of the gate portion 2350 is formed at the same height as the arch portion 2315, and the game ball detected by the gate switch 2352 is the arch. The part 2315 is made to look as if it were dived.

[5-3. Panel lens member]
Next, the panel lens member 2500 of the game board 4 will be described. The panel lens member 2500 has a plurality of light-emissions formed in a circular shape or an X shape at a position outside the opening 1158 into which the center accessory 2300 is inserted in the game area 1100 in the game panel 1150 so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The decorative hole is provided with a luminous decoration. The panel lens member 2500 includes a transparent upper panel lens 2510 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed on the upper left side of the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a plurality of transparent upper panel lenses 2510 arranged on the rear side of the surface. An upper panel lens substrate on which LEDs are mounted, a transparent lower panel lens 2520 corresponding to a plurality of light emitting decoration holes formed on the lower left side of the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a rear panel lens 2520 are arranged. And a lower panel lens substrate on the surface of which a plurality of LEDs are mounted.

  The upper panel lens 2510 and the lower panel lens 2520 in the panel lens member 2500 are a plurality of rod-shaped insertion light guides that protrude forward from the plate-shaped lens base portion and have substantially the same shape as the shape of the light emission decoration hole to be inserted. It has a section. In a state in which the insertion light guide portion is inserted into the light emitting decoration hole of the game panel 1150 from the rear side, the tip thereof is formed so as to substantially match the front surface of the game panel 1150, and the game flowing down the front surface of the game panel 1150. It does not affect the sphere as much as possible.

  The panel lens member 2500 can appropriately emit light from the LEDs of the upper panel lens substrate and the lower panel lens substrate so that the region where the game ball flows down can be illuminated by using an opaque gaming panel 1150 such as plywood. The decoration of the game panel 1150 which has never been seen can be shown to the player, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be made conspicuous to differentiate it from other pachinko gaming machines.

[5-4. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 will be described. The back unit 3000 is attached and fixed to the rear surface of the game panel 1150, and a back box 3001 for supporting the liquid crystal display device 1900 at a position away from the game panel 1150 to the rear side by a predetermined distance, and a liquid crystal display in the back box 3001. An upper unit 3100 arranged on the upper side of the device 1900, a character unit 3400 arranged on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001, and a gear decoration arranged on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001. The body unit 3500 is mainly provided.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is arranged at a position corresponding to the side winning opening member 2200 in the front unit 2000 mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1150 near the lower left front end of the back box 3001, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the surface. The side lamp decoration board 3014, the game ball attached to the lower front end of the back box 3001 and received in the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200, and the game received in the left general winning opening 2104 of the attacker unit 2100. A left guiding member 3016 that guides the ball downward, and a right that is arranged on the right side of the left guiding member 3016 and that guides the game ball that is received by the upper starting port 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and the general winning port 2104 on the right side downward. The guide member 3018 is mainly provided.

  Further, although not shown in detail, the back unit 3000 includes a lamp drive board box 3423 having a horizontally long rectangular shape arranged in a lower rear portion of the back box 3001 and housing the lamp drive board 4170, and below the lamp drive board box 3423. Of the horizontally long rectangular motor drive board box 3430 that accommodates the motor drive board 4180 and the lamp drive board box 3423 and the motor drive board box 3430 that are fixed to the rear side of the back box 3001 and are arranged on the left side in rear view. A panel relay terminal plate 4161, a horizontally elongated rectangular upper resistance substrate arranged on the upper rear side of the back box 3001, and a lock member attached to the rear side of the back box 3001 for holding the liquid crystal display device 1900 in a removable manner. , Are further provided.

  In the present embodiment, the back unit 3000 can be seen from the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2300 in the front unit 2000, and each unit 3100, 3400 shaped into a predetermined shape. , 3500, etc., makes it possible to characterize the concept of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the back unit 3000 is configured such that each unit 3100, 3400, 3500 is movable independently or in association with each other according to the game state, and the movement allows the player to change the game state. It is possible to suggest the arrival of a chance or the like and entertain the player.

[5-4-1. Back box]
Next, the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The back box 3001 is formed in a box shape with the front side opened, and is provided with a plurality of flange-shaped fixing portions 3001a protruding outward at the front end, and on the rear side of the game panel 1150 via the fixing portions 3001a. It is supposed to be fixed. In addition, the back box 3001 has a rectangular opening formed in the approximate center of the rear wall, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 supported on the rear side can be viewed from the player side through the opening. Further, the back box 3001 is provided with mounting portions for mounting and fixing the units 3100, 3400, 3500, the substrates 3014, etc. at appropriate positions.

  Further, although not shown, the back box 3001 inserts and locks, on the right side of the opening in the rear view, one fixing piece 1902 protruding outward from both the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1900 (right side in the rear view). A liquid crystal support is provided, and a lock member is attached to the left side of the opening when viewed from the rear side, and the lock member supports the other fixing piece 1902 (the left side when viewed from the rear side) of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 3001.

[5-4-2. Induction member]
Next, the left guide member 3016 and the right guide member 3018 will be described. The left guiding member 3016 guides and discharges the game spheres received in the general winning opening 2201 of the side winning opening member 2200 and the general winning opening 2104 on the left side of the attacker unit 2100 through different flow paths downward. The general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting passage of a game ball is provided in each flow path. On the other hand, the right guide member 3018 guides and discharges the game ball received in the upper start opening 2101 of the attacker unit 2100 and the general winning opening 2104 on the right side through different flow paths down to the vicinity of the lower end. The upper start opening switch 3022 is provided in the flow path corresponding to the upper start opening 2101, and the general winning opening switch 3020 is provided in the flow path corresponding to the general winning opening 2104 on the right side. Further, the right guiding member 3018 is provided with a magnetic detection switch 3024 capable of detecting magnetism.

  The game balls guided downward by the left guiding member 3016 and the right guiding member 3018 are discharged onto the bottom wall portion of the substrate holder 1160, and discharged from the out ball discharging portion 1161 of the substrate holder 1160 below the game board 4. It has become so.

[5-4-3. Upper unit]
Next, the upper unit 3100 will be described. The upper unit 3100 is formed in a horizontally long shape as a whole, and is attached and fixed above the opening facing the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001. The upper unit 3100 includes a rotary ornamental body unit 3200 having a circular shape in a front view, which is disposed on the front surface at a substantially center in the left-right direction, and an elevating mechanism which is disposed on the rear side of the rotary ornamental body unit 3200 and moves the rotary ornamental body unit 3200 up and down. 3250, a swinging decorative body unit 3300 arranged at the rear side of the elevating mechanism 3250 at approximately the center in the left-right direction, and a movable ceiling unit 3350 arranged on both left and right sides of the swinging decorative body unit 3300. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 81, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is attached and fixed to the upper center of the upper unit 3100 on the front side of the upper side of the rotating decorative body unit 3200. The rotating decorative body unit 3200 is vertically moved by the elevating mechanism 3250 between an ascending position located above the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and a descending position located substantially at the center of the first liquid crystal display device 1900. You can do it. In this rotating decorative body unit 3200, a rotating decorative body formed in the shape of a shuriken arranged on the front surface is rotated, and when it is rotated, the rotating radius of the rotating decorative body is expanded by its centrifugal force. It is like this.

  Further, since the rotary decoration unit 3200 not only rotates at the end but also protrudes outward in the radial direction, the rotation radius of the entire rotary decoration body is expanded and the appearance is greatly changed. It is possible to make a strong impact on the player, suppress the entertaining of the player and reduce the interest in the game, and attract the player's attention. It is possible to make it easier to select the pachinko gaming machine 1 as a pachinko gaming machine that plays a game with being greatly differentiated from other pachinko gaming machines.

  The swinging ornament unit 3300 is provided with swinging ornaments arranged on the left and right of the rear side thereof so as to be adjacent to the rotating ornamental unit 3200 located in the raised position, and the left and right swing ornaments are arranged according to the game state. The body can be swung to the left and right all at once.

  The movable ceiling unit 3350 includes plate-shaped ceiling decoration bodies that extend horizontally in the left and right ends of the upper unit 3100. This ceiling ornament is formed so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction with the front end side as the center, and the rear end side of the ceiling ornament is rotated in a descending direction according to the gaming state. Is becoming

[5-4-4. Character unit]
Next, the character unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The character unit 3400 is provided with a three-dimensionally shaped character body that is a model of a ninja, and the character body can move in the left-right direction from the right end position to a position closer to the center side depending on the game state. You can do it. Further, when the character body of the character unit 3400 moves in the left-right direction, the character body is rotated by a predetermined angle around an axis extending in the up-down direction along with the movement.

  Further, the character body of the character unit 3400 is configured such that the head can reciprocate about an axis extending in the left-right direction, and the right arm can reciprocate about an axis extending in the up-down direction. You can do it. Thus, by reciprocally rotating the head, it is possible to perform a motion as if the character is nodding. In addition, by horizontally reciprocally rotating the right arm, it is possible to perform an action as if the character were throwing a shuriken.

[5-4-5. Gear decoration unit]
Next, the gear ornament unit 3500 of the back unit 3000 will be described. The gear decoration unit 3500 is provided with gear-shaped gear decorations that are rotatable about an axis extending in the left-right direction and are arranged in plural in the up-and-down direction. It is designed to rotate.

[5-4-6. Liquid crystal display]
Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 of the game board 4 will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3001 of the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided with fixing pieces 1902 protruding outward from both left and right sides, and is attached to the back box 3001 via the fixing pieces 1902.

  Although not shown in detail, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is provided with a peripheral board box 1905 that houses a peripheral control board 4140 on the rear side thereof.

[6. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1180 on the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. The function display unit 1180 is attached and arranged at a predetermined position of the front component member 1110. FIG. 10 is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit in the game board in a state where the function display unit is attached to the pachinko game machine.

  As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 10, the function display unit 1180 has a game state display including one LED for displaying a game state that changes depending on a game ball driven into the game area 1100 at the left end in front view. 1183 and upper special symbol memory display 1184, which is made up of two LEDs lined up and down on the right side of the game state display 1183, for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game balls into the upper starting opening 2101, Upper special symbol consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the first special lottery result, which is arranged on the right side of the special symbol memory display 1184 and is drawn by receiving the game balls into the upper starting opening 2101 The display 1185 and a second lottery which is arranged diagonally to the upper right of the upper special symbol display 1185 and is accepted by receiving the game ball into the lower starting opening 2102. Lower special symbol display 1186 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the result of another lottery as a second special symbol, and two LEDs lined up and down on the right side of the lower special symbol display 1186. It is provided with a lower special symbol memory display device 1187 for displaying the number of holdings regarding the acceptance of the game ball to 2102.

  In the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180, in order to display the number of reservations regarding the passage of the gate unit 2350 by the game balls, which are arranged side by side in an arc shape substantially above the inner peripheral rail 1113 from directly above the lower special symbol display device 1186. Normal symbol memory display 1188 consisting of four LEDs, and for displaying the normal lottery result lottery which is arranged below the normal symbol memory display and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350 as a regular symbol The normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED and the normal symbol memory display 1188 are arranged side by side diagonally on the upper right side, and when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit", the special winning opening 2103 is opened and closed. A round display 1190 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of times the pattern is repeated (the number of rounds).

  The gaming status indicator 1183 is a full-color LED whose red, green, and orange colors can be changed, and various gaming status ( For example, a probability variation state, a time reduction state, a probability variation short time state, a big hit game state, a small hit game state, etc.) can be displayed.

  Upper special symbol storage display 1184, when the first special symbol can not be variably displayed in the upper special symbol display 1185, when the game ball is accepted in the upper starting port 2101, the start of variable display is suspended ( The number of stored (memorized number) of the stored first special symbols is displayed. Above this special symbol memory display 1184 has a first special symbol memory lamp 1184a consisting of a predetermined LED, and a first special symbol memory lamp 1184b, the first special symbol memory lamp 1184a, 1184b lighting · The number of holdings can be displayed by a blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holding is one, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off, and when the number of holding is two, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a, 1184b. Are lit together, when the number of reservations is three, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a blinks and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is lit, and when the number of reservations is four, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are both It is supposed to blink. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  The lower special symbol storage display 1187, when the second special symbol can not be variably displayed in the lower special symbol display 1186, when the game ball is received in the lower starting opening 2102, the start of the variable display is suspended ( The stored number of stored second special symbols (memory number) is displayed. This lower special symbol memory display 1187 has a second special symbol memory lamp 1187a and a second special symbol memory lamp 1187b consisting of a predetermined LED, lighting of the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a, 1187b. The number of holdings can be displayed by a blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holding is one, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off, and when the number of holding is two, the second special symbol storage display lamp 1187a, Both 1187b are lit, when the number of reservations is three, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is lit, and when the number of reservations is four, the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a, 1187b are Both are designed to blink. In the present embodiment, up to four are reserved.

  The upper special symbol display device 1185 and the lower special symbol display device 1186 display the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that have been drawn by receiving the game balls into the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102. That is, the 7-segment LED stops for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result and then stops, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result are played by the stopped 7-segment LED emission pattern (special pattern). It can be made to be recognized by the person in charge.

  Ordinary symbol display device 1189 is a red, green, or orange color and a full-color LED whose emission color can be changed, and the gate portion 2350 is played by a combination of the emitted light color and lighting / blinking. It is possible to display the result of a normal lottery that is drawn by passing a ball. The normal symbol display by the normal symbol display device 1189, like the special symbol, is changed and displayed for a predetermined time, and then stopped and displayed in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result.

  The normal symbol storage display 1188, when the normal symbol can not be displayed in the normal symbol display 1189 in a variable manner, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2350, the start of the variable display is suspended (stored) normal symbol. The number of reservations (memory number) is displayed. This normal symbol memory display 1188 includes four normal symbol memory lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the normal symbol memory lamp 1188a from the bottom depending on the number of holdings. By sequentially lighting up to 1188d, it is possible to display the number of reserved symbols of ordinary symbols. In the present embodiment, up to four variable display of normal symbols are reserved (stored).

  The round indicator 1190 is equipped with a two-round display lamp 1190a and a fifteen-round display lamp 1190b each made of a predetermined LED, and by turning on each lamp, the number of rounds in the "big hit" game can be displayed. It is like this.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the function display unit 1180 can be viewed from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko game machine 1. There is. Game state display 1183, upper special symbol memory display 1184, upper special symbol display 1185, lower special symbol display 1186, lower special symbol memory display 1187, normal symbol memory display 1188, normal symbol display 1189, and The round display 1190 is attached to the front surface of the function display board 1191. A connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear projection of the function display unit 1180.

  In this embodiment, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component member 1110 of the game board 4, as compared with the case where it is provided in the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1150, The function display unit 1180 can be used as the basic configuration of the gaming board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be simplified and the cost can be prevented from increasing, and the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (table Even if the detailed structure of the game board 4 embodied by the unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 and capable of characterizing the model of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different, the position of the function display unit 1180 does not change, so the player or the game Make sure the position of the function display unit 1180 is recognized by the clerk in the hall without any confusion. So that the can.

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. 11 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 11, and FIG. 13 is a payout control board, a CR unit, and a frequency which constitute the main board. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a lending device connection terminal board for gaming balls or the like that relays electrical connection with a display board, FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 11, and FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 16 is a block diagram around a sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal and a sound control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the control structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control board 4100, a payout control board 4110, and a peripheral control board 4140, and is responsible for various controls. First, the main control board will be described, and then the payout control board, the power supply board, and the peripheral control board will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 11, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power was turned on and the game operation is performed. A main control MPU 4100a, which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various control programs such as a main control program for controlling, various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and detection signals from various detection switches are input. Main control input circuit 4100b, a main control output circuit 4100c for outputting various signals to an external board, a main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d for driving various solenoids, a power failure or an instantaneous voltage of a predetermined voltage. A power failure monitoring circuit 4100e that monitors a sign of a stop is mainly provided.

  The main control MPU 4100a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built in.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 4100a. Since the ID code once assigned is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

  The main control input circuit 4100b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input with the detection signals from the various detection switches to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 4100b is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 4100b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset, which will be described later, so that the various signals based on the information are changed. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 4100c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate etc. are inputted to its various input terminals. Reset control main control output circuit 4100ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the stored information, and no reset control main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset terminal provided with the reset function It consists of and. The main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. In other words, the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by being reset by a main control system reset, which will be described later. Is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on is output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit 4100cb without the reset function outputs the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by not being reset by the main control system reset, which will be described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the base signal is output from its various output terminals.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the upper start opening switch 3022 for detecting a game ball entering the upper start opening 2101, the lower starting opening switch 2109 for detecting a game ball entering the lower starting opening 2102, and the general winning opening 2104. The detection signal from the general winning opening switch 3020 that detects the game ball that entered the ball and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. There is. Further, as shown in FIG. 8, a gate switch 2352 for detecting a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2350, a general winning opening switch 3020 for detecting a game ball entering the general winning opening 2201, and a large winning opening 2103 are entered. A detection signal from a count switch 2110 that detects a game ball and a magnetic detection switch 3024 that is attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 9 and detects fraud using a magnet is a panel relay attached to the game board 4. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the terminal board 4161 and the main control input circuit 4100b.

  The main control MPU 4100a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca based on the detection signal from each of these switches, thereby the main control output circuit with reset function. 4100ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and outputs a drive signal from the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d to the starting port solenoid 2105 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay terminal plate 4161, or a predetermined output thereof. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with the reset function, the main control output circuit 4100ca with the reset function, the panel relay terminal board 4161, and the function display board 1191, the upper special symbol display device. 1185, Special symbol display device 1186, upper special symbol memory display device 1184, lower special symbol memory display device 1187, normal symbol display device 1189, normal symbol memory display device 1188, game state display device 1183, and round display device 1190 To output.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a outputs various information regarding the game (game information) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with the reset function, so that the payout control is performed from the main control output circuit 4100ca with the reset function. Main control output with reset function by outputting various information (game information) to the board 4110 and outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the circuit 4100ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e.

  In the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the upper starting port switch 3022, the lower starting port switch 2109, the gate switch 2352, and the count switch 2110, whereas in general, As the winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches are used. This is because the game ball frequently enters the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2350, so that the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 are used. Gaming balls are also frequently detected. Therefore, the upper start port switch 3022, the lower start port switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 are proximity switches having a long life. In addition, when the big hit game state which is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2103 is opened and the game balls are frequently entered, so that the game balls are frequently detected by the count switch 2110. Therefore, the count switch 2110 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, the general winning opening 2104, 2201 in which the game ball does not enter frequently does not frequently be detected by the general winning opening switches 3020, 3020. For this reason, as the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, mechanical switches having a shorter life than the proximity switches are used.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands relating to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function, whereby the payout control from the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function is performed. Various commands are transmitted to the board 4110 as serial data. When the payout control board 4110 normally receives various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, the payout control board 4110 outputs a signal to that effect (payment main ACK signal) to the main control board 4100. This signal (payment main ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 4110 as serial data at the main control input circuit 4100b. Various commands are received as serial data at the input terminal. When the main control MPU 4100a completes the normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control output with a reset function. The signal is output to the circuit 4100ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca to the payout control board 4110.

  In addition, the main control MPU 4100a transmits, as serial data, various commands related to control of game production and various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function. Accordingly, various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 4100cb without the reset function to the peripheral control board 4140.

  Here, the main serial transmission port for transmitting various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 4100a is mainly configured by a main control CPU core 4100aa. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, a main control serial transmission port 4100ae, which is one of various main control serial I / O ports, etc., connects the bus 4100ah. It is connected via a circuit (see FIG. 21). The main serial transmission port 4100ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 as main serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 4100ea, a transmission buffer register 4100aeb, a serial management unit 4100aec, etc. 21). The main control CPU core 4100aa sets the command in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and outputs the transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 4100ea and starts to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 as main-circulation serial data. In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100aeb is 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 4100aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 4140 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 4100aec.

  The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. BC0 (see FIG. 17). The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. Various types of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are operation signals (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 described later is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 4110 and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b. At this time, the main control MPU 4100a completely erases it from the main control internal RAM. It is supposed to be (cleared).

[7-2. Discharge control board]
As shown in FIG. 12, a payout control board 4110 for controlling the payout of gaming balls, the payout control unit 4120 for performing various controls related to payout, the operation switch 860a having various functions, and the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. And an error LED display 860b for displaying. The operation switch 860a that also has a function as a RAM clear switch is a RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) based on a detection signal output by being operated. The RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in (.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 12, a payout control unit 4120, which performs various controls related to payout, controls a power-on process executed at power-on, and also pays out a game medium executed after a predetermined time has elapsed after power-on. Detecting from various control programs including a payout control program for controlling operations, a ROM for storing various commands, a payout control MPU 4120a which is a microprocessor having a RAM for temporarily storing data, and various detection switches for payout. A payout control input circuit 4120b to which a signal is input, a payout control output circuit 4120c for outputting various signals to an external board, and a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. For exchanging various signals between the payout motor drive circuit 4120d for And a, a CR unit output circuit 4120e for. In the payout control MPU 4120a, in addition to its built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and its built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built-in.

  The payout control program, under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a, sends various kinds of information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to the payout as payer serial data transmission signals via the payout control I / O port 4120b. Receive serial data by serial method. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, or operates the operation switch 860a as an error canceling unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error cancel navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancel command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error occurrence command and error cancel navigation command are respectively transmitted to the payer serial data. The serial data as a signal is output to the receiving port of the main control board 4100 via the payout control I / O port 4120b (command transmitting means). In addition, this payout control program executes payout control after a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed to start payout control. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 860a, and the output of the warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

  Further, the payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (body frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the body frame opening switch 619, a body frame opening command (first body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program sends a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. In addition to outputting, a body frame closing command (first body frame closing command) is output when a detection signal (body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the body frame opening switch 619.

  The payout control input circuit 4120b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input with the detection signals from the various detection switches to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 4120b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the payout control input circuit 4120b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset described later, and thus various signals based on the information are changed. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 4120c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. Dispensing control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, which has a reset function for forcibly resetting the generated information, and a dispensing control output circuit 4120cb without a reset function, which has no reset terminal and has no reset function It consists of and. The payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. That is, in the payout control output circuit 4120ca with the reset function, the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by a payout control system reset described later, and thus the information is output. Is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on is output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function outputs information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by not being reset by a payout control system reset, which will be described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the base signal is output from its various output terminals.

  First, the detection signal from the ball break switch 750 that detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 and the counting switch 751 that detects the game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage of the prize ball device 740 is the prize. It is inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the prize ball case substrate 754 of the ball device 740 and the payout control input circuit 4120b. The detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 for detecting the detection slits formed on the rotation detection board of the prize ball device 740 are as follows. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 that detects the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the body frame 3 and the body frame opening switch 619 that detects the opening of the body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are output to the payout control input circuit 4120b. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the.

  Further, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 for detecting whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 851, and through the payout control input circuit 4120b is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  The payout control MPU 4120a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 via the payout control input circuit 4120b at the input terminal of the serial input port thereof in a serial data system, and receives an operation signal (detection from the operation switch 860a). Signal) is output to the main control board 4100 via the payout control input circuit 4120b. When the payout control MPU 4120a completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board 4100 as serial data, a signal (payment main ACK signal) to that effect is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control output with a reset function. By outputting to the circuit 4120ca, the payout control output circuit with reset function 4120ca outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to the main control board 4100.

  Further, the payout control MPU 4120a sends various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control circuit without reset function 4120cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the control output circuit 4120cb to the main control board 4100. When the main control board 4100 normally receives various commands from the payout control board 4110 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 4110. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  Further, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, whereby the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function. From the payout motor drive circuit 4120d, the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4120d to the payout motor 744 via the prize ball case substrate 754, or from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the pachinko machine. By outputting the drive signal for displaying the state of the gaming machine 1 to the error control LED display 860b to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the error LED display 860b. Or output to.

  The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays alphanumeric characters and figures to indicate the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860b include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 4100 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, out of ball). Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, the player is informed that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the prize ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "ball ball" (specifically At the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 on the basis of the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, the payout rotary body and the game ball are meshed in the vicinity of the entrance, and the payout rotary body becomes difficult to rotate. Number) When "3" is displayed, the fact that "counting switch error" has occurred (specifically, there is a problem in the counting switch 751 based on the detection signal from the counting switch 751) is notified, and the number " When "5" is displayed, the fact that it is a "retry error" (specifically, that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value) is notified, and the number "6" is displayed. When it is, it is informed that it is "full" (specifically, it is a full game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is stored based on the detection signal from the full tank switch 550), When the number "7" is displayed, it indicates that "CR is not connected" (electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit 6). However, when the number "9" is displayed, it means that "there is stock (there is a prize ball stock (not yet paid))" (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out is a predetermined number of balls). Has been reached).

  Further, the payout control MPU 4120a outputs the number of balls actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with the reset function, thereby outputting the payout control output circuit 4120ca with the reset function. It outputs the number of balls actually paid out to the external terminal board 784 through a resistor (not shown).

  Further, the payout control board 4110 outputs various kinds of information (game information) about the game from the main control board 4100 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photo couplers (not shown) (infrared LEDs and photo ICs are built in), and a game hall (hall) through the plurality of photo couplers. ), The number of balls of the game ball and various information (game information, error contents regarding the payout operation of the game ball or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer. The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The hall computer does not malfunction or break down, and the main control board 4100 that advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the payout control board that controls the payout and the like. An abnormal voltage is applied to 4110 to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a of the ball lending unit 360 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return switch 365b shown in FIG. , And is input to the CR unit 6 via the terminal device connection terminal plate 869 for lending devices such as gaming balls. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 in a serial manner, and this signal is the CR unit. The payout control MPU 4120a is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port via the input / output circuit 4120e. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented gaming balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the remaining number display 365c to the gaming balls or the like. The lending device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365 are output, and this signal is input to the remaining frequency display 365c. Further, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the remaining number display 365c is configured such that the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input through the lending device connection terminal board 869 for gaming balls and the main door relay terminal board 880. There is.

  The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 17) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. There is. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4120a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is such that when the operation switch 860a is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, the operation signal is a predetermined signal of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control input circuit 4120b. The payout control MPU 4120a, which is input to the input terminal of the input port, determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is supposed to be completely erased. This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function, and is also output from the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function to the main control board 4100.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the terminal connection device for lending equipment such as game balls]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout controller 4120 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 13, the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 4110, and also has the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. The electrical connection between the boards is also relayed (more precisely, the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880. , The CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay The terminal board 880 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, between the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control substrate 4110, between the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay The board with the terminal board 880, and the board with the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by respective wirings (harnesses). In addition, AC24V described later from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal plate 869 for gaming balls and the like. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”) in this embodiment) from the supplied AC24V by a built-in voltage creating circuit (not shown), together with the ground LG. , While supplying to the payout control board 4110 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, while supplying to the frequency display plate 365 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. .

  The frequency display plate 365 is provided with a ball lending switch 365a, which is a push button switch, at the position corresponding to the ball lending button 361 of the ball lending unit 360 shown in FIG. A return switch 365b, which is a push button switch, is mounted at a position corresponding to the button 362, and a remaining count display 365c, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining lending display portion 363 of the ball rental unit 360.

  The ball LG switch 365a and the return switch 365b are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 361 is pressed, the ball lending switch 365a turns on (turns on) the ball lending switch 365a, and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending switch 365a is transmitted to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game. It is adapted to be input to the CR unit 6 via a ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When the return button 362 is pressed, the return switch 365b turns on (turns on) the return switch 365b, and the return operation signal RES from the return switch 365b is connected to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection. Input is made to the CR unit 6 via the terminal plate 869.

  The residual number display 365c is one in which three segment displays are arranged side by side in a row. Of these three-digit segment displays, one-digit segment display is sequentially driven, that is, a so-called dynamic lighting method is used to display three digits. The segment display of is controlled to light. By such lighting control, the remaining frequency indicator 365c displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The residual number display 365c displays the digit signals DG0 to DG2 (a total of three signals) for designating the 1-digit segment display among the 3-digit segment display and the designated 1-digit segment display. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be turned on and displayed are from the CR unit 6 to the rental ball connection device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board. When input through 880, the one-digit segment display sequentially emits light according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G. The contents by the light emission of can be viewed through the lending remaining display portion 363.

  A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display plate 365 adjacent to the remaining frequency display 365c. In the CR unit lamp 365d, the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending enable signal TDL through the current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC24V supplied from the power supply board 851 by the built-in voltage creating circuit, and when the ball lending switch 365a and the return switch 365b are in a valid ball lending ready state. Controls the logic of the ball lending enable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually confirmed through the remaining loan display portion 363. In addition, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the remaining number display 365c through the current limiting resistors mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 361 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending switch 365a is transmitted from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When input, BRDY, which is a ball rental request signal, is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU4120a) via the game ball or similar lending device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the CR unit 6 issues a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of lent balls (25 balls in the present embodiment, which corresponds to 100 yen in amount) in one payout operation. BRQ is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input is EXS which is a signal for informing that one payout operation has started or ended, and a game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Through the, the PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible, is connected to the rental ball connection terminal board for the game ball, etc. It outputs to CR unit 6 via 869. Note that, for example, when the ball rental button 361 is pressed, a game ball for 200 yen is paid out, and when a hall clerk or the like presets the CR unit 6 in the CR unit 6, one payout operation is performed. It is supposed to be performed twice consecutively, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out continuously, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

  In the CR unit 6, the return button 362 is pressed and the return operation signal RES from the return switch 365b is input from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball or other lending device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount after subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls dispensed as a result of pressing the ball lending button 361.

[7-3. Power board]
Next, the power supply board 851 will be briefly described. The power supply board 851 includes a power supply switch 852 that can be electrically connected to or disconnected from 24 V AC (24 V AC) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and a power supply control unit 855 that generates various power supplies. 1, a firing control unit 857 for performing firing control by the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power control unit]
The power control unit 855 improves the power factor of the synchronous rectification circuit 855a that rectifies the AC 24V (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility by operating the power switch 852 and the power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 855a. A power factor correction circuit 855b, a smoothing circuit 855c that smoothes the power whose power factor is improved by the power factor correction circuit 855b, and various direct currents that are supplied from the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 855c to various substrates. And a power generation circuit 855d that generates a power source.

[7-3-2. Firing controller]
A firing control unit 857 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 654 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 585 mainly includes a firing control circuit 857a. The firing control circuit 857a and an operation signal from the potentiometer 512 that electrically adjusts the strength (firing strength) at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 1100 in accordance with the rotational position of the rotary handle body front 506 shown in FIG. , A detection signal from a touch switch 516 for detecting whether or not a palm or a finger touches the front of the rotating handle body 506, and whether or not the launch (launch) of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's intention. The detection signal from the firing stop switch 518 for detection is input via the handle relay terminal plate 192. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 857a, a CR connection signal indicating that fact is input via the payout control board 4110. ..

  The firing control circuit 857a controls the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 1100 based on the operation signal from the potentiometer 512, and outputs the adjusted drive current to the launch solenoid 654. By outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 585 through the handle relay terminal plate 192, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 580 transfers one game ball stored in the upper tray 301 of the dish unit 300 shown in FIG. The game ball received and received by the ball sending member is controlled to be sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 14, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 that performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 4100, a first liquid crystal display device 1900, a second liquid crystal display device 3252, and an upper plate. While controlling the drawing of the side liquid crystal display device 470 and detecting the contact state of the touch panel 480, the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. A liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 that controls sound such as music and sound effects flowing from 130, a real-time clock (hereinafter, “RTC”) that holds calendar information that specifies the date, and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second. The control unit 4165, the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3, and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 are described. And a, and volume adjustment volume 4140a be adjusted by turning operation of the knob portion volume such as music or sound effects flowing from 130.

[7-4-1. Peripheral controller]
As shown in FIG. 14, the peripheral control unit 4150 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed at power-on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the power-on. A peripheral control ROM 4150b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and controls the production operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later. Various information that continues across the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time the V blank signal is input (for example, schedule data that defines a screen to be drawn on the first liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252). Schedule that defines the light emission mode of LEDs and various LEDs Peripheral control RAM 4150c for storing information for managing data and the like, and various information that continues across days (for example, information for managing history of occurrence of jackpot gaming state and management of special effect flag) Peripheral control SRAM 4150d for storing information (eg, information for operating) and peripheral control external watchdog timer 4150e (hereinafter, referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 4150e") for monitoring whether peripheral control MPU 4150a is operating normally. .), And are provided.

  The peripheral control RAM 4150c can hold the stored contents only for a time such that an instantaneous power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long power failure occurs. ), The peripheral control SRAM 4150d is supplied with backup power from a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) (hereinafter referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”) provided on the power supply board 851. By doing so, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. By providing the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply board 851, when the gaming board 4 is removed from the pachinko gaming machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, so the peripheral control SRAM 4150d stores the stored contents. Can no longer hold and loses its contents.

  The peripheral control external WDT 4150e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is running out of control, and when this timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a does not output the clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period (until the timer expires), the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e within a certain period, it can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, so that it is not reset.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. When receiving various commands from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 4 is based on these various commands. Lamp light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp from a lamp drive board serial I / O port via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 or outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 is serial for the motor drive board. It is transmitted from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or the electric power of the dial drive motor 414 or the like provided on the door frame 5 is transmitted. The door side motor drive data for outputting the drive signal to the dynamic drive source from the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I / O port to the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Door-side light emission data to be transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the, or to output a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs or the like provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5. The frame decoration drive amplifier board transmits to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 from the LED serial I / O port.

  Various commands from the main control board 4100 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, a detection signal from a rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotational direction) of the dial operation unit 401, which is provided in the operation unit 400, and a pressing detection switch for detecting the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, are detected. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized operation unit detection data is output from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame. It is input to the operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a via the peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral control input circuit.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors) for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 are provided on the motor drive board 4180, which is not shown in the figure. It is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and the serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU4150a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to exchange various data between the peripheral control board 4140 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and its own system runs out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e together. Is diagnosed.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, the peripheral control MPU 4150a has a peripheral control CPU core 4150aa as a center, a peripheral control internal RAM 4150ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 4150ac, a peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and peripheral control various serial I. / O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 4150ak, and the like.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads / writes various data from / to the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac via the internal bus 4150ah, while at the same time, the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 4150ag and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak are read and written various data via internal bus 4150ah, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and peripheral bus 4150ai.

  Further, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa reads various data into the peripheral control ROM 4150b via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h, while the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d are read. Then, various data is read and written via the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the external bus 4150h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes storage devices such as the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d, the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, and the peripheral control various parallel I. The DMA0 is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between the I / O port 4150ag and the input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. ~ DMA3 has four channels.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab built in the peripheral control MPU 4150a, various peripheral control built-in serial I / O ports 4150ae, and peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af. , Peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak and other input / output devices, to independently perform data transfer without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa. In addition, while reading / writing to / from the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4150ab via the internal bus 4150ah, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150 g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 4150Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and peripheral bus 4150Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac is a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 4150b, a peripheral control RAM 4150c, and a peripheral control SRAM 4150d, which is externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 4150a. O port 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O port 4150ag, peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak, and the like, and input / output devices such as devices, without the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa, In order to independently perform data transfer, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad and the external bus 4150h are provided to the storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. While reading and writing, the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 4150ad and the peripheral bus 4150ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 4150ad controls the internal bus 4150ah, the peripheral bus 4150ai, and the external bus 4150h, the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa, the peripheral control internal RAM 4150ab, the peripheral control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as SRAM 4150d and various input / output devices such as peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4150ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak It is a dedicated controller for exchanging various data between them.

  Peripheral control Various serial I / O ports 4150ae include lamp drive board serial I / O ports, motor drive board serial I / O ports, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O ports, frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs Serial I / O port, a frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I / O port, a main control substrate serial I / O port, and an operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  The peripheral control watchdog timer (WDT with peripheral control) 4150af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU4150a is out of control. When this timer is up, it is reset by hardware. It has become. In other words, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa resets the WDT4150af with built-in peripheral control when it does not output a clear signal that clears the timer within a certain period (until the timer expires). Will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af within a certain period, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa can restart the timer count, and thus is not reset.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 4150e, and a game. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the board 4 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and the serial signals are serialized. Outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the motor control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU4150a, or the upper decoration of the door frame 5. It outputs a lighting signal of the LED mounted on the upper decorative substrate of the unit 280. This LED is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag are electrically directly connected, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4150ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for the lighting control of the LED, which has a significant meaning in the game. It should be noted that the LED lighting control is executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs except this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described below. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak is electrically connected to the volume adjusting volume 4140a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 4140a, and the resistance at the rotating position of the knob is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value of 0 to 1023 in 1024 steps. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 levels is divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 toward the board volume 6. By controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with a built-in sound source described later) so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, the speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 are controlled. Music and sound effects are made to flow from the provided speaker 130. As described above, by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. .

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk in the hall of occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or fraudulent activity on the pachinko gaming machine 1, contents relating to game production, etc. (For example, the screen unfolded on the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is rendered as a more powerful one, or there is a high possibility that the game state is advantageous to the player). A notification sound for this purpose also flows from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the notification sound and the notification sound are used for volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. It is designed to flow without any dependence, and the volume from mute to the maximum volume can be programmed by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP4160a with built-in sound source described later). Has manner can be adjusted controlled to the. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and it is possible to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume.
Thus, for example, even when a store clerk in the hall or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjusting volume 4140a to set the volume low, the speaker and the door housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 are closed. Although the sound produced by the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 and the effect sound such as the sound effect are reduced, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in trouble or when the player is committing a fraudulent activity, the volume of the sound is increased. In the form, the notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the alarm sound from making it difficult for the clerk or the like in the hall to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating. Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of advertising sound is reduced so that it does not interfere with music and sound effects, while The volume of the sound is increased to add music and sound effects, and the screen unfolded by the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is rendered more powerful, and a game state advantageous for the player. You can also announce that you are likely to move to.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 4150b stores various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160, the RTC control unit 4165, various data, various control data, and various schedule data in advance. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and a light emission mode for generating light emission modes of various LEDs. There are generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data for generating music and sound effects, and the like. The screen generation schedule data is composed of screen data that defines the screen configuration arranged in time series, and is drawn on the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. The order of screens to be displayed is specified. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by time-sequentially arranged light emission data that defines the light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the internal sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. Of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, the track number for instructing which track the sound data such as music and sound effect is to be incorporated is defined. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and executed, or may be copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later at the time of power-on. Some of them are read and executed. Also, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, or when power is turned on to various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described later. In some cases, the copied one is read out.

  Further, the peripheral control ROM 4150b has a brightness correction for correcting the brightness of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165. The program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 when the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is equipped with an LED type backlight. The date and time when the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, and the acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on the correction information. . This correction information is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b in advance. As will be described later, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and the current setting. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, is included. For example, from the date and time when the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on and the current date and time, When June has already passed from the date and time when the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b and included in the brightness setting information. When the backlight of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the brightness of the LED to be displayed is 75%, the correction information obtained by 5%, which is the acquired correction information, is further increased. The brightness of the backlight of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80%. If December has already passed since the power was turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 4150b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%. When the backlight of the 1st liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on, the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information is adjusted to the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85% which is obtained by adding 10% which is the correction information acquired to 75%. Based on this, the backlight of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted in brightness and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 15, the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a is a backup that stores, among the various types of information updated by execution of various control programs, those to be backed up. A management target work area 4150ca, a backup first area 4150cb and a backup second area 4150cc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in this backup management target work area 4150ca, and a peripheral control ROM 4150b. Various control program copy areas 4150cd for exclusively storing the copied various control programs, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b. Various control data copy areas 4150ce that store the copied data exclusively, and a backup non-management target that stores only the information that is not the backup target among various information that is updated by executing the various control programs A work area 4150cf is provided.

  When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to a momentary power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed work area 4150cf and is cleared to zero. For the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the power-on command (see FIG. 29) from the main control board 4100 starts the RAM clear effect. And instructing the start of each state effect (for example, instructing the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 11 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. ) Is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 4150ca is performance information (various information that is updated in the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal from the liquid crystal and sound source VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160, which will be described later, is input. 1fr), Bank0 (1fr), which is dedicatedly stored as a backup target, and performance information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt described later occurs. It is composed of Bank 0 (1 ms), which is exclusively stored as a backup target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various types of information, and is referred to as “Bank”. The following "0" means that it is a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Further, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150cb to a backup second area 4150cc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as “Bank0”. It means having a size. As will be described later, “(1fr)” means that when the sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the peripheral control MPU 4150a Since a V blank signal indicating that it is in a state of being able to accept the screen data is output to the peripheral control MPU4150a, every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, every one frame (1 frame). From the place where the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the numbers are added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" (effect information (1fr) and effect backup to be described later). Information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning.) “(1ms)” will be described later. As described above, since the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, it is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4", respectively. (Effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used in the same meaning).

  In Bank0 (1fr), the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, the reception command storage area 4150cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and the schedule data storage area 4150cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 4. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 5 are set. The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is a storage area in which a received command storage area 4150cac receives various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100, and various received commands are stored in the received command storage area 4150cac. The RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, which is a storage area to be set, has an RTC control unit 4165 (RTC 41654a described later). The schedule data storage area 4150cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), which is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set. A storage area in which various schedule data are set. In the schedule data storage area 4150cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 4150b to the various control data copy areas 4150ce are read and set, and in other cases, various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. There are also things that are set.

  Bank0 (1 ms) is provided with a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, an operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, and the like. Has been. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 5 is stored. A storage area to be set, and a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid that operates various movable bodies provided in the game board 4. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is a storage area in which the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah is provided in the game board 4 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 4. The operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150ca is a storage area in which various kinds of information obtained from the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies are set. In addition, various information obtained by rotating the dial operation unit 401 (rotation direction) and operating the pressing operation unit 405 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 (for example, in the operation unit 400). This is a storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like, which is created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided, are set.

  It should be noted that the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of Bank0 (1fr) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf of Bank0 (1ms). The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

  The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa is set to the game board side light emission data SL-DAT in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Each time the processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa. Peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, for example, when the game board side emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa in the peripheral control unit regular processing this time, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa.

  When the peripheral controller steady processing is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, and the door side light emission data STL. -When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. Each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. It Peripheral control unit steady process is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab in this peripheral control section steady process, When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed last time, the process is advanced based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab. Has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf is provided with a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. -When DAT is set and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is set in the first and second areas of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. The peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process this time, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf. When it is set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed last time is set. The processing is carried out based on this.

  When the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag sets the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Then, when the next peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Every time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. Sometimes, when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed last time, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. It is like this.

  Next, the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc that exclusively store the copied copy of the performance information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150ca, will be described. In the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. Performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as performance backup information (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the performance information (1 ms) which is the content that is copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac and is stored in Bank0 (1ms) which is a storage area that is normally used. As the production backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 41 is placed in the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc each time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to the high speed by 0ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks forming the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 4150cb, two pairs of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) are managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and that is stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data to Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) at high speed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  In the backup second area 4150cc, two pairs of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac and that is stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the data to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), that is, two pairs in total. The backup second area 4150cc is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 4150cc has two pairs of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) which is a storage area that is normally used, is the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame) as effect backup information (1fr). Every time the regular processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area that is normally used. The production information (1 ms) is, as production backup information (1 ms), a backup first area 4150 cb and a backup second area 4150 cc each time the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 4150Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 4150Ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a includes a backup management target work area 4150da that exclusively stores the backup target among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 4150db and a backup second area 4150dc, which exclusively store a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da, are provided. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d include a power-on command (see FIG. 29) from the main control board 4100 when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on (including a power failure due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure). It is for instructing the RAM clear effect start and each state effect start (for example, instructing the start of the effect when the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 11 is operated within a predetermined period from the power-on, It is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 4150ca, the backup first area 4150cb, and the backup second area 4150cc of the peripheral control RAM 4150c are zero-cleared. Further, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900. It has become so. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d (for example, a history of occurrence of a jackpot gaming state, etc.) While the contents can be cleared, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 4150c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. Also in this respect, the peripheral control RAM 4150c and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d are completely different.

  The backup management target work area 4150da is production information (SRAM) that is various information that continues across days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit game state and a special production flag). (For example, information) is dedicatedly stored as a backup target and is configured from Bank 0 (SRAM). Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. “Bank” is the minimum management unit indicating the size of the storage area for storing various types of information, as described above. The following "0" means that it is a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Further, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 4150db to a backup second area 4150dc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as “Bank0”. It means having a size. "(SRAM)" is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and thus "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3". , And “Bank 4” (the effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Next, the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc that exclusively store a copy of the effect information (SRAM) that is various information stored in the backup management target work area 4150da will be described. The backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc are managed with two banks as one pair and one pair as one page. The effect information (SRAM) that is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). Further, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks forming the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 4150db has Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) peripheral control DMA every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  The backup second area 4150dc has Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair, and one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 4150ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 4150db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. 4150 dc is an area for managing Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc.

[7-4-2. LCD and sound controller]
The drawing control of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 are performed. As shown in FIG. 14, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 for controlling sound such as music and sound effect has a built-in sound source for controlling sound such as music and sound effect (hereinafter referred to as “internal sound source”). In addition, a sound source built-in VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4160a for controlling drawing of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and the first liquid crystal display device. 1900, the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and various character data of the screen displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, music and effect. A liquid crystal and a sound control ROM 4160b for storing various sound data such as sound, and an audio data transmission IC 4160c for transmitting serialized music, sound effect, etc. as audio data toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 are provided. . In the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b, for example, ring image data used to display a ring-shaped display object (annular display object) as sprite data used to display a screen or an image to be described later, and an operation menu background image to be described later. The operation menu background image data to be used, the selection display object image data used to display at least one selection display object described later, the tone adjustment background image data used to display the volume adjustment screen including the volume scale described below, and the volume adjustment icon described below. In addition to the volume setting icon image data used for display, the body frame backside image data used to display the bodyframe backside image in which the positions of various parts on the backside of the bodyframe 3 are visible to the player, and the display of the service mode screen Service mode screen image data used for Ma setting screen image data, and, during breaks screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting the user to operate the pressing operation section 405 (operation section) of the operation unit 400.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. 4150cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various types of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. After being extracted from the control data copy area 4150ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the schedule data is triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the first screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c according to the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 4150cae, and the sound source is built-in. Output to VDP4160a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, outputs the screen data arranged in time series to the screen generation schedule data every time the V blank signal is input. Then, the first screen data is output to the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source one by one.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 4100 from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. The extracted sound command data is set to 4150 cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the peripheral The schedule data recording is triggered by the input of the V blank signal after the data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. According to the sound generation schedule data set in the area 4150cae, the next sound command data following the first sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c to generate the sound source. Output to built-in VDP4160a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 4150a inputs the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data as the V blank signal according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae. Each time, the sound command data at the head is output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a one by one.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
In addition to the above-described built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, and based on the input screen data, as shown in FIG. Side character data and upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data and displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 for one screen (for one frame). ) Also has a built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM") for generating drawing data. Of the drawing data generated in the built-in VRAM, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs the image data for the first liquid crystal display device 1900 to the first liquid crystal display device 1900 from the channel CH1, and the image data for the second liquid crystal display device 3252 as the channel. CH3 outputs to the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and image data for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is output from the channel CH2 to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, so that the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device The display device 3252 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 are synchronized with each other. Further, the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source receives a detection signal according to the contact state of the contact surface of the touch panel 480, and when the detection signal is received, outputs it to the peripheral control MPU 4140a so that the effect control program can be applied to the contact surface of the touch panel 480. It is possible to grasp the contact state of. In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. The sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data to create sprite data to generate the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and the upper plate side. One screen (one frame) of drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 470 is generated in the built-in VRAM, and of the generated drawing data, image data for the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed from the channel CH1 to the first liquid crystal display. Image data to the second liquid crystal display device 3252. The outputs from the channel CH3 on the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and outputs the image data for the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 470 from the channel CH2 to the upper tray side liquid crystal display device 470. That is, “one screen (one frame) of screen data” means one screen (one frame) displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Is the data for generating the drawing data in the built-in VRAM.

  Further, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the first liquid crystal display device 1900, and image data for the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is displayed from the channel CH3 to the second liquid crystal display. Output to the device 3252 and output the image data for the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 from the channel CH2. The blank signal is output to the peripheral control MPU 4150a. In the present embodiment, since the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, V The interval at which the blank signal is output is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 4150a is configured to execute the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Also, in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 in which the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change to some extent.

  The VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source adopts a frame buffer method. The “frame buffer method” means that one frame (one frame) of drawing data to be drawn on the screens of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is stored in the frame buffer ( The drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is held in the built-in VRAM), and the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. It is a method of outputting to 470.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a based on a command from the main control board 4100, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a receives music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b as shown in FIG. By extracting the sound data such as sound effect and sound effect and controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data such as music and sound effect are embedded in the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. ..

  It should be noted that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the sound source built-in VDP4160a have sound effects such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the clerk in the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the misconduct to the pachinko gaming machine 1. A sub-volume value that adjusts is incorporated. Specifically, for the effect sound, the above-mentioned substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a. The sub volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 to shift to a setting mode described later.

  In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and a plurality of output channels in the internal sound source of the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source have a plurality of master volume values in the built-in sound source of the VDP4160a with a built-in sound source. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is Actually, the volume is amplified to a master volume value that is a volume flowing from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and the amplified effect sound is serialized as audio data. The data is output to the audio data transmission IC 4160c.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a fixed value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to the speaker volume 820 provided in the body frame 3. The volume that is output from the speaker housed in and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 is set to be the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub-volume value that adjusts the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the plurality of tracks and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used. The set volume adjustment volume 4140a is combined with the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob, and the combined volume of the effect sound is actually stored in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. Amplify to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the housed speaker and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. Is the sound data of the informative sound incorporated in the track used and the sound of the informative sound incorporated in the track used. The maximum volume that is completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a that is set as the sub-volume value that adjusts the , A speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and a master volume value that is a volume that flows from the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, and the amplified notification sound is serialized to produce audio data as audio data. Output to the transmission IC 4160c.

  Here, when the effect sound is flowing from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 malfunctions and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is affected. To briefly explain the control of sending a notification sound to notify a clerk in the hall of misconduct, first, forcibly set the sub-volume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated to mute, and the effect sound is incorporated. Sound data of the track, the sub-volume value set to mute it, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume. The synthesized sound volume of the effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5. Amplified to a master volume value as the volume flowing from 130, and outputs the amplified effect sound and alarm sound as an audio data to the audio data transmission IC4160c Serialize.

  That is, actually, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound does not flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, but the effect sound is for the sound generation described above. It is proceeding according to the schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds). When the period elapses, the volume of the effect sound that has been progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that has been compulsorily set to silence is adjusted to the sub-volume that is adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a. The volume value is set again (at this time, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated to shift to the setting mode and adjustment is performed, the sub-value of the adjusted effect sound is adjusted. (Set to the volume value), the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 are connected. So that the flow from mosquitoes 130.

  In this way, when the effect sound is flowing from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the pachinko gaming machine 1 occurs. When a notification sound is played in order to notify a clerk of the hall of a misconduct with respect to, the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound is provided in the speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. Although the muffled sound that flows from the speaker 130 progresses according to the sound generation schedule data, the speaker is housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 after the notification sound has passed for a predetermined period. When the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 stops flowing, the effect sound does not start flowing again from the place where the notification sound started flowing. So that the start flowing again from where the notification sound is beginning to flow to proceed according to the schedule data for generating sound until after the lapse of a predetermined period of time.

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 16, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b includes game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and the display area of the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and the upper plate side liquid crystal display. Upper plate side character data for drawing in the display area of the device 470 is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the serialized audio data from the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 4160c transmits the right audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 as serial data of a differential method in which the right signal is a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time, the left-side audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a differential method in which a plus signal and a minus signal are used. As a result, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are stereo-reproduced from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5.

  The audio data transmission IC 4160c outputs audio data as serial data of the left and right differential systems between the boards from the peripheral control board 4140 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a plus signal of the left audio data, Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component carried on the positive signal and the noise component carried on the negative signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 into one left audio data, Since the noise components are canceled by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[7-4-3. RTC controller]
As shown in FIG. 14, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds the calendar information that specifies the date and the time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is mainly composed of the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is adapted to be supplied with power from a battery 4165b (in this embodiment, a button battery is adopted) as a driving power supply and a backup power supply for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1) without being supplied with power from the peripheral control board 4140 (pachinko gaming machine 1). As a result, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off.

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a and sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c described above. Based effects can be spread on the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, the screen of the Christmas tree or the reindeer is unfolded on the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and the plate side liquid crystal display device 470, or New Year's Eve. In that case, the screen for executing the New Year countdown may be displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. The calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds the brightness setting information of the LED when the backlight of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is of the LED type. . When the backlight of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is equipped with an LED type, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. The brightness setting information is brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and the currently set first brightness setting information. The liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 include the brightness of the LED that is the backlight.

  In addition to the calendar information, the time information, and the brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores the calendar information, the time information, and the brightness setting information as the information of the year, month, day, and hour, minute, second that are first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date information is also stored.

  When the backlights of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate-side liquid crystal display device 470 are of the cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 4150a controls the ON / OFF of the backlight or only turns it on. It is like this.

  Various information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date / time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa is set on the manufacturing line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the manufacturing line, various tests such as a display test of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 are performed. And the manufacturing date and time which is hour, minute and second.

  As described above, in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the brightness setting information and the input date and time information when the backlight of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is of the LED type are installed, It is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of model information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, probability of occurrence of big hit game state with low probability or high probability).

  Also, the brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 set at the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. , It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed. It is adapted to be displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and the time information are reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is set to a desired brightness. It can be adjusted to The adjusted desired brightness of the backlight of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 4150a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that when the backlight of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is the LED type, the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is installed. The luminance decrease due to the secular change of 1900 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, identifies the date and time when the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, and the calendar information and the hour and minute for identifying the date. To obtain the time information specifying the second to specify the current date and time, and to adjust the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in 5% increments. The brightness setting information having the brightness adjustment information and the currently set brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, is acquired. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b.

  For example, when June has already passed from the date and time when the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on and the current date and time, the peripheral control is performed. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the ROM 4150b and the backlight of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the LED brightness included in the brightness setting information is 75%, The brightness of the backlight of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the acquired correction information is further increased by 5% and the brightness is 80%. If December has already passed from the date and time when the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is first turned on, the corresponding supplementary correction is made from the peripheral control ROM 4150b. When information (for example, 10%) is acquired and the backlight of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the correction information acquired for this 75% is used. The brightness of the backlight of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85%, which is further increased by 10%.

  Note that the current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information specifying the date and the time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 4140 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[7-4-4. Volume control volume]
As described above, the volume control volume 4140a is used to rotate the knob to adjust the volume of music, sound effects, and the like that flows from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. It can be adjusted by doing. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a has a variable resistance value when the knob portion is pivotally operated, and the peripherally controlled A / D converter 4150ak electrically connected to the knob portion is used. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of 1024 levels are divided into seven and are managed as the substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 toward the board volume 6. The liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 (VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source) are controlled so that the sound volume is set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, and the speaker and the door frame 5 accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 are provided. Music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker 130.

  As described above, by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. . In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk in the hall of occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko gaming machine 1 or fraudulent activity on the pachinko gaming machine 1, Announce the contents related to the game effect (for example, announcing that there is a high possibility that the screen unfolded on the first liquid crystal display device 1900 will be rendered as a more powerful one, or that the game state will be advantageous to the player. Sound from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the notification sound and the notification sound are generated when the knob portion is rotated. It is designed to flow without depending on the sound volume adjustment based on the sound volume from the mute to the maximum sound volume by the program by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 (VDP416 with sound source built-in). So that the it can be adjusted by controlling the a).

  The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and it is possible to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. Thus, for example, even when a store clerk in the hall or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjusting volume 4140a to set the volume low, the speaker and the door housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 are closed. Although the sound produced by the speaker 130 provided in the frame 5 and the effect sound such as the sound effect are reduced, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in trouble or when the player is committing a fraudulent activity, the volume of the sound is increased. In the form, the notification sound set to the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming less likely to notice a malfunction or a player's cheating by the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume that is set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music or the sound effect, while the advertising sound is not disturbed. In addition to music and sound effects by increasing the volume of sound flowing, the screen unfolded by the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is rendered more powerful, and a game advantageous to the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility that the state will shift.

  In the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effect is adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 4140a, and in addition to the dial operating portion 401 of the operation unit 400 and the pressing By operating the operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music or sound effect. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is in the customer waiting state and the demonstration is performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed. It is adapted to be displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music or sound effect can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is Then, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400. . The adjusted sound volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music and sound effect is included among a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, and the effect sound is changed. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above, it is not reflected in the adjustment in the volume of the above-mentioned notification sound and notification sound.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 of the operation unit 400. There are two methods: a case where the volume of music or a sound effect is adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation. Since the volume control volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, the body frame 3 must be opened from the outer frame 2 without fail. Then, the clerk in the hall can rotate the knob of the volume adjusting volume 4140a. However, at the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and may be difficult to hear the music or the sound effect, or the player may feel large and feel the music or the sound effect loud. Therefore, after turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1, within a predetermined time, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 are operated, or the customer waits for a demonstration by the first liquid crystal display device 1900. If the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is operated within the preset period, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900, and the setting mode is set. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 according to the screen, the volume of music or sound effect can be adjusted to a desired volume. This allows the player to adjust the volume of the music or sound effect to a desired volume, so if the clerk in the hall feels the volume is low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect, the operation unit 400 It is possible to increase the volume to a desired level by operating the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405, and when the volume of the clerk in the hall feels loud and the music or the sound effect is noisy, the operation unit 400 is operated. The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not playing a game for a predetermined period of time, becomes a customer waiting state, and is repeatedly demonstrated by the first liquid crystal display device 1900 (for example, 10 times). The volume adjusted by the player who was seated in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and playing a game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 4140a. As a result, when the player sitting in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 last time and playing a game feels the volume is low and it is difficult to hear music or sound effects, A player who sits down and plays a game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the push operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and last time, sit down on the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to play the game. When the player who is playing the game feels the adjusted volume to be loud and the music and the sound effects are noisy, the player who sits in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and plays the game this time is the dial operation unit of the operation unit 400. It is possible to reduce the volume to a desired volume by operating the 401 or the pressing operation unit 405.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. 17 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. First, the power supply board will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board and the like will be described. The grounds (GND) of various boards and the grounds (GND) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 851, and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power board]
The power board 851 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 852 shown in FIG. 3 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power board 851, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the power supply board 851 includes a power supply control section 855 and a firing control section 857. The power supply control unit 855 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24V (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility, and that supplies backup power to the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110, and controls the firing. The portion 857 is a circuit for driving and controlling the firing solenoid 654 of the hitting ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580 shown in FIG.

  The power supply control unit 855 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 855a, a power factor correction circuit 855b, a smoothing circuit 855c, a power supply creation circuit 855d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply board 851 and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 855a. The synchronous rectification circuit 855a rectifies 24 V AC (24 V AC) supplied from the pachinko island equipment and supplies the rectified AC power to the power factor correction circuit 855b. The power factor correction circuit 855b improves the power factor of the rectified power to generate direct current + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as "+ 37V") and supplies the smoothed circuit 855c. The smoothing circuit 855c removes the supplied + 37V ripple to smooth + 37V and supplies the smoothed + 37V to the firing control circuit 857a and the power supply generation circuit 855d of the firing control unit 857.

  The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110. The backup power is supplied to the specified RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

  The launch control circuit 857a of the launch control unit 857 uses the + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c as a driving power source, and launches the game ball with a launching strength (launching strength) corresponding to the rotation position of the rotary handle main body front 506 shown in FIG. While controlling the drive current for launching (launching) toward the game area 1100 shown in FIG. 1 and outputting it to the launch solenoid 654, a constant current is output to the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580. As a result, the ball-sending member of the ball-sending unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 shown in FIG. 7, and sends the game ball received by the ball-sending member to the hitting ball launching device 650 side. Take control.

  The power supply generation circuit 855d is DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 855c, and DC. + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as "+ 24V") is created and supplied to the payout control board 4110 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power supply system supplied with + 5V is a + 5V power supply line, the power supply system supplied with + 12V is a + 12V power supply line, and the power supply system supplied with + 24V is a + 24V power supply line.

  + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 855d is supplied to the payout control board 4110 as described later. The + 5V supplied to the payout control board 4110 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control filter circuit 4110a and to the power supply terminal of the payout control internal RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The + 12V generated by the power supply generation circuit 855d is supplied to the + 5V generation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. The + 5V creation circuit 4100g creates + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a, from + 12V from the payout control board 4110. The + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 4100g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control filter circuit 4100h and to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

  The minus terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 851 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the plus terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 4110 and is also paid out. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 4110. That is, + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply substrate 851 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the diode PD0 causes the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM in the forward direction and the capacitor BC1 to operate. Electric current flows to the plus terminal. As described above, the capacitor BC1 is + 5V by an electrical connection method in which + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 returns to the payout control board 4110 and again from the payout control board 4110 to the power supply board 851. Are supplied and can be recharged. As a result, when + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 855d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 4110, the charges charged in the capacitor BC1 are supplied to the payout control board 4110 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a by the diode PD0 and the payout control MPU4120a does not operate, the payout VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the payout control internal RAM so that the stored contents are held. It has become so.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 851 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control internal RAM of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. And is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 4100. That is, + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 4100g causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the forward direction power supply terminal of the RAM with main control by the diode MD0 and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0. The electric current is flowing toward. In this manner, the capacitor BC0 is supplied with + 5V by the electrical connection method in which + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 4100g is supplied from the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 to the power supply board 851. You can do it. As a result, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and the + 5V creation circuit 4100g can create + 5V. When it disappears, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a has a diode at the power supply terminal. Although the current is blocked by MD0 and the current does not flow and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are retained.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, an outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

  Three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 are supplied to the payout control board 4110 as shown in FIG. 17, and among these three types of voltage, + 12V and Two types of voltage of + 24V are supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110. Further, the three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripherals via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It is supplied to the control board 4140 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

  The three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 are, as shown in FIG. 18A, the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180. 4180a, respectively. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal, and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 4, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 is a game. A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the board 4.

  The peripheral control board 4140 is provided with a + 3.3V generating circuit 4140b for generating a direct current 3.3V (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as "+ 3.3V") from + 5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. ing. The + 3.3V generated by the + 3.3V generating circuit 4140b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1900a of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the liquid crystal module 470a of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and the touch panel module 480a of the touch panel 480, respectively. Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1900b of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 and the backlight power supply 470b of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, respectively. .

  On the other hand, three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, as shown in FIG. The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V creation circuit 194a that creates a direct current + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. In addition to + 9V created by the + 9V creation circuit 194a, a total of four types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to various decorative boards of the door frame 5.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 17, the payout control substrate 4110 includes a payout control filter circuit 4110a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 4120a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 4110a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 851, and removes noise from this + 5V. The + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 851 via the diode PD0 and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120. + 12V from the power supply board 851 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 and the like, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 4110. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 outputs a signal that conveys the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1 and game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a hall computer installed in a hall (hall). It is a circuit to do. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. .. It should be noted that +24 from the power supply board 851 is supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 without being used in the payout control board 4110.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 17, the main control board 4100 includes, in addition to the main control MPU 4100a and the like, a + 5V creation circuit 4100g, a main control filter circuit 4100h, a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e, and the like. The + 5V creation circuit 4100g is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 851 via the payout control board 4110, and creates + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a, from this + 12V. In the main control board 4100, the power supply system created by the + 5V creation circuit 4100g and supplied with + 5V is a + 5V power supply line. In this embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 are not electrically connected. Since the circuit is configured as described above, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 4100, and + 5V of the main control board 4100 is not provided. The + 5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 4100g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards except the main control board 4100.

  The main control filter circuit 4100h is supplied with + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 4100g, and removes noise from this + 5V. This + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 851 via the diode MD0 and is also supplied to the main control MPU 4100a and the like, for example. + 12V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 4100b, and + 24V from the payout control board 4110 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 851 via the payout control board 4110, and monitors the signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these + 12V and + 24V. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e outputs a power failure notification signal to the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure notification when detecting signs of + 12V and + 24V power failure or momentary power failure. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a via the main control board 4100 and the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control board 4110. Further, the power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 4140 via the main control board 4100. Further, the power failure notice signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 through the peripheral control board 4140, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 as shown in FIG. 18B. At the same time, it is adapted to be input to the decoration board of the door frame or the like via the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

  In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e applies the voltage to one of the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line by monitoring the voltage applied to each of the two power lines, the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line. As compared with the case of monitoring the generated voltage, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, a circuit and the like of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 20 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 21 is a circuit showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a figure. First, the main control filter circuit 4100h shown in FIG. 17 will be described, and subsequently, the power supply created by the main control board 4100, the main control system reset, the main control crystal oscillator, the main control input circuit, the power failure monitoring circuit, and the main control MPU. Various input / output signals to and from the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described.

  The main control board 4100 includes a main control MPU 4100a, a main control input circuit 4100b, a main control output circuit 4100c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e, a + 5V generation circuit 4100g, and a main control MPU 4100a shown in FIGS. In addition to the control filter circuit 4100h, as a peripheral circuit, as shown in FIG. 19, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in the present embodiment, 24 MHz (MHz) )) Is mainly composed.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 19, the main control filter circuit 4100h mainly includes a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and is magnetically shielded by ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 has its first terminal to which + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 4100g is applied, its second terminal grounded to the ground (GND), and the noise component removed from its third terminal. + 5V is output. The + 5V applied to the first terminal is first electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is grounded (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is removed first. Have been smoothed.

  The + 5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other ends of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (electrostatic capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). By being connected to, the ripple is further removed and smoothed. The smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and the like.

  The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. The VSS terminal which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is electrically connected to the capacitor MC3 and also to the anode terminal of the diode MD0. A cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a, and one end of which is connected to the ground (GND) capacitor MC4. Is electrically connected to the other end of. The VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in main control is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and is also connected to the plus side of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 851 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, + 5V, which has been smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100h, is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, and via the diode MD0, the VBB terminal of the main control internal RAM and the capacitor BC0. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of and. As a result, as described above, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 17 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 4100g of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, creating + 5V. When the circuit 4100g cannot generate + 5V, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 4100 as the main VBB, so that the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 4100a is connected to the VDD terminal. Although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and the current does not flow and the main control MPU 4100a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 19, the main control filter circuit 4100h removes and smoothes the noise component, and +5 V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function, and has a delay circuit built therein. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor MC5. Is able to. Specifically, the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after a delay time has elapsed when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

  The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 4100ca with the reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end of which is a capacitor grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. The ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output with the reset function. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value while being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 4100ca, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the main control output circuit 4100ca with the reset function. It is input to each reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 4100a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 4100ca with the reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes lower than the threshold value, the main control MPU 4100a and the reset function The associated main control output circuit 4100ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 19, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 4100h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. The VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and + 5V input to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, the smoothed + 5V is applied to the output frequency selection terminals A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal, respectively. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a clock signal of 24 MHz from an F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5 V to each of the A terminal, the B terminal, the C terminal, and the ST terminal.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU4100a, and receives the clock signal of 24 MHz. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground (GND), and the D terminal for outputting the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 4100b outputs the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020, 3020, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, the magnetic detection switch 304, the count switch 2110, and the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. In addition, it is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a provided in the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 12 is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 860a is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which operation signal (RAM clear signal) from operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 860a includes the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control board 4110 and the main control of the main control board 4100 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the RAM (RAM with built-in main control) built in the MPU 4100a, and when an error is reported after power-on, it is operated to cancel the error. Function to perform RAM clear within a predetermined period after power is turned on, and error release after power is turned on (after the period when the RAM clear function is achieved, that is, after a predetermined period has passed from power on) And the function of performing. Since the main control board 4100 does not have the function of canceling the error that the payout control board 4110 has, if the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is input within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, the main control board 4100 will be controlled. A process for clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed by judging it as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM.

  To the main control board 4100, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input from the payout control board 4110 when the operation switch 860a is not operated, while a logic signal is output from the payout control board 4110 when the operation switch 860a is operated. The operation signal for which HI becomes HI is input from the payout control board 4110 (a detailed description of this point will be given later).

  As shown in FIG. 19, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 860a provided on the payout control board 4110 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on has one end which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and also the non-inverting buffer. The main control is performed via the ICMIC10 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 4100a.

  The circuit for outputting the operation signal from the operation switch 860a in the payout control board 4110 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is transmitted. The line is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 4100, when the operation switch 860a is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 4110 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW, and the operation switch 860a is operated. During this time, the operation signal from the payout control board 4110 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and the logic becomes HI and is input.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

  When the operation switch 860a is not operated, the operation signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, whereby the transistor MTR0 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5 and the logic becomes HI. The operation signal from the operation switch 860a is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a. To be done. The main control MPU 4100a must instruct to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a input to the input terminal PA0 is HI. to decide.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is operated, the operation signal which is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and has the logic of HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 to turn on the transistor MTR0, The circuit will also turn on. Accordingly, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW, and the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a. To be done. The main control MPU 4100a is for instructing to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. To judge.

  The operation signal from the operation switch 860a is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is input through the payout control board 4110. That is, between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110, in order to suppress the influence of noise that enters the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the control reference voltage is higher than + 5V. The signal reliability is enhanced by using + 12V which is the voltage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening switch 3020, the upper starting opening switch 3022, and the lower starting opening switch 2109, which are directly input to the main control board 4100, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor. On the other hand, the detection signals from the magnetic detection switch 3024, the count switch 2110, the general winning opening switch 3020, and the gate switch 2352, which are input via the panel relay terminal plate 4161 shown in FIG. 11, are directly input to the main control board 4100. Since it is not input, it is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor like the operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

[9-5. Blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 17, the main control board 4100 is supplied with two types of voltages of + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 851 through the payout control board 4110, and + 12V and + 24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the signs of + 12V and + 24V power failure or momentary power failure. When the power failure or momentary power failure is detected, a power failure notice signal is sent as a power failure notice to the main control MPU 4100a and the payout control board. It is output to the payout control MPU 4120a of 4110 and the peripheral control board 4140. Here, first, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described, and then the power failure or instantaneous power failure of + 24V, the power failure or instantaneous power failure of + 12V, and the output of the power failure warning signal will be described.

[9-5-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 20, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

  The REF terminal which is the reference voltage input terminal and the K terminal which is the cathode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. + 5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495 V is set in the present embodiment) which is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (multiplied to the voltage by the capacitor MC20). AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitor voltage V1 of + 24V and the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B). , + 12V monitor voltage V2 and reference voltage Vref are used for comparison. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied to the third terminal which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal which is the negative terminal of the MIC21A. The monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied to the 5th terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21B. The results of these comparisons are input to the D type flip-flop MIC22. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded (GND), and +5 V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is The ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21 is grounded to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. + 24V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the + 24V power failure or the instantaneous power failure is monitored by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 20, the third terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied, has one end and the other end of the resistor MR21 electrically connected to the + 24V power line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 that is grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is + 24V divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC23. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are set to a preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (21.40V in the present embodiment) when the voltage of + 24V is interrupted or a momentary power failure occurs, the voltage starts to drop from + 24V. Then, the monitor voltage V1 of + 24V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24, which is grounded to the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

  When the voltage of + 24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitor voltage V1 of + 24V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal that has been pulled to the side and whose logic has become HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 1st terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is the ground (GND). The signal that is pulled to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. + 12V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the + 12V power failure or the instantaneous power failure is monitored by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 20, the fifth terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the + 12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, has one end and the other end of the resistor MR24 electrically connected to the + 12V power line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 which is grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is + 12V divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC25. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 become a preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment) when the voltage of + 12V starts a power failure or a momentary power failure and the voltage starts to drop from + 12V. Then, the monitor voltage V2 of + 12V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 has an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A described above, so that one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. Of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 by being electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the other end and electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 which is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a terminal. The capacitor MC24 plays the role of a low-pass filter, as described above.

  When the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal that has been pulled to the side and whose logic has become HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of + 12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is the ground (GND). The signal that is pulled to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, according to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal. (Logic) is output from the output terminal 1Q terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the output terminal negative logic 1Q terminal. Also, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latched state when the signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, and outputs the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal (at this time, the same logic as that of the signal which is obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q, that is, the signal which is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. A signal having a logic is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal. On the other hand, when a signal having a logic HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the latched state is set. Further, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is set to the latch state by inputting the signal whose logic is HI to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the logic is LOW to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. When this signal is input, a state in which a signal whose logic is HI is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal is maintained (at this time, a signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic). Maintain the status output from the 1Q terminal).

  In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, since the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal are respectively grounded to the ground (GND), they are connected to the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal. The circuit is configured so that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the terminal 1 which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the power failure or the instantaneous power failure of + 24V and the power failure of + 12V to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. Alternatively, the signal from the terminal 7 which is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the instantaneous blackout is input, and based on these signals, the signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. The Vcc terminal which is a power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded (GND) and is applied to the Vcc terminal which is a power supply terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. The + 5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal which is the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal which inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. Is not connected.

  In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal via the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. This power failure clear signal is started to be output and stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time in a main control side power-on process, which will be described later, performed by the main control MPU 4100a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca in the logic LOW state. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latch state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, is inverted to the output terminal. Output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 4100a is stopped, the logic becomes HI and is input to the CLR terminal through the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets a latched state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the input state in which the logic is LOW at the PR terminal.

  The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a via the main control input circuit 4100b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure notice signal. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 4100cb without the reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 4100cb outputs it as a payout power failure notice signal to the payout control board 4110, and also outputs it as a peripheral power failure warning signal to the peripheral control board 4140.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the main control input circuit 4100b electrically connecting the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and also has a non-inverting buffer. The main control is performed via the ICMIC 23 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC 23 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 23A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 4100a.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR20 turns off. , The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to + 5V and the transistor MTR20 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic LOW signal and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor MR29 and the logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. Input to PA1.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 has its logic level of HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a. Input to PA1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20, the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 to the payout control board 4110 as a payout power failure notice signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 4100b described above, and the transistor MTR21 of the preceding stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 at the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 having one end grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the previous-stage transistor MTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the previous-stage transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage through the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the rear stage is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the rear stage is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and wiring. It is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via a (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 4110 via a wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control section 4120 shown in FIG. In the circuit 4120b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a shown in FIG. Connected to each other.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is a switch circuit in the preceding stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the transistor MTR22 in the following stage is a switch circuit in the subsequent stage, and is a D type flip-flop. It is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the MIC 22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor in the previous stage is pulled down. The MTR21 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the preceding stage is also turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the following stage, is increased to + 5V by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to + 5V and the transistor MTR21 is turned on, The switch circuit in the preceding stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the following stage, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic set to LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Transistor MTR21 turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the following stage, so that the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness), and the payout blackout preliminary signal whose logic becomes LOW is issued. It is input to the control board 4110.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic HI and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 at the preceding stage. By the input, the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, and the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness). The withdrawal power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the withdrawal control board 4110.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20, the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 to the peripheral control board 4140 as a peripheral power failure notice signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 4100b described above, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. Is electrically connected to. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 having one end grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 4140 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 4140 via a wiring (harness), the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 14 is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Connected.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR23 is turned off. , The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to + 5V and the transistor MTR23 is turned on, The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic level LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140 via the wiring (harness). The peripheral power failure notice signal that has become is input to the peripheral control board 4140.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since it is inputted to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes HI and its logic is inputted to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 4140 via the wiring (harness), and the peripheral power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW is the peripheral control board. 4140 is input.

  As described above, the main control input circuit 4100b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 4100a as a power failure notice signal, and the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. The main control output circuit 4100cb without the reset function for outputting the signal output from the peripheral control board 4140 as a peripheral power failure warning signal has one transistor each, and the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 4100a and the peripheral While the logic of the peripheral power failure notification signal input to the control board 4140 is the same, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is output to the output control board 4110. No reset function to output as power failure warning signal Main The output circuit 4100cb has two transistors, the front stage and the rear stage, and the logic of the payout power failure notice signal is the logic of the power failure notice signal input to the main control MPU 4100a and the peripheral power failure notice input to the peripheral control board 4140. The logic of the signal is the opposite of the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

  In addition, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 4100b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the main control MPU4100a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. While it is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage of the main control output circuit 4100cb without the reset function is connected to the payout control board via a wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 in 4110, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 4100cb without reset function is provided. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 of Wiring through a (harness), the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 in the peripheral control board 4140, which is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to one end of which is connected + 12V power supply line and electrically. This means that between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 4100b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a, the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 4100b and the main control MPU 4100a are connected to each other. Since it is mounted on the 4100, the main control MPU 4100a uses the control reference voltage of + 5V to notify the power outage by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power outage notification signal, while the main control board 4100 and the payout control board are provided. In order to suppress the influence of noise that enters the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the main control MPU 4100a, and the main control MPU 4100a, between the board with the 4110 and the board with the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140, Payout control MPU 4120a and peripheral control MPU 4150a Is performed blackout notice by the logic of a control reference voltage + 5V is at a higher voltage than the + with 12V power failure warning signal (ON / OFF signal).

[9-6. Various input / output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to / from the main control MPU 4100a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 4100a, receives the serial data from the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 11 as a payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 4100b. .. On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 4100a, use the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 4110 as a main pay serial data transmission signal and do not have a reset function main control output. The main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function transmits the main payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control board 4110, and the TXB terminal transmits the serial data to the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. A main serial output signal 4100cb having no reset function is transmitted as a serial serial data transmission signal to the peripheral control board 4140 from the main control output circuit 4100cb having no reset function.

  In addition to the operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 4100a, for example, a payout indicating that normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal described above has been completed. The payer ACK signal from the control board 4110 is input through the main control input circuit 4100b, and the detection signals from various switches such as the upper start opening switch 3022 shown in FIG. 11 are respectively transmitted through the main control input circuit 4100b. It is input.

  On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a, for example, the main payment ACK signal indicating the completion of the normal reception of the above-described payment main serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca. Then, the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function outputs a main pay ACK signal to the payout control board 4110, or a drive signal to the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function for the starting opening solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. To output a drive signal from the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function to the starting opening solenoid 2105 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100d, and various indicators such as the upper special symbol display 1185 shown in FIG. 11. To the main control output circuit 4100ca with reset function Output to the equally and outputs a drive signal respectively to various indicator from resetting function main control output circuit 4100Ca.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIG. The main control board 4100 is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 17 through the payout control board 4110, and the + 5V creation circuit 4100g creates + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a from this + 12V. ing. The main-circulation serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is affected by noise that enters a wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. In order to suppress, the reliability is improved by transmitting using + 12V which is a voltage higher than + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Specifically, the main control board 4100 causes the main control output circuit 4100cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. Has been done. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board 4140, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC are built in as a communication interface circuit. It is mainly composed of.

  + 12V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110, and the negative terminal of the diode MD50 is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the. Accordingly, when the power from the power supply board 851 is no longer supplied to the main control board 4100 via the payout control board 4110 due to, for example, a power failure or an instantaneous power failure, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is reduced. + 12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140.

  In this way, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 4100a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (electrostatic capacity: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 19 when a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs. Since the electric charge is applied as + 5V, the main peripheral serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 4100aa in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. The unit 4100aec can transfer the data to the transmission shift register 41eaa and complete the transmission from the transmission shift register 4100ea as the main serial data.

  As described above, the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 is transmitted to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is improved by transmitting using + 12V which is a voltage higher than + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or an instantaneous blackout occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12 V from the main control board 4100 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140. Therefore, the main loop serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 4100aa to the transmission buffer register 4100aeb to the transmission shift register 41eaa by the serial management unit 4100aec. When the shift register 4100ea transmits the main-circle serial data, the main-circle serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by + 12V.

  In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, a maximum of 10 packets of data is stored in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb. Further, in the present embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 4100a is set to 19200 bps.

  The cathode terminal (3rd terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 4100 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistance AR10 of the peripheral control board 4140 is a limiting resistance for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The TXB terminal that outputs the main-circulation serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main-cycle serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. The transistor MTR50 is turned off and the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140, and the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main-cycle serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. .. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 4140, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

  + 5V supplied from the power supply board 851 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 4140 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 and the negative terminal are ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 which is grounded. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (6th terminal) which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (4th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (5th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the + 5V side by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as the main-circulation serial data transmission signal for the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU4150a. Input to the input terminal of.

  Accordingly, as described above, when + 5V supplied from the power supply board 851 is not supplied to the peripheral control board 4140 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power failure or an instantaneous blackout, The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied as +5 V to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. When + 5V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 when an electric power or an instantaneous blackout occurs, the main-circulation serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is transmitted to the main control MPU 4100a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the built-in main circumference serial transmission port 4100ae can be completed to be transmitted, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main circumference serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 4140 can surely receive the data without any loss.

  When the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor AR11 and the logic becomes HI. While the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140. Is LOW Is applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 because the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR50 and the transistor MTR50 is turned on to turn on the photocoupler AIC10. The main-circulation serial data transmission signal whose logic is set to LOW by pulling the generated voltage to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4150a. As described above, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 4100a to the peripheral control board 4140. Is the logic of.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the + 5V power supply line to which the control reference voltage + 5V of the main control MPU 4100a is applied and the + 12V power supply line to which the communication voltage + 12V applied via the diode MD50 are applied. The measures are taken when the control reference voltage and the communication voltage drop due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. That is, with respect to the main circumference serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a, the + 5V power supply line and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 4100h as the first auxiliary power supply, Are electrically connected in parallel, so that even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line drops, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 4100h that is the first auxiliary power supply. By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and is composed of a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. Main function without reset function to function as communication interface circuit For the output circuit 4100cb, + 12V applied to the + 12V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 and the plus of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 which is the second auxiliary power supply. Even if a power failure or a momentary blackout occurs and the communication voltage applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50 drops due to the electrical parallel connection between the terminal and the terminal, it is the second auxiliary power supply. By applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command from being interrupted during transmission from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 and to prevent the command from being lost. Therefore, the peripheral control board 4140 reliably receives the command during transmission. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the missed command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or at the time of a momentary power failure.

  In addition, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb of the main-circulation serial transmission port 4100ae built in the main control MPU 4100a are used as main-circulation serial data, and are composed of resistors MR50, MR51, MR52, and a transistor MTR50. 470 μF is set as the electrostatic capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 4100h so that the transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 can be completed via the main control output circuit 4100cb without the reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140, a reset that causes all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb to function as interface circuits as main-cycle serial data. Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 4140 can be completed via the functionless main control output circuit 4100cb, the peripheral control board 4140 does not cut off a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 4100aeb and also omits them. It can be received without fail.

[10. Discharge control board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 12 and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 27. 22 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the payout control unit, FIG. 23 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 24 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 23, and FIG. 25 is a payout motor drive. 26 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit, FIG. 26 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit, and FIG. 27 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. Is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the circuit of the payout control unit, various input / output signals to / from the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[10-1. Discharge control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 22, the payout control filter circuit 4110a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. The pay-out control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite. The first terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with + 5V from the power supply substrate 851 shown in FIG. 17, and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 whose one end is grounded (GND). Therefore, + 5V from the power supply board 851 is smoothed by first removing the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The 2nd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 outputs + 5V with the noise component removed.

  The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is connected to the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment) whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). By being electrically connected to each other, the ripples are further removed from the + 5V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 to be smoothed. The smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU4120a, and the like, which will be described later. ..

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by the ripple removed by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a is electrically connected to the capacitor PC3 and also to the anode terminal of the diode PD0. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (dispensing control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a, and one end of which is connected to the ground (GND) to a capacitor PC4. Is electrically connected to the other end of. The VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and is also connected to the plus side of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 851 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, + 5V, which has been smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a, is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and via the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control internal RAM and the capacitor BC1. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of and. As a result, as described above, when + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 855d of the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 17 is no longer supplied to the payout control board 4110, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is paid out VBB. Since the current is blocked by the diode PD0 from flowing into the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control MPU 4120a does not operate, it is connected to the VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. The memory contents are retained by applying the payout VBB.

[10-2. Circuit of payout controller]
The payout control unit 4120 is a peripheral circuit in addition to the payout control MPU 4120a, the payout control input circuit 4120b, the payout control output circuit 4120c, the payout motor drive circuit 4120d, and the CR unit input / output circuit 4120e, as shown in FIG. A payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, and then the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU will be described.

[10-2-1. Discharge control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 22, + 5V in which the noise component is removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output circuit 4120ca with the reset function, and includes a delay circuit. One end of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC5 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC5. You can do it. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after a delay time has elapsed when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

  The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 4120ca with the reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end of which is grounded to a capacitor (GND) and grounded. It is electrically connected to the other end of the PC 6. The capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU4120a and the payout control output with the reset function. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value while being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 4120ca, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the payout control output circuit 4120ca with the reset function. It is input to each reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 4120ca with the reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes lower than the threshold value, the payout control MPU 4120a and the reset function The payout control output circuit 4120ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Discharge control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 22, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 4110a is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and + 5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The smoothed + 5V is also applied to the OE terminal which is the output enable (Output Enable) terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, in addition to the VCC terminal. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs a clock signal of 8 MHz from an OUT terminal which is an output terminal when +5 V is applied to its OE terminal.

  The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 4120a, and a clock signal of 8 MHz is input to the payout control MPU 4120a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant (GND).

[10-2-3. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 4120b receives the payout blackout advance signal from the door frame opening switch 618, the main frame opening switch 619 shown in FIG. 12, and the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided in the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. The circuit, the handle relay terminal plate 192 shown in FIG. 12, and a circuit to which a detection signal from the full switch 550 is input via the power supply board 851, a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch 860a is input, and the like. First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input is explained, then the circuit to which the detection signal from the main frame opening switch is input, the circuit to which the payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, A circuit to which the detection signal from the full switch is input and a circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input will be described. It should be noted that various detection switches such as the full tank switch 550 and the out-of-ball switch 750, the counting switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal of 1 is input is almost the same, a circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank switch is input will be described here.

[10-2-3 (a). Circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)). When the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (disconnected) when the main body frame 3 is closed. The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 has a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power line. It is electrically connected to the end and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20 and also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and also the non-inverting buffer. The payout control is performed via the ICPIC 20 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 20 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 20A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 4120a. When the transistor PTR20 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a as a door opening signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. Is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26 by being pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR20. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 11 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR22 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as a main frame door opening signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 or when the door frame 5 is closed by the main body frame 3, The door frame opening switch 618 is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing a change in voltage from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a flapping phenomenon in which ON / OFF is repeated for a short time.

  A circuit formed of the resistors PR21 and PR22 and the transistor PTR20, a circuit formed of the resistors PR24 and PR25 and the transistor PTR21, and a circuit formed of the resistors PR26 and PR27 and the transistor PTR22 are door frame opening switches. A switch circuit that is turned on / off according to a detection signal from 618.

  When the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR20 is turned on. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. Thus, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR23 and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. It Further, when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor The PTR 21 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 22 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. Accordingly, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR20. Then, the transistor PTR20 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the door frame opening signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to + 5V to turn on the transistor PTR21. However, the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is increased to the + 5V side, so that the transistor PTR22 is turned ON. However, the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the main frame door opening signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

  As described above, when the door frame 5 is released from the main body frame 3, the door frame open switch 618 is turned on, so that the door frame open signal whose logic becomes HI is the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. The outer edge frame door opening information output signal, which is input to PA0 and whose logic is HI, is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 4100. When the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a. An outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and a main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

[10-2-3 (b). Circuit to which the detection signal from the main frame opening switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)). When the body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (disconnected) when the outer frame 3 is closed. The second terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 has a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power source line. It is electrically connected to the end and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29 and also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is also connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power source line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  The first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the resistor PR31 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and is shown in FIG. 11 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to the main control board 4100. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR24 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 4100 as a main frame door opening signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2. It is configured as a circuit also having a function of absorbing a variation in voltage from the body frame opening switch 619 due to a flapping phenomenon in which contacts constituting the body frame opening switch 619 repeat ON / OFF for a short time.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and a circuit composed of the resistors PR31 and PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits which are turned on / off by a detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619.

  When the body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the body frame opening switch 619 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR23 is opened. It turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the body frame opening switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and The PTR 24 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, when the body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame opening switch 619 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR23 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. Accordingly, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal board 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is output. It is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the body frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame opening switch 619 is off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR24 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door open signal whose logic becomes LOW is the main control board. 4100 is input.

  As described above, when the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is turned on, and the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the external terminal board 784. The main frame door opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the main control board 4100, while the main frame opening switch 619 is turned off when the main frame 3 is closed by the outer frame 2, Is output to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 4100.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 5 is closed by the main body frame 3 and the state in which the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 or both states. In this case, since the main frame door open signal is input to the main control board 4100, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 or the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2 based on the above, the door frame 5 and / or The player can judge that the state in which the main body frame 3 is open does not occur during the normal game, and the outer end frame door open information output signal is sent to the external terminal board 784. This outer end is supposed to be input The door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer through the external terminal board 784, and the hall computer is in a state where the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 based on the outer end frame door opening information output signal. Or, although it is not possible to determine whether the main body frame 3 is open from the outer frame 2, it is possible that the door frame 5 and / or the main body frame 3 is open, which does not occur during the normal game by the player. You can determine what is happening.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed switches, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited and the switch is turned ON ( Even if the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 even when the main frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited and the switch is turned on (conducts) for some reason, 3 is released from the outer frame 2. Thus, by adopting the normally closed switches for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 4100 even at the time of a short circuit, and the outer end The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

  If the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618 ′ and main body frame opening switch 619 ′). The door frame opening switch 618 ′ is turned on (conducts) when the door frame 5 is closed from the main body frame 3, and is turned off (disconnected) when the door frame 5 is opened to the main body frame 3. . The body frame opening switch 619 'is turned on (conducts) when the body frame 3 is closed from the outer frame 2, and is turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618 'is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 5 remains open from the main body frame 3, and for some reason, the main body is also opened. Even when the frame opening switch 619 ′ is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the main body frame 3 is opened from the outer frame 2. As described above, even if the door frame opening switch 618 ′ and the main body frame opening switch 619 ′ are normally open switches, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 4100 even when the wire is broken. The outer edge frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3 (c). Circuit to which a power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input]
The transmission line for transmitting the payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided in the main control board 4100 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and also has resistance. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and also has a non-inverting buffer. The payout control is performed via the ICPIC 40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 4120a. When the transistor PTR40 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a as a payout power failure notice signal.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a power failure monitoring circuit 4100e provided in the main control board 4100 and a power failure notice signal.

  As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the signs of power failure or momentary power failure of two types of voltages of + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 851, and when detecting the power failure or momentary power failure, there is no reset function. A payout blackout notice signal is output to the payout control board 4110 as a power outage notice via the main control output circuit 4100cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e monitors the signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure of the voltages of + 12V and + 24V, and as described above, the condition that the voltage of + 24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions of being large are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW. While the payout power failure notice signal is input to the payout control board 4110, one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When the condition is met, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is Payout power failure warning signal of the voltage applied to the collector terminal wiring logic by via (harness) is pulled up to + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above it becomes HI is input to the payout control board 4110.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltage of + 12V and + 24V. At this time, since the withdrawal power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the withdrawal control board 4110, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR40 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V When there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure, the withdrawal power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the withdrawal control board 4110, and therefore is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 with the withdrawal power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e. The voltage applied to the transistor PTR40 is turned on by pulling up the voltage to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power failure notice signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  Thus, when there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V, the withdrawal power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the withdrawal control MPU4120a, When there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, the payout power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. As described above, when there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and / or + 24V, the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, the power failure notice signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 4100a. According to the power outage notice, the logic of the power outage notice signal input to the payout control MPU 4120a and the logic of the power outage notice signal input to the main control MPU 4100a have the same logic.

[10-2-3 (d). Circuit to which detection signal from full tank switch is input]
The detection signal from the full tank switch 550 provided in the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 1 is sent to the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal plate 192 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. It has been entered. The output terminal of the full tank switch 550 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 4110 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and is also electrically connected to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for full tank switch. The three-terminal filter PIC50 for a full-tank switch is a T-type filter circuit, which is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

  The second terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for full tank switch is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for full tank switch is connected to the three-terminal filter PIC50 for full tank switch via the resistor PR44b. Of the transistor PTR41 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 has its noise component removed by the full terminal switch three-terminal filter PIC50 and is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and is connected to the ground (GND) at one end. It is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC40 which is electrically connected. The capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and also the non-inverting buffer. The payout control is performed via the ICPIC 40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40B) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 4120a. When the transistor PTR41 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a as a full signal.

  The circuit including the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a detection signal from the full tank switch 550.

  As described above, the full tank switch 550 is for detecting whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is full. In the present embodiment, when the game space in which the accommodation space is stored is not full, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank switch 550 is paid out through the handle relay terminal plate 192 and the power supply board 851. In the control board 4110, when the pull-up resistor 44a pulls up the signal to + 12V side and the logic becomes HI, the signal is input to the payout control board 4110, and when the accommodation space is full of game balls, The signal applied to the output terminal of the full switch 550 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board 192 and the power supply board 851, and the signal whose logic is LOW is paid out. It is input to the control board 4110.

  When the accommodation space is not full with the stored game balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank switch 550 is pulled in the payout control board 4110 via the handle relay terminal board 192 and the power board 851. The signal that is pulled up to + 12V by the up resistor 44a and has the logic of HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, so that the transistor PTR41 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the full signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a.

  On the other hand, when the game space in which the accommodation space is stored is full, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank switch 550 is passed through the handle relay terminal plate 192 and the power supply board 851, and the payout control board 4110. In this case, the signal that is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, so that the transistor PTR41 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor PR47 and the full signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is input to the switch circuit including the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the full terminal switch three-terminal filter PIC50. However, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball break switch 750, the counting switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 12 are detected by a T-type filter circuit such as the three-terminal filter PIC50 for full tank switch. The circuit configuration is such that it is directly input to each switch circuit without going through. Since the full tank switch 550 is provided in the foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame 5, the out-of-ball switch 750, the counting switch 751, and the rotation angle switch 752 provided in the prize ball device 740 attached to the main body frame 3. Compared with the above, the path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long, and it is very susceptible to noise.

  The full tank switch 550 is for detecting whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 540 is full of game balls stored, and the payout control MPU 4120a is operated from the full tank switch 550. When it is determined that the accommodation space is full with the stored game balls based on the detection signal of, the driving control of the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped and the control of stopping the payout of the game balls by the payout rotating body is performed. I am supposed to do it. That is, when noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, the payout control MPU 4120a drives the payout motor 744 even though the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is not full. In some cases, control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game balls by the payout rotating body, and the payout motor 744 is driven and controlled despite the fact that the storage space is full of game balls. Then, when the payout rotating body is rotated and the payout of the game balls is continued, the above-mentioned prize ball passage is filled with the game balls up to the upstream side of the prize ball passage. The load is abnormally applied, and the pay-out motor 744 becomes overloaded and abnormally heats up to cause a failure, or the rotation shaft of the pay-out motor 744 is transmitted to the rotational movement of the pay-out rotating body. Sometimes referred to 構等 is or failure. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem, the circuit configuration is adopted so that the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is first removed by the noise component in the full terminal switch three-terminal filter PIC50. .

[10-2-3 (e). Circuit to which operation signal from operation switch is input]
The output terminals 1 and 2 of the operation switch 860a are grounded to the ground (GND), and the output terminals 3 and 4 of the operation switch 860a are connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 at the preceding stage through the resistor PR49. The base terminal of the transistor PTR42 at the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 860a, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose one end is grounded (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the preceding-stage transistor PTR42 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the preceding-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage through the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the latter-stage transistor PTR43 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC40C) without inverting it). It is electrically connected via the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 of the subsequent stage changes by turning on / off the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 of the previous stage and the signal changes as the RWMCLR signal, and the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. Entered in.

  Further, the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, that is, the third terminal and the fourth terminal, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 of the preceding stage via the resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the resistor PR55, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 4100 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 19 is + 12V. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR44 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a as a RAM clear signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 860a is pressed, the contact that constitutes the operation switch 860a repeatedly turns on and off for a short time. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in the voltage from the operation switch 860a.

  A circuit including the resistors PR49 and PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is a switch circuit in the preceding stage, and a circuit including the resistors PR52 and PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is a switch circuit in the subsequent stage, and the resistors PR55 and PR56 and the transistor PTR44. Is a switch circuit, which is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 860a.

  As described above, the operation switch 860a is provided in the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control board 4110 and the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is operated to clear the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM) or to clear the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. The function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time and the error release after the power is turned on (after the period for performing the function as RAM clear has passed, that is, after the predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on) It has functions and. The operation signal from the operation switch 860a becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, while it is after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on. In the function for canceling the error in), it becomes an error canceling signal.

  When the operation switch 860a is not operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, that is, the third terminal and the fourth terminal, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, so that the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is the transistor of the previous stage. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR42, the front-stage transistor PTR42 is turned on, and the front-stage switch circuit is also turned on, which is applied to the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR43 which is the voltage applied to the base of the rear-stage transistor PTR43. By lowering the voltage to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. The payout control MPU 4120a performs a RAM clear to erase the information stored in the payout control internal RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is determined that the instruction is not given, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI, error cancellation is performed. Judge that it is not an instruction.

  Further, when the operation switch 860a is not operated, the output signal of the operation switch 860a, that is, the output terminals No. 3 and No. 4 are pulled up to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is the transistor PTR44. Is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 and the transistor PTR44 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 4100. Is entered. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, when the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, as described above, this logic is LOW. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5 and the logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 4100a determines that it does not instruct to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is operated, the operation signal whose logic becomes LOW by pulling down the output terminal 3 and 4 of the operation switch 860a to the ground (GND) side is the transistor of the previous stage. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR42, the front-stage transistor PTR42 is turned off, the front-stage switch circuit is also turned off, and the voltage is applied to the base of the rear-stage transistor PTR43, which is applied to the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR42. The voltage that rises to the + 5V side by the resistor PR51 turns on the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage and also turns on the switch circuit in the subsequent stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU4120a. The payout control MPU 4120a performs a RAM clear to erase the information stored in the payout control internal RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is determined that the instruction is given, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW, error cancellation is performed. Judge that it is an instruction.

  Further, when the operation switch 860a is operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 860a, that is, the third terminal and the fourth terminal are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48, so that the logic becomes LOW. The signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The clear signal is input to the main control board 4100. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, when the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, as described above, this logic shown in FIG. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 turns on and the switch circuit also turns on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU4100a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 4100a determines that the instruction is to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Discharge motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 4120d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 25, the payout motor drive circuit 4120d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 4120da and a drive ICPIC 60. The power source input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 4120da are electrically connected to the + 12V power source line and the + 5V power source line, respectively, and + 12V and + 5V are applied, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da is connected to the ground (GND). It is grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the payout control output circuit with reset function 4120ca, and is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 4120ca to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switch circuit 4120da. It is supposed to be done. The power supply output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da is electrically connected to the cathode terminal 3 and the terminal 10 of the drive IC PIC60 via the Zener diode PZD60, and is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 744. No. 3 which is the cathode terminal of the drive IC PIC60 via the Zener diode PZD60 with + 12V or + 5V as the motor drive voltage based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 4120da. It supplies to the terminal and the 10th terminal, respectively, and supplies to the payout motor 744.

  The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the 6th terminal and the 7th terminal, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, are grounded to the ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. The payout motor drive signal is input to the certain 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The 2nd terminal, 4th terminal, 9th terminal and 11th terminal which are collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 are the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal and 12th terminal which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 respectively. Correspondingly, when the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, an excitation signal is generated. A drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 744. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function through the resistors PR60 to PR63 to the drive ICPIC 60. The signals are output to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal, which are base terminals, respectively. These drive pulses are performed by switching the excitation currents flowing in the respective phases (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 744, and rotate the payout motor 744. When the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. When this counter electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 is damaged. Therefore, as a protection, the Zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected to the cathode IC of the drive ICPIC 60 in front of the 3rd terminal and the 10th terminal. Adopted a circuit configuration that does.

[10-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, the CR unit input / output circuit 4120e for inputting / outputting various signals to / from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 13 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 4110 receives, from the CR unit 6, the rental ball connection signal BRDY and the one-time payout operation start request signal BRQ via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869. , And a predetermined voltage VL (+ 12V) created from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 851 shown in FIG. 13 and a ground LG are supplied, while the payout control board 4110 is connected to a lending device such as a game ball. Through the terminal board 869, an EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible or impossible. And output. As shown in FIG. 26, the input / output circuit for inputting / outputting these various signals mainly includes photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (incorporating an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. At times, the photo coupler PIC70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71 and also connected to the transistor via the resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR 71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

  The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and also the non-inverting buffer. 22 through the ICPIC 80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a shown in FIG. When the transistor PTR70 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and the signal is input as a CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply substrate 851 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 851 via a wiring (harness), one end of the power supply board 851 is electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line (not shown) and is a pull-up resistor (not shown). Is electrically connected to the other end of. When the transistor PTR71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply substrate 851 as a CR connection signal.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR70 is turned on by being pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a. It

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR71 is turned on by being pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 851 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply board 851. It

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 851 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply board 851. To be done.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on while the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 is provided with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC80B) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the. The photocoupler PIC71 is turned on / off to change the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. The BRDY signal whose logic applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The BRDY signal whose logic is HI because the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR78 is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. In this way, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on while the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 is provided with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC80C) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to +5 V by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a. As described above, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

  The EXS signal that notifies that the one payout operation is started or finished from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a is output to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function and the payout control output circuit without the reset function. It is input from the 4120cb to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4120a. The photocoupler PIC73 is turned off when the logic of the EXS signal that is output from the output terminal of the output circuit 4120cb without the reset function is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is inside the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR83. At a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input as EXS to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

  When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the EXS whose logic becomes LOW is the CR unit. 6 to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83 and the logic becomes HI. EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. Thus, the logic of EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the same as the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function. It has the same logic.

  The PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a is possible or impossible is a cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered in. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4120a. The photocoupler PIC74 is turned off when the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of No. 4 through the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is inside the CR unit 6 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR86. At a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

  When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the logic of LOW becomes PR unit. 6 to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86 and the logic becomes HI. PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the same as the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input / output signals to payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from the input / output terminals of various input / output ports of the payout control MPU 4120a will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 22, the RXD terminal which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 4120a receives the serial data from the main control board 4100 as the main pay serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 4120b. To be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, the serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 4100 is sent to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function as a payer serial data transmission signal. The payout control output circuit 4120cb having no reset function transmits a payer serial data transmission signal to the main control board 4100.

  To each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU4120a, the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, payout blackout notice signal, door open signal, full signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) In addition to the input of the signal 1 etc.), for example, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 4100 for notifying the normal reception completion of the above-mentioned payment main serial data reception signal is sent via the payout control input circuit 4120b. For example, the detection signals from the out-of-ball switch 750, the counting switch 751, the rotation angle switch 752, and the like shown in FIG. 12 are input via the payout control input circuit 4120b.

  On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function to output the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit 4120cb without the reset function. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 4120e, or the above-mentioned voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to output the voltage switching signal from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to the voltage switching circuit 4120da. Output or output the payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function, and output the payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with a reset function to the payout motor 744 via the payout motor drive circuit 4120d. In addition to the above, for example, the payer ACK signal for notifying the normal reception completion of the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function and paid out from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. The main ACK signal is output to the main control board 4100, or the drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. 12 is output to the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function to output the drive signal from the payout control output circuit 4120ca with reset function. Is output to the error LED display device 860b.

[10-3. Various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 4110 and the main control board 4100 and various output signals from the payout control board 4110 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG.

[10-3-1. Various input / output signals with main control board]
The payout control board 4110 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 4100. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27A, the payout control board 4110 has the above-mentioned payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door opening signal, etc. Is output to the main control board 4100. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 4100b of the main control board 4100.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 4110, in addition to the main payment serial data reception signal, the main payment ACK signal, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, and the like. Big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, starting mouth winning information output signal, etc. Signals and the like are input from the main control board 4100. These input signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 4120b of the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 4110 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27B, in addition to the outer end frame door opening information output signal described above, the prize ball number information output signal indicating the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744. , From the main control board 4100 through the payout control board 4110, in addition to the jackpot information output signal such as 15 round jackpot information output signal and 2 round jackpot information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special symbol display information output A game information signal such as a signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving information output signal, and a start opening winning information output signal is output to the external terminal board 784. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784.

  A signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a not-shown game hall (hall), and the hall computer monitors the game and the like of the player. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer determines the number of jackpots in which the number of rounds is two (2 round jackpot). The number of jackpots of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the sum of the number of jackpots) and the number of jackpots in which the number of rounds is 15 (the number of jackpots in 15 rounds). For this reason, since the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of the two-round jackpot or the 15-land jackpot from the total number of jackpots, the number of jackpots actually generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is large. However, it is impossible to know whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. In addition, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko gaming machine 1, and some players may decide whether or not to play a game by referring to the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter. Some choose.

  However, the number of times of occurrence of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter may be biased to the number of occurrences of the two-round jackpot in practice, so even if the player starts the game, only the two-round jackpot occurs. In some cases, a 15-round jackpot does not occur easily. As described above, the number of times of occurrence of the big hit game state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may cause the player to be more motivated than necessary.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the 15th round jackpot information output signal and the 2nd round jackpot information output signal are separately output to the hall computer as the jackpot information output signal, so that the hall computer generates the number of occurrences of the 2nd round jackpot. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of times of 15 rounds of big hits. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the two-round big hit or the 15-round big hit, and the data counter has 15 hits. The number of round jackpot occurrences and the number of two round jackpots can be displayed separately or only the number of 15 round jackpots can be displayed as the number of jackpot gaming states, so that the player's aspirations are increased more than necessary. Nor.

  In the present embodiment, the 2-round big hit information output signal is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period until the 2-round big hit occurs and ends, and the 15-round big hit information output signal is also the 15-round big hit. It is in the state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence to the end. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when the 2-round jackpot is generated, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output for a predetermined period. When the 15 round big hit information is output to the hall computer, the 15 round big hit information output signal is output to the hall computer only for a predetermined period. Such a 2 round big hit information output signal and the 15 round big hit information A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Commands related to transmission / reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 31. 28 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 29 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. Is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 29, and FIG. 31 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board will be described, and subsequently, various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[11-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives detection signals from various winning switches such as the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. When inputted, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicating with the pachinko gaming machine 1 to drive the payout motor 744 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (prize ball device 740) to store the upper tray 301, When a device for paying out game balls as a rental ball is electrically connected to the lower plate 302 (such a pachinko gaming machine is referred to as a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 28 (a). In the prize ball command transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110, commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared. In the command 10H, one prize ball is provided. The command 11H designates two prize balls, the command 1EH designates 15 prize balls. The payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

  In addition, a pachinko gaming machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out the game balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, which are storage plates, as rental balls) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). When the gaming machine 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko gaming machine is referred to as a “general machine”), as shown in FIG. 28B, payout from the main control board 4100. Command 20H to command 2EH are prepared as prize ball commands to be transmitted to the control board 4110. One prize ball is designated by the command 20H, two prize balls are designated by the command 21H, ..., Command In 2EH, 15 prize balls are designated. The payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

  As shown in FIG. 28C, a command 30H is prepared as a command common to CR machines and general machines, and self-check is designated in this command 30H. By transmitting the command 30H and checking whether or not the ACK signal is input, the transmission side transmits the command 30H when the ACK signal to be output as a confirmation of receipt of the command is not input from the reception side for a predetermined period after transmitting the command. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine according to the present embodiment, the payout control board 4110 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[11-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4140 will be described. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4140 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), And a mode showing a variation of the effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, various commands include special figure 1 synchronization effect related, special figure 2 synchronization effect related, jackpot related, power-on, general figure synchronization effect related, normal electric figure effect related, notification display, status It is divided into display and other.

[11-2-1. Special figure 1 synchronization production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022 shown in FIG. 11, and its division is, as shown in FIG. 29, the function display substrate 1191 shown in FIG. Concerning the upper special symbol display device 1185, it is composed of commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and fluctuation state designation. To these various commands, “A * H” is assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It indicates that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 1 entrainment effect start command is for instructing the start of special figure entrainment effect in the effect pattern designated by the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command is for designating off, specific big hit, non-specific big hit. The special figure 1 entrainment effect end command is an instruction to end the special figure 1 entrainment effect, and the fluctuation state designation command is an instruction to specify the probability and the time saving state.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command is sent at the start of special symbol 1 fluctuation, the special symbol 1 designation command is sent immediately after the start of special figure 1 tuning effect, and the special figure 1 tuning The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[11-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronization performance related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109 shown in FIG. 11, and its division is as shown in FIG. Regarding the lower special symbol display device 1186, it is composed of commands named special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. To these various commands, “B * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode is assigned (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It indicates that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 2 entrainment effect start command is for instructing the start of special figure entrainment effect in the effect pattern specified by the mode, and the special symbol 2 specifying command is for specifying the deviating, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot. The special figure 2 entrainment effect end is an instruction to end the special figure 2 entrainment effect.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is sent at the time of starting the special symbol 2 variation, the special symbol 2 designation command is sent immediately after the start of the special figure 2 tuning effect, and the special figure 2 tuning The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[11-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 29, in the category of big hit related, big hit opening, big winning opening 1 open N times display, big winning opening 1 closed display, big winning opening 1 count display, big hit ending, big hit symbol display, small hit opening , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending command. To these various commands, “C * H” is assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It indicates that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The big hit opening command is for instructing to start the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command starts during the big winning opening 1 opening of the 1st to 16th rounds (of the attacker unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). It is for instructing the opening or opening of the Nth round of the special winning opening 2103, and the special winning opening 1 closing display command is the start of closing the special winning opening 1 between rounds (the big winning opening of the attacker unit 2100). 2103 rounds are being closed or the start of closing is instructed), and the special winning opening 1 count display command counts 0 to 10 counts (detected by the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 11, The number of game balls that entered the special winning opening 2103) is transmitted, and the big hit ending command is a big hit endin Is intended to instruct the start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (during opening or opening of the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 during the small hit). The small hit count display command is for the small hit medium big prize opening winning effect (when the game ball entered the big winning opening 2103 during the small hit is detected by the count switch 2110). The small hit ending command is an instruction to start a small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is the big winning opening 1 opening of the 1st to 16th rounds (the big hit of the attacker unit 2100). When the Nth round of the winning opening 2103 is opened), the special winning opening 1 closing display command is sent when the special winning opening 1 is closed (closing of the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is started), and the big winning is awarded. The mouth 1 count display command is used when the special winning opening 1 is opened and when the count to the special winning opening 1 is changed (when the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened, and the game ball entered in the special winning opening 2103 is a count switch). 2110), the jackpot ending command is sent when the jackpot ending starts. Transmitted, big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2103 attacker unit 2100).

  The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is transmitted when the small hit is opened (when the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 is opened during the small hit). The hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium-large winning opening (when the game ball that entered the big winning opening 2103 during the small hit is detected by the count switch 2110), and the small hit ending command is Sent at the start of the small hit ending. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[11-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 29, the power-on category is made up of various commands named power-on. In this power-on command, "D * H" is assigned as the status and "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It indicates that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The power-on command is for instructing the start of RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, the start of effect when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated at the time of power-on shown in FIG. 12). Is something to instruct).

  As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted at times other than RAM clear when the main control board power is turned on and RAM clear. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, at the time of returning from a power failure or momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated, a main control side power-on process described later. Is executed and the power-on command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[11-2-5. Normal figure synchronization production related]
The general figure tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 11, and the division thereof is, as shown in FIG. 29, the normal pattern display of the function display substrate 1191 shown in FIG. Concerning the container 1189, it is composed of commands named general figure synchronization effect start, general figure designation, general figure synchronization effect end, and fluctuation state specification. To these various commands, “E * H” is assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It indicates that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The universal figure synchronization effect start command is for instructing to start the universal figure synchronization effect in the effect pattern specified by the mode, and the universal symbol specification command is for specifying a falling edge, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the variation state designation command is for instructing the probability and the time saving state.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the universal figure synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the start of the normal symbol 1 variation, the universal symbol specification command is transmitted immediately after the start of the universal figure synchronization effect, and the universal figure synchronization effect end command is , Ordinary symbol variation time has elapsed (when the regular symbol is confirmed), the state change command at the time of variation is transmitted immediately after the universal symbol winning information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[11-2-6. Normal electric power director related]
The normal electric role effect is related to the pair of movable pieces 2106 shown in FIG. 8 which is opened and closed by driving the starting opening solenoid 2105 shown in FIG. 11. It consists of a command called "Opening per figure", "Public opening", and "End per figure". A status of “F * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It indicates that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The universal figure opening command is an instruction to start the universal figure opening, and the universal battery open display command is a universal battery open start (a pair of movable pieces 2106 is opened in the left-right direction by driving the starting opening solenoid 2105). The normal command ending command is used to instruct the ending of the universal drawing ending command.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the universal figure opening command is transmitted at the start of the universal figure opening, and the universal battery open display command is transmitted when the universal battery is opened (the pair of movable pieces 2106 are driven by the starter solenoid 2105). The ending command per universal figure is transmitted at the start of ending per universal figure. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[11-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 30, the notification display category is made up of commands with names of winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. A status of "6 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It indicates that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The prize abnormality display command is for a game ball to enter the special winning opening 2103 of the attacker unit 2100 when the special winning opening is won except during the big hit (condition device is operating). When the count switch 2110 detects), the start of the prize abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, an electrical connection in the path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110. When there is an abnormality, the connection abnormality notification is instructed to start. The disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, the main control board 4100, the upper starting port switch 3022, the lower starting port switch 2109, and the count switch 2110. When a disconnection or short circuit occurs in the electrical connection of the Display command is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection switch 3024 shown in FIG. 11.

  Further, the door opening command is issued to the main body frame 3 by the door frame 5 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input through the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. When the door frame 5 is in the opened state, the door frame is informed, and the door frame closing command causes the door frame 5 to close the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. In the case of the opened state, the end of the door opening notification is instructed. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command is issued by the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input through the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. The main frame closing command is used to instruct the main frame opening notification when the main frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619. When it is in the closed state, the end of the body frame opening notification is instructed.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, a prize abnormality display command is transmitted when a prize is won at the special winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is sent from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 4110. Is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 4110 at the time of sending a command to the , Which is sent when a wire break or short circuit occurs, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is sent when an abnormality of the magnetic detection switch 3024 is detected. Further, the door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 5 is in the opened state with respect to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), The frame closing command is transmitted when the door closing is detected (when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The body frame opening command is transmitted when the body frame opening is detected (when the body frame 3 is opened to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). The frame closing command is transmitted when the body frame closing is detected (when the body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[11-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 30, the status display section is composed of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to error occurrence command), error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to error cancellation command) and frame status 2 command. There is. A status of “7 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It indicates that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands each having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 4110, and a detailed description thereof will be given later. . When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame status 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame status 2 command from the payout control board 4110, as shown in FIG. 30, “7 * H” is set. The status is set as well as the received command is directly set as the mode. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 4110, it adds the additional information “7 * H” to these received commands. Is formatted into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame is changed, and when the error is cleared, the error clear navigation command is sent when the error is cleared, and the frame 2 command is created when the power is restored. , And when the frame status changes. The shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[11-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 30, the test-related section is made up of various commands named test. The status "8 * H" and the mode "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to this test command ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). Is shown, which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the peripheral control section 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control section 4160, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame shown in FIG. 14). Various boards such as the decoration drive amplifier board 194 are inspected).

  As the transmission timing of the test command, the RAM is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on and is transmitted at times other than RAM clear. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, at the time of returning from a power failure or momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 is operated, a main control side power-on process described later. Is executed and the test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[11-2-10. Other]
In other categories, as shown in FIG. 30, starting mouth winning, variation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect, and It is composed of a command named special symbol 2 memory prefetching effect. A status of "9 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It indicates that it is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The start mouth winning command is for instructing the start of the start winning effect, and the start of the effect when the game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, and Based on the detection signal from the starting opening switch 2109, the start of the effect when the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 is respectively instructed, and the fluctuation shortening operation end designating command changes from the fluctuation shortening operation state. It is for instructing the state transition to the fluctuation shortening non-operating state, the high probability end designation command is for instructing the state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state, and the special symbol 1 memory command is the special symbol. 1 hold 0 to 4 pieces (the game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 shown in FIG. 8 and the special symbol display device 1185 on the function display board 1191 has not yet been used for variable display of the special symbol. The number of balls that are not used (the number of reserves) is transmitted, and the special symbol 2 memory command is 0-4 special symbols 2 pending (the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 shown in FIG. 8). The special symbol display 1186 below the function display board 1191 conveys the number of balls not yet used in the variable display of the special symbol (the number of reserves), and the normal symbol storage command is 0-4 regular symbols 1 reserved. (The number of balls that has not been used yet for the variable display of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 1189 of the function display substrate 1191 after the game balls have passed through the gate portion 2350 shown in FIG. 8 is transmitted. , Special symbol 1 memory prefetch effect command, before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 1185 on the function display board 1191, on the basis of the special symbol 1 hold special It is to instruct the pre-reading effect start to notify the advance notice of the display result by the pattern display device 1185, and the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command is a special symbol in the special symbol display device 1186 below the special symbol 2 hold function display board 1191. Before it is used for the variable display, it pre-reads and instructs the pre-reading effect start to notify the advance notice of the display result by the lower special symbol display 1186 based on the special symbol 2 hold.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting mouth winning command is a starting mouth winning command (when a game ball enters the upper starting mouth 2101 based on a detection signal from the upper starting mouth switch 3022, or a lower starting mouth switch). When the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 based on the detection signal from the 2109), the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the door frame shown in FIG. The speaker 130 provided in FIG. 5 is mainly transmitted by voice to notify that effect, and the fluctuation reduction operation end designating command is issued at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is fixed after the specified number of times of fluctuation reduction have been exhausted (delay stop period elapses). The high-probability end designation command is sent at the end of the suspension period (after the elapse of the out-of-phase suspension period) after the fluctuations have been confirmed, which has consumed the high-probability number in the case of "high probability N times". , Special symbol 1 memory command, when the number of special symbol 1 operation reserve balls changes (the game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 and the special symbol indicator 1185 on the function display board 1191 is still used for the variable display of the special symbol. In the state where there is a pending number that has not been done, when the game ball enters the upper starting port 2101 and the pending number increases, or from the pending number used for variable display of the special symbol on the upper special symbol display device 1185. When the number of holdings is reduced), the special symbol 2 memory command is sent when the special symbol 2 operation holding ball number changes (the game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 and the lower special symbol of the function display board 1191). In the state where there is a pending number which is not yet used in the variable display of the special symbol on the display device 1186, when the gaming ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 and the pending number increases, or from the pending number to the lower special symbol table It is transmitted when the holding number is reduced by using the variable display of the special symbol in the device 1186), and the normal symbol storage command is the normal symbol 1 operation holding ball number change (the game ball passes through the gate unit 2350). Ordinary symbol display 1189 of the function display board 1191, when there is a pending number that is not yet used in the variable display of the regular symbol, when the game ball passes through the gate section 2350 and the pending number increases, or the pending number It is transmitted to the normal symbol display 1189 from the number when the reserved number is used for the variable display of the normal symbol), and the special symbol 1 memory prefetch effect command is added when the special symbol 1 operation reserved ball number is increased (up start). When the game ball enters the mouth 2101 and the number of holdings increases, it is transmitted, and the special symbol 2 memory prefetching effect command is when the number of special symbol 2 operation holding balls increases (the game ball enters the lower starting port 2102). It will be sent when the number of holdings increases with a ball. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the start opening winning command is, when the game ball enters the upper starting opening 2101 based on the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, or from the lower starting opening switch 2109. When a game ball enters the lower starting opening 2102 based on the detection signal of the), the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 mainly emits the sound. Although it is transmitted in order to notify that, how the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 14 uses the starting opening winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to the voice notification from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, the presence or absence of fraud is monitored. It is also used for the purpose. On the other hand, in other pachinko game machines, the peripheral control board 4140 simply receives the start opening winning command, and the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker provided in the door frame 5 There is a specification that does not notify by voice from 130.

[11-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 4110 received by the main control board 4100 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 31, each command from the payout control board 4110 is divided into commands of a frame state 1, an error release navigation and a frame state 2, and the frame state 1, the error release navigation, and The priority order is set in the order of the frame state 2.

  The frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command) has a ball out, a full tank, a stock of 50 or more, a connection error and a CR not connected. Bit 0 (B0, "B") is provided when the ball is out. Represents a bit), the value 1 is set in the full tank, the value 1 is set in the bit 1 (B1), the value 1 is set in the bit 2 (B2) in 50 or more stocks, and the connection error occurs. The value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. A value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7 in bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command.

  The error clear navigation command (corresponding to the error clear command) has a ball ball, a counting switch error, and a retry error. In the ball ball, bit 2 (B2) is set to the value 1; The value 1 is set in the bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set in the bit 4 (B4) in the retry error. Here, the "count switch error" indicates whether or not the malfunction of the count switch 751 shown in FIG. 12 has occurred. The “retry error” indicates that the payout of game balls that are not consistent due to the retry operation has been repeatedly performed. The bit (B0), the bit (B1), and the bit 5 (B5) to the bit 7 (B7) of the error canceling navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, and a value 1 for B6. The value 0 is set in B7.

  The frame state 2 command is prepared for the ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during the ball removal. In bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command, B1 has a value of 0, B2 has a value of 0, B3 has a value of 0, B4 has a value of 0, B5 has a value of 1, B6 has a value of 1, and The value 0 is set in B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the frame state is changed, and at the time of error cancellation navigation, and the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted at the time of error cancellation navigation and the frame status 2 command. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame status changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[12. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 11 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the main control side power-on process continued, and FIG. 34 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart showing. First, various random numbers used in the game control will be described, and subsequently, the operation of the initial value updating type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control side timer interrupt process will be described.

[12-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a big hit determination random number used to determine whether to generate a big hit game state, and a big hit determination initial value determination used to determine the initial value of this big hit determination random number For random number, reach determination random number to be used for determining whether or not to reach (out of reach) when the big hit game state is not generated, and the upper special symbol display device 1185 and the lower special symbol shown in FIG. Random display pattern random number used to determine the variable display pattern of the special symbol that is displayed in a variable on the symbol display device 1186, and when generating the jackpot gaming state, the upper special symbol display device 1185 and the lower special symbol display device 1186 Random numbers for jackpot symbols to be used for determining the jackpot symbols that are derived and displayed, and jackpot symbols to be used for determining the initial value of the random numbers for this jackpot symbol Random number for initial value determination, a small hit symbol random number for use in determining the small hit symbol derived and displayed on the upper special symbol display device 1185 and the lower special symbol display device 1186 when generating the small hit game state, this small A random number for determining the initial value of the small hit symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random number for the winning symbol is prepared. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a normal symbol to be used for determining whether to open or close the movable piece 2106 shown in FIG. 8 and an initial value of the random number for determining a normal symbol are determined. Ordinary symbol per use determination initial value determination random numbers for use, and normal symbol variation display pattern random numbers for use in determining the variation display pattern of the ordinary symbol that is variably displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 1189 shown in FIG. Is prepared.

  For example, the counter for updating the random number for jackpot determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the minimum value 0 to the maximum value 32767). The range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing the value by 1 every time the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination toward the maximum value, and then from the minimum value to the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination. When the counter has finished counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter updating method is called “initial value updating type counter”. The big hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of lottery one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the big hit determination random number. Further, the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination described above are also the same as the update method of the random number for big hit determination described above.

  In the present embodiment, when the counter that updates the big hit determination random number finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit determination random number, as described above, for the big hit determination initial value determination The random number is updated by executing the initial value lottery process. However, when the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 12 is operated when the power is turned on, or the main control side described later. A checksum value (sum value) obtained by regarding the game information stored in the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. When clearing the entire area of the main control internal RAM, such as when the checksum value (sum value) stored in the power-off processing (power-off) does not match For the jackpot determination initial value determination random number, a main control MPU 4100a shown in FIG. 11 extracts an ID code from a nonvolatile RAM incorporated therein, and a counter for updating the jackpot determination random number based on the extracted ID code. The initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range is executed, and the derived fixed value is set. That is, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is always updated by overwriting the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. As described above, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is derived by using the ID code, and the ID is stored in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a by the manufacturer who manufactured the main control MPU 4100a. Based on the first security measure that the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used when the code is stored, and by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, The second security measure of deriving the same fixed value as described above and the two-step security measure of are taken to prevent analysis.

  Here, an advantage of extracting the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a and using the extracted ID code as the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination will be described. For example, a person who attempts to illegally obtain a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 4 by some method and disassembles the ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing when the value of the counter for illegally acquiring and updating the big hit determination random number and the big hit determination value can be grasped, the ID code is given a unique code for identifying the individual. Therefore, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 4100a ′ provided in the other game board 4 ′. In other words, in the other game board 4 ', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the big hit determination random number and the big hit determination value match are completely different from those of the game board 4 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 4 is completely useless in the other game board 4 ', that is, the other pachinko machine 1', and therefore is disassembled and analyzed. Even if an instantaneous stop is generated at each of the obtained predetermined intervals, and at each of the predetermined intervals, a win is achieved by entering a game ball into the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102 shown in FIG. A gaming state cannot be generated.

[12-2. Initial value update type counter operation]
The initial value update type counter fetches an ID code from the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 4100a when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (when RAM is cleared), and based on the fetched ID code. An initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination is executed, and this derived fixed value is set. The initial value update type counter counts up from this fixed value to the maximum value and then counts up from the minimum value to the fixed value in the first cycle. When the counter has finished counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, one value is randomly selected from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number as the jackpot determination initial value determination random number. The initial value lottery process is performed, and the value obtained in this lottery is set. In the second cycle, the initial value update type counter counts up from the value obtained in the lottery to the maximum value, and then from the minimum value to the value obtained in the lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained in this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter is In the third cycle, the value obtained by the lottery is counted up toward the maximum value. In the present embodiment, as the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range), the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set in the low probability, and the value is read from the normal time judgment table, while the value 31768 to the value in the high probability. 32767 is set and is read from the probability variation time determination table. In the present embodiment, the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination updates a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the value 0 as the minimum value to the value 32767 as the maximum value. In other words, the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is a range closer to the maximum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both low probability and high probability. It is set.

  Here, as a range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range), when a value 10 to a value 209 is set at a low probability and a value 10 to a value 339 is set at a high probability, a big hit judgment is made. The value range (big hit determination range) is set to a range closer to the minimum value side from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both low probability and high probability. . In such a case, the period from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 to the first value 10 in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range), and the value 10 Comparing the period from the next value 11 to the maximum value (value 32767), the former period has a much lower probability of being drawn by the above-described initial value lottery process than the latter period. In other words, the range from the timing when the value of the initial value updating type counter becomes 0 to the last value (the value 209 for the low probability and the value 339 for the high probability) in the range of the large hit determination values (the big hit determination range). And the range from the value next to this last value (value 210 for low probability, value 340 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is the latter one. The probability of being drawn by the initial value drawing process is extremely low compared to the range. Then, for example, the value of the counter of the initial value update type is illegally acquired by some method and the electric ball is radiated toward the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102 to start the game ball upward. When the cheating acts as if the player has entered the mouth 2101 or the lower starting mouth 2102, the value of the initial value update type counter becomes one of the values in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range). It can be said that the probability is high.

  On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is from the intermediate value (value 16384) between the minimum value and the maximum value in both of the low probability and the high probability. If it is set to a range close to the maximum value side, from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0, it is before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range). The period from the time of reaching the value (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability) and the period from the first value (value 32668 for low probability, value 31768 for high probability) to the maximum value (value 32767). Comparing with the above, the probability of being drawn by the above-mentioned initial value drawing process is extremely higher in the former period than in the latter period. In other words, from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0, the value before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability). When comparing the range from the first value (low probability value 32668, high probability value 31768) to the maximum value (value 32767), the former range is compared to the latter range. The probability of being drawn by the initial value drawing process is extremely high. Then, the initial value update type counter has a range from the value 0 to the value before the first value in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) (value 32667 for low probability, value 31767 for high probability). Of these, any of the values will be set as the value randomly selected by the initial value selection process, and will be set in the above-mentioned random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination. It will count up and then count up from the minimum value to the value obtained by lottery. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value lottery process is executed again, the value obtained in this lottery is set, and the initial value update type counter is , The value obtained from the lottery will be counted up toward the maximum value.

  That is, as in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is either the low probability or the high probability, and the intermediate value between the minimum value and the maximum value (value 16384) to the maximum value side. When the value is set to a range closer to the value, the value before the first value (low value) in the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) from the timing when the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0. The period leading up to the time when the probability becomes the value 32667 and the high probability becomes the value 31767) is irregular and rich in randomness. Thereby, for example, the game ball is raised by illicitly acquiring the timing at which the value of the initial value update type counter becomes 0 by some method and irradiating the electric wave toward the upper starting opening 2101 and the lower starting opening 2102. Even if a fraudulent act of pretending to have entered the starting opening 2101 or the lower starting opening 2102 is performed, the value of the initial value update type counter is one of the ranges of the big hit judging value (big hit judging range). It can be said that the probability of becoming a value is low.

  The initial value update type counter is repeatedly updated in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value. From the initial value to the minimum value (first value) in the range of big hit judgment values (first hit value) until the counter reaches the minimum value (first value) in the range of big hit judgment values (big hit judgment range) in the second cycle The time required is time T0. In the third cycle from the time T0, the time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the range of the big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range) is the time T1, and the time T1 is shorter than the time T0. . In the fourth cycle from the time T1, the time required for the counter to reach the minimum value (first value) of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) is the time T2, and the time T2 is shorter than the time T1. . As described above, in the initial value update type counter, by giving fluctuation to the time when the updated counter is the minimum value (first value) of the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) (periodicity The player will not be able to detect it.

[12-3. Main control side power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the main control program described above performs the main control side power-on process as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33 under the control of the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100. To do. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets the stack pointer under the control of the main control MPU 4100a (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) being used, or the return address of this routine when exiting the subroutine and returning to this routine. It also indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, the main control program sets an initial address in the stack pointer and stacks the contents of the register, the return address, etc. on the stack from the initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

  Following step S10, the main control program starts the output of the power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e shown in FIG. 20 (step S11). The power failure monitoring circuit 4100e includes a comparator MIC21 that is a voltage comparison circuit and a D-type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, outputs the comparison result by comparing the voltage of + 24V and the reference voltage or by comparing the voltage of + 12V and the reference voltage. This comparison result shows that when no power failure or momentary power failure occurs, its logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. In step S11, the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is started. This power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a, with its logic being LOW, through the main control output circuit 4100ca with a reset function. To be done. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a can release the latched state of the D type flip-flop MIC22, and until the latched state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is applied. The signal can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control program performs wait timer processing 1 (step S12) and determines whether or not a power failure advance notice signal is input (step S14). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when the voltage drops below the power failure notification voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e inputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from the time when the power is turned on to the predetermined voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e inputs the power failure warning signal. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 of step S12 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. In step S14, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. This determination is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, as the power failure notice signal.

  After the power is turned on in step S14, when there is no input of the power failure notification signal even after waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure notification voltage and becomes stable, the main control program causes a power failure to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. The output of the clear signal is stopped (step S15). Here, the power failure clear signal is a clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, which is a clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, through the main control output circuit with reset function 4100ca, with its logic being HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a. Entered in. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a can set the D type flip-flop MIC22 in the latched state. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power failure advance notice signal from the output terminal 1Q terminal when the state in which the logic is LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal is latched.

  Following step S15, the main control program sets a state in which a RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time after the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 12 has been operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) to the main control MPU 4100a based on an operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110. It is done depending on whether or not it has been done. Based on the logical value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that it does not instruct to clear the RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is HI, and the operation switch 860a is operated. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is LOW, it is determined that the instruction is to clear the RAM and it is determined that the operation switch 860a is operated.

  In step S16, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 1 when the operation switch 860a is operated (step S18). On the other hand, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 860a is not operated in step S16 (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clear process for initializing a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 4100a for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. In this state (game control side power-on operation control means). The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above indicates whether or not to erase the game information related to the game such as probability variation, unpaid prize balls, etc. stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 4100a. It is a flag that indicates and is set to a value of 1 when erasing the game information and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait timer processing 2 (step S22). In this wait timer processing 2, the system for controlling the drawing of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 by the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. 14 is activated (boot. Waiting). In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as the time until booting (boot timer).

  Following step S22, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S24). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S24, that is, when the game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S26). This checksum regards the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total thereof.

  Following step S26, the main control program determines that the calculated checksum value (sum value) is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power-off processing (power-off) described later. It is determined whether they match (step S28). When they match, this main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S30). This backup flag BK-FLG stores and holds game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in main power supply side power-off processing to be described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been done, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power-off process is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main control side power-off process is not normally completed.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S30, that is, when the main control-side power-off processing is normally completed, the main control program sets the work area of the main control internal RAM as the power recovery time ( Step S32). In this setting, the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value of 0, and the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), and this power recovery is performed. The time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "power recovery" means that, in addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the state where the power is restored after a power failure or an instantaneous power failure, the high frequency is detected and reset, It also includes the state of returning after that.

  Subsequent to step S32, the main control program performs power-on command creation processing (step S34). In this power-on command creation processing, the game information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S24, that is, when the game information is deleted, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S28. , Or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S30, that is, when the main-control-side power-off process is not normally completed, the main control program executes the entire main control internal RAM. The area is cleared (step S36). That is, the main control program executes the game control control side RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 860a described above (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the ROM with built-in main control as an initial value. Further, the main control MPU 4100a, the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is for instructing the RAM clear, when deleting the game information, when the thumb value does not match, or the main control side power off processing When not normally completed, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is taken out, and the jackpot determination random number is updated based on the taken out ID code. An initial value derivation process for deriving the same fixed value is performed, and this fixed value is set to the big hit determination initial value determination random number used for determining the initial value of the big hit determination random number described above.

  Following step S36, the main control program sets the work area of the main control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S38). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the ROM with built-in main control and setting this initial information in the work area of the RAM with built-in main control.

  Following step S38, the main control program performs RAM clear notification and test command creation processing (step S40). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation processing, a power-on command classified into power-on shown in FIG. 29 for notifying that the main control built-in RAM has been cleared and initialization has been performed, and the peripheral Test commands classified for the test shown in FIG. 30 for performing various inspections of the control board 4140 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM.

  Following step S34 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets an interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control program sets interrupt permission (step S44). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process is repeated every 4 ms, ie, the interrupt period set in step S42.

  Subsequent to step S44, when a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, that is, when the main processing on the main control side is started, the main control program outputs an error release navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 860a (operation switch). Execution of the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the reception will be restricted (normal time operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to detect the detection signal input in accordance with the operation of the operation switch 860a, as described above, for the error release navigation command for a predetermined time from the power-on time. The RAM clear processing is executed upon input (game control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, execution of the RAM clear processing is restricted even if the error clear navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means) is handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification associated with the error that has occurred. That is, the operation switch 860a (error canceling unit), which was originally supposed to be used to cancel the error that has occurred in the payout operation, is used as the game storing unit instead of the power-on for a predetermined time. Of the main control built-in RAM (and a payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit to be described later) is caused to function as an operation unit for executing a RAM clear process for starting initialization, or after a predetermined time has elapsed, a game is played. It can be made to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred in the payout operation of the ball.

  Next, the main control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S46). The watchdog timer is cleared and set by sequentially setting the value A, the value B and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control program determines whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input (step S48). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off, or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage, a power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e as a power failure notification. The determination in step S48 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When no power failure notice signal is input in step S48, the main control program performs a non-win random number updating process (step S50). In the non-win / win random number updating process, the reach determination random number, the variable display pattern random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, the small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number updating process, the random numbers that are not involved in the winning / judging determination (big hit determination) are updated. In addition, the random number per normal symbol, the random number for determining the initial value per normal symbol, the random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number updating process.

  After step S50, the process returns to step S46 again, and the main control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, determines in step S48 whether or not the power failure warning signal is input, and the power failure warning is notified. If no signal is input, a non-winning random number updating process is performed in step S50, and steps S46 to S50 are repeated. The processing of steps S46 to S50 is referred to as "main control side main processing".

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S48, the main control program sets the interrupt prohibition (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control internal RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Following step S52, the main control program starts outputting the power failure clear signal (step S53). Here, the same processing as the processing that started outputting the power failure clear signal in step S11 is performed. Thereby, the main control program can release the latched state of the D type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Subsequent to step S53, the main control program is the starting opening solenoid 2105, the attacker solenoid 2108, the upper special symbol display 1185, the lower special symbol display 1186, the upper special symbol storage display 1184, and the lower special shown in FIG. The drive signal output to the symbol storage display 1187, the normal symbol display 1189, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the game state display 1183, the round display 1190, etc. is stopped (step S54).

  Subsequent to step S54, the main control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S56). This checksum regards the game information of the work area of the main control internal RAM as a numerical value, and excludes the storage area of the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, and calculates the total.

  Following step S56, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 1 (step S58). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

  Following step S58, the main control program sets the watchdog timer for clearing (step S60). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, as described above.

  Following step S60, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a is reset, and then the main control MPU 4100a performs the main control side power-on process again. The process of steps S52 to S60 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off process".

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a) is reset when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, and the main control side power-on processing is performed by subsequent power restoration.

  In step S28, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S30, whether or not the main control side power-off processing is normally ended. Are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraud.

[12-4. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. The main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 32 and 33.

  When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, in the main control board 4100, the main control program sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL under the control of the main control MPU 4100a as shown in FIG. (Step S70). At this time, a value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S46 of the main control side power-on process (main control side main process).

  Following step S70, the main control program clears the interrupt flag (step S72). By clearing this interrupt flag, the interrupt cycle is initialized, and the next interrupt cycle is clocked from its initial value.

  Subsequent to step S72, the main control program performs a switch input process (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 4100a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Specifically, this main control program is, for example, a detection signal from the general winning opening switches 3020, 3020 shown in FIG. 11 for detecting the game balls entered in the general winning openings 2104, 2201 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the count switch 2110 shown in FIG. 11 which detects the game ball that entered the special winning opening 2103 shown in FIG. 8 and the figure which detects the game ball entered in the upper starting opening 2101 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022 shown in FIG. 11, the detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109 shown in FIG. 11 which detects the game ball entering the lower starting opening 2102 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the gate switch 2352 shown in FIG. 11 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2350 shown in the figure, and the magnetic detection switch that detects fraudulent activity using the magnet shown in FIG. 1130 and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 4110 which indicates that the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 11 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later. It is read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. Further, the detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022 that detects the game ball that entered the upper starting opening 2101, and the detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109 that detects the game ball that entered the lower starting opening 2102 are read. Then, the corresponding starting mouth winning commands shown in FIG. 30 and corresponding thereto are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022, the corresponding starting opening winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and when there is a detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109, The starting mouth winning command corresponding to this is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020 that detect the game balls that entered the general winning openings 2104 and 2201, and the count switch 2110 that detects the game balls that entered the large winning opening 2103. Detection signal from the upper starting opening switch 3022 that detects the game ball that entered the upper starting opening 2101, a detection signal from the lower starting opening switch 2109 that detects the game ball that entered the lower starting opening 2102 , And the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2350 is first read as the first time when this switch input processing is started, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed. It is read again for the second time. Then, the result read for the second time is compared with the result read for the first time. It is determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is treated as having no game ball.

  As described above, in the switch input process, the main control program receives the detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 for the first time. By performing twice reading a total of two times, that is, reading twice for comparing the third time and reading twice for comparing the second time to the fourth time, erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc. Therefore, the reliability of detection signals from the general winning opening switches 3020 and 3020, the count switch 2110, the upper starting opening switch 3022, the lower starting opening switch 2109, and the gate switch 2352 is improved. be able to.

  Subsequent to step S74, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time when the upper special symbol display device 1185 and the lower special symbol display device 1186 are turned on in accordance with the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process described later, and the normal symbol described later and In addition to the time when the normal symbol display device 1189 lights according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal electric accessory control process, the payout control substrate 4110 normally issues various commands transmitted by the main control substrate 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). The time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed when determining whether or not the payer ACK signal indicating that the payment has been received is input. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is decremented by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed. Then, the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes the value 0.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. The ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed, and the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured because the subtraction result becomes the value 0. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S76, the main control program performs a winning random number update process (step S78). In this winning random number updating process, the above-described big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number, and small hit symbol random number are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number, which is updated in the non-winning random number updating process of step S50 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 33, Also, the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is updated. The random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are respectively updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), so each time the winning random number update process is performed, each counter Will count up.

  For example, the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number is, as described above, an initial value update type counter, and has a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the value is set as the minimum value. The value is updated within the value 32767) as 0 to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing the value by 1 each time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed. The random number for initial value determination for jackpot determination is counted up toward the maximum value (value 32767), and then the random number for initial value determination for jackpot determination is counted up from the minimum value (value 0). When the counter for updating the big hit judging random number finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judging random number, the big hit judging initial value deciding random number is updated by the hit random number updating process. The big hit determination initial value determination random number can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of lottery one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter that updates the big hit determination random number. In addition, the above-mentioned normal symbol hitting determination random number, the normal symbol hitting determination initial value determining random number are also updated by this winning random number updating process. Ordinary symbol hit determination random numbers and the like are the same as the above-described big hit determination random numbers updating method, and description thereof will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit determination initial value determination random number, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number, and the small hit symbol initial value determination random number, the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 33 (main control Side main processing), the non-winning random number updating processing in step S50 and the winning random number updating processing in step S78 in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is the main routine, are respectively updated, but this routine is executed each time an interrupt timer occurs. If the number of times the non-winning random number updating process in step S50 is performed is random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer is generated due to unevenness in the processing time , A big hit determination initial value determination random number, a big hit symbol initial value determination random number, and a small hit symbol initial value determination random number in step S50 Or as a mechanism to update only in non Toraku random number update process.

  Following step S78, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S80). In this prize ball control processing, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the prize ball command shown in FIG. 28 for paying out the game balls based on this input information is created, or with the main control board 4100. The self-check command shown in FIG. 28 for confirming the connection state between the payout control board 4110 and the board is created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 4110 as main pay serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the special winning opening 2103 shown in FIG. 8 and enters the ball, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created and transmitted to the payout control board 4110. When the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 4110 has normally received is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command for confirming the connection state between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 is created. Then, it is transmitted to the payout control board 4110.

  Following step S80, the main control program performs a frame command reception process (step S82). In the payout control board 4110, the payout control program has various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified into the status display shown in FIG. 31 (for example, frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command). To send. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release navigation command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 860a. In the frame command reception processing described above, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, the information to inform the payout control board 4110 of that fact is stored as output information in the output information storage of the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. Further, the main control program shapes the command normally received as the payer serial data into a command of 2 bytes (16 bits) (various commands classified into the status display of FIG. 30 (frame status 1 command, error cancellation) The navigation command and the frame state 2 command)) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

  Following step S82, the main control program performs fraudulent activity detection processing (step S84). In this fraudulent activity detection processing, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the count switch 2110 is input when the jackpot is not in the gaming state (when the game ball enters the special winning opening 2103), etc. The abnormal winning state display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 30 is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Following step S84, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S86). In this special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned random number for jackpot determination is taken out and coincides with the jackpot determination value stored in the main control internal ROM (big hit). Judgment whether to generate a game state (referred to as "special lottery")), or take out the value of the counter that updates the big hit symbol random number, and the probability variation hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control ROM. It is determined whether or not they match (determination as to whether or not a probability change occurs). Here, the “probability change” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (probability change time) set higher than in a normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, as the range of the above-mentioned big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range), the values 32668 to 32767 are set in the low probability and are read from the normal time judgment table, whereas the value 31768 is set in the high probability. A value 32767 is set and is read from the probability variation time determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing of step S86, whether or not the value of the counter for updating the big hit determination random number and the big hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance match each other. When determining whether or not, the value of the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination is included in the jackpot determination range.

  When these determination results are based on the upper starting opening switch 3022, various commands related to special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. 29 are created, while the lottery result is based on the lower starting opening switch 2109. In the special figure 2 synchronization effect related various commands shown in FIG. 29 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the upper special symbol display device 1185 or according to the determined variable display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the upper special symbol display 1185 or the lower special symbol display 1186 is set so as to light the lower special symbol display 1186, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information. Further, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when the big hit game state is reached, various commands classified as the big hit related ones shown in FIG. 29 (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command, big winning opening 1 A closing display command, a special winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening / closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened / closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the special winning opening 2103 is changed from the closed state to the open state twice (round), Turn on the two-round display lamp 1190a of the round display 1190 shown in FIG. Output of a lighting signal to the round display lamp 1190a is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of rounds is 15, the 15 round display lamp 1190b of the round display 1190 shown at 89 is turned on. The output of the lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp 1190b is set so as to be stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the gaming state display 1183 is lit so as to light the presence or absence of probability variation in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S86, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing (step S88). In this normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned random number for normal symbol judgment is extracted and the gate information is stored in the gate information storage area of the main control RAM. Remember.

  The gate information storage area is provided with 0th to 3rd partitions (4 partitions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th partition, 1st partition, 2nd partition, and 3rd partition. It is like this. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. To do.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is set to the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is set to the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is set to the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of information storage is shifted to the second section of gate information storage, and the third section of gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage, The gate information of the two sections is respectively shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information is used so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on with the total number of the stored gate information as the reserved balls. The output of the lighting signal of the normal pattern storage display 1188 is set based on the above, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

  Subsequent to the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random number for normal symbol determination is extracted from this read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit determination value matches (called "ordinary lottery"). Whether or not the movable piece 2106 is opened / closed is determined based on the result of this determination (the result of the ordinary lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed with this determination, the pair of movable pieces 2106 are opened in the left-right direction, and the game ball can be received in the lower starting opening 2102, which is advantageous for the player. It becomes a game state. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above, and various commands classified as related to the universal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. While storing in the transmission information storage area described above, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display device 1189 is set to light the normal symbol display device 1189 in accordance with the determined variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol, and as described above as the output information. Stored in the output information storage area. Further, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol hit determination coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value prestored in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric-role effect shown in FIG. 29. Is generated and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2105 is set so as to open / close the movable piece 2106, and stored as the output information in the above-mentioned output information storage area. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted normal symbol per judgment random number does not match with the normal symbol per judgment value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, the normal symbol is based on the random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern described above. The variable display pattern is determined, various commands classified as related to the universal figure synchronization effect shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display device 1189 is set so as to light the normal symbol display device 1189 in accordance with the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and is stored as the output information storage described above as output information. Store in the area.

  Subsequent to step S88, the main control program performs a port output process (step S90). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 4100a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control program, for example, outputs a main payment ACK signal from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 4100a based on the output information when the various commands from the payment control board 4110 have been normally received. Or output a drive signal to an attacker solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2103 when in the big hit game state, or a drive signal to a starting opening solenoid 2105 that opens and closes the movable piece 2106. In addition to outputting, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output information, start Pay various information (game information) signals related to games such as oral winning information output signals And outputs to the control board 4110.

  Following step S90, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S92). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, this main control program reads the transmission information from the above-mentioned transmission information storage area and transmits this transmission information to the peripheral control board 4140 as main circumference serial data. This transmission information includes various commands created in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is the main routine shown in FIG. 29 and classified into special figure 1 tuning effect-related and special figure 2 tuning effect-related. Various commands classified into commands and big hits (for example, a big win based on a detection signal from a count switch 2110 (see FIG. 11) when a game ball entering a big winning hole 2103 (see FIG. 8) is detected) 30. Special winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to the mouth count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as general figure synchronization effect-related, various commands classified as ordinary electric figure combination effect, FIG. Various commands (door opening command, door frame closing command, body frame opening command, body frame closing command, etc.) that are classified into notification displays and status display Various commands (frame state 1 command, error reset navigation command and the frame state 2 command), various commands and various commands are classified into other are divided into test-related are stored. One packet of the main serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main serial data is a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and the sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 4110 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 4140 (production control unit Frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command) to () (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 31 received from the payout control substrate 4110 to the peripheral control substrate 4140 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG.

  On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 4110 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 4140 An error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command) is transmitted to (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 31 received from the payout control substrate 4110 to the peripheral control substrate 4140 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission processing, when the main control program receives the main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 4110 through the RXA terminal receiving port, the peripheral control board 4140 A body frame opening command (second body frame opening command) is transmitted to the (production control unit) (body frame command sending means, second body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 31 received from the payout control substrate 4110 to the peripheral control substrate 4140 as the body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 4110 through the RXA terminal receiving port, the peripheral control board 4140 ( A body frame closing command (second body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit (body frame command sending means, second body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 31 received from the payout control substrate 4110 to the peripheral control substrate 4140 as the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  In the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 4110 through the RXA terminal receiving port, the peripheral control board 4140 (production control) A door opening command (second door frame opening command) is transmitted to the (unit) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 31 received from the payout control substrate 4110 to the peripheral control substrate 4140 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 4110 by the reception port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 4140 (production control) A door closing command (second door closing command) to the (part) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 31 received from the payout control substrate 4110 to the peripheral control substrate 4140 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG.

  Following step S92, the main control program sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step S94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is set to be cleared.

  Following step S94, the main control program switches (returns) the register (step S96), and ends this routine. Here, when the main control timer interrupt processing, which is the present routine, is started, the main control MPU 4100a loads the contents of the general-purpose registers onto the stack by hardware and saves them. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose registers used in the main processing on the main control side from being destroyed. In step S96, the contents saved in the stack are read out and written in the original register. The main control MPU 4100a sets the interrupt permission after the return in step S96.

[13. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 4110 shown in FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 51. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on process of the payout control unit, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the process at the power-on of the payout control unit of FIG. 35, and FIG. 37 is a payout control unit following FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the power-on process, FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout control unit timer interrupt process, FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of a rotation angle switch history creating process, and FIG. 40 is a sprocket. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of a fixed position determination skip process, FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of a ball squinting determination process, and FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of a prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls. 43 is a flow chart showing an example of the award ball stock number addition process for ball rental, and FIG. 44 is an example of a stock monitoring process. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout ball tilting motion determination setting process, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout ball tilting motion setting process, and FIG. 47 is an example of the ball tilting motion setting process. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of retry operation monitoring processing, FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of mismatch counter reset determination processing, and FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of error canceling operation determination processing. FIG. 51 is a timing chart showing signal processing (A) during payout operation by ball lending and input signal confirmation processing (A) from the CR unit.

  First, the payout control unit power-on process will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt process, ball removal switch operation determination process, rotation angle switch history creation process, sprocket fixed position determination skip process, ball gaze determination process, award Ball award ball stock number addition processing, ball award ball stock number addition processing, stock monitoring processing, payout ball gaze movement determination setting processing, payout setting processing, ball gaze movement setting processing, retry movement monitoring processing, inconsistency The counter reset determination process and the error release operation determination process will be described. In addition, ball removal switch operation determination processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball gaze determination processing, prize ball award ball stock number addition processing, ball award ball stock number addition processing, stock The monitoring process, the pay-out-ball-hit action determination process, the retry action monitoring process, the inconsistency counter reset determination process, and the error release operation determination process are one of the main action setting processes of step S562 in the pay-out control unit power-on process described later. It is performed as processing, rotation angle switch history creation processing, sprocket fixed position determination skip processing, ball deviation determination processing, retry operation monitoring processing, inconsistency counter reset determination processing, error cancellation operation determination processing, number of prize balls for prize balls Addition processing, prize ball stock number addition processing for ball rental, stock monitoring processing, and payout ball movement judgment setting processing Priority in turn has been set.

[13-1. Discharge controller power-on process]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, in the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program is under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a, as shown in FIGS. Perform processing at the time of input. When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control program causes the payout control MPU 4120a to set the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of interrupts of the payout control MPU 4120a. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of the payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Subsequent to step S500, the payout control program performs input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU 4120a are set.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control program performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506) and determines whether or not a power failure advance notice signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or an instantaneous power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. A warning signal (payment blackout warning signal) is input. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from the time of power-on to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 of step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on the power failure notice signal (payout power failure notice signal) from the power failure monitor circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100.

  Following step S508, the payout control program determines whether or not the operation switch 860a is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a, and when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is HI, it is not an instruction to perform the RAM clear, and the operation switch is determined. While it is determined that the operation switch 860a is not operated, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is instructed, and the operation switch 860a is operated. judge.

  When the operation switch 860a is operated in step S512, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S514). That is, the payout control program can execute a RAM clear process for initializing a RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) built in the payout control MPU 4120a for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. (The operation control means at power-on of the payout control side). On the other hand, when the operation switch 860a is not operated in step S512, the payout control program sets a value 0 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control internal RAM (payout storage unit) of the payout control MPU 4120a, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, The prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the logic of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area It is a flag indicating whether or not the payout information relating to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information etc. in which the state is set is erased, and is set to a value 1 when the payout information is erased and a value 0 when the payout information is not erased. To be done. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, the payout control program sets to permit access to the payout control internal RAM (step S518). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read.

  Following step S518, the payout control program sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) being used, or the return address of this routine when exiting the subroutine and returning to this routine. It also indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, the stack pointer is set to the initial address, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are stacked on the stack from the initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the stack stacked last to the stack stacked first.

  Following step S520, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S522, that is, when the payout information is not erased, the payout control program calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum regards the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total thereof.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control program determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off process (power-off) to be described later. (Step S526). When they match, the payout control program determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout information, checkout value, and other payout backup information are stored and held in the payout control internal RAM in the payout control unit power-off process, which will be described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off process is normally completed, and is set to a value 0 when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally completed.

  When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S528, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is normally completed, the payout control program sets the work area of the payout control internal RAM as the time of power recovery. (Step S530). In this setting, the value 0 is set in the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, and the power recovery information is read from the ROM (hereinafter referred to as the “payout control built-in ROM”) built in the payout control MPU 4120a. This power recovery information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logical state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the sphere stock number PBS, the actual sphere count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, and the like, The information used for various processes is set based on the payout information related to the payout of the inconsistency counter reset determination time and the like stored in the time management information storage area. It should be noted that the term "power recovery" includes not only a state in which the power is turned off and a state in which the power is turned on, but also a state in which the power is subsequently restored from a power failure or an instantaneous power failure.

  On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S522, that is, when the payout information is deleted, or when the checksum values do not match in step S526, or step In S528, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally completed, the payout control program causes all areas of the payout control internal RAM to be processed. Clear (step S532). That is, the payout control program executes the payout control side RAM clearing process upon detection of the operation signal of the operation switch 860a (payout control side power-on operation control means). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Following step S532, the payout control program sets a work area of the payout control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control program performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control program sets interruption permission (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every 2 ms, ie, the interrupt period set in step S536.

  Following step S538, the payout control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared and set by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S539, the payout control program determines whether or not the power outage notice signal (payout power outage notice signal) is input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shut off, or when the power is interrupted or momentarily stopped, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, the power failure warning signal (payout power failure warning signal) is sent as the power failure warning to the main control board. It is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of 4100. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When no power failure notice signal is input in step S540, the payout control program determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S542). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process which is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. Is set.

  When the value of the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S540, and the payout control program determines whether or not the power failure notice signal (payment power failure notice signal) is input. To judge.

  On the other hand, when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has the value 1 in step S542, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, the payout control program sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to the value 0 (step S544).

  Following step S544, the payout control program sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B set after the value A set in step S539 is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S546, the payout control program performs a port output process (step S548). In this port output processing, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of various output ports of the payout control MPU 4120a based on this various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information and payout motor 744 indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 (the prize ball command and the self-check command shown in FIG. 28) are normally received. Various information such as drive information for performing drive control to the player, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display 860b are stored. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a based on the output information, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 4100, or a payout motor is issued. The driving signal is output to 744, and the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744 is the number of prize balls information. Or output to the external terminal board 784 (in the present embodiment, every time the payout motor 744 actually pays out 10 game balls, the prize terminal number information signal is output to the external terminal board 784). A display signal is output to the error LED indicator 860b.

  Subsequent to step S548, the payout control program performs a port input process (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU 4120a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control internal RAM. For example, the operation signal of the operation switch 860a, the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, the detection signal from the counting switch 751, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550, the BRQ signal from the CR unit 6, the BRDY signal and the CR connection signal, A main payment ACK signal from the main control board 4100 for notifying that the main control board 4100 has normally received various commands transmitted in a command transmission process described later is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

  Following step S550, the payout control program performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer updating process, when determining whether or not a ball-blown state due to a payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted is determined, the ball-blur determination is set as the determination condition. Time, skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, set when discharging the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731 shown in FIG. When the determination is made as to whether or not the game ball stored in the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. 1 is full, the full tank determination set as the determination condition As a determination condition when determining whether or not the number of balls of the game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is equal to or more than a predetermined number according to a detection signal from the time-out switch 750. In addition to performing time management such as fixed ball out determination time, the number of game balls that are received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body, and the number of balls actually detected by the counting switch 751 Inconsistency set as the determination condition when determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not paying out game balls that are not consistent due to inconsistency of Performs time management of the counter reset determination time. For example, when the ball-judging determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, so the ball-judging determination time is subtracted by 2 ms each time this timer update processing is performed, and the subtraction result When the value becomes 0, the ball-blurring judgment time is accurately measured.

  In the present embodiment, the skip determination time is set to 22.75 ms, the ball removal determination time is set to 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is set to 504 ms, the out-of-ball determination time is set to 119 ms, and the mismatch counter reset determination time is set to 7000 s (about 2 hours). Every time this timer update process is performed, the ball removal determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball outage determination time, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time are subtracted by 2 ms. The removal determination time, full tank determination time, out-of-ball determination time, and mismatch counter reset determination time are accurately measured. The various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as time management information.

  Following step S552, the payout control program performs a CR communication process (step S554). In this CR communication processing, it is determined whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) from the CR unit 6 are input based on the input information read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area. To judge. The payout control MPU 4120a exchanges various signals with the CR unit 6 based on various signals from the CR unit 6. In the processing of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in various information storage areas, as described above. Etc. (eg, prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information to be used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of PRDY signal output setting information in which the signal logic state is set.

  By this processing, for example, even after a momentary power failure or power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure. As a result, when the payout operation of the game balls by the prize ball device 740 is being executed, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation can be continued when the power is restored. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 without excess or deficiency. In other words, the payout control MPU 4120a, in the CR communication process, while exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6, while paying out the game ball to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, causes a momentary power failure or a power failure and CR. Even if the exchange of various signals with the unit 6 is interrupted and the payout of game balls cannot be continued, the number of prize balls stock PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery By restoring the values such as, etc. to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc., which are stored as the payout backup information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure. Exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU4120a) and the CR unit 6 immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure And it is possible to continue from the time of power restoration, so that it is possible to continue to payout of game balls.

  In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or stop at the time of power restoration, even if the power is stopped or stopped momentarily. The various signals from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 are not changed by the influence of the momentary power failure or stop. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) and the CR unit 6 can be improved.

  Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information as described above. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control RAM in step S530. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logical state of the PRDY signal that informs that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, for example, the PRDY signal is controlled to be paid out. It outputs to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of MPU4120a. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area, which is included in the payout backup information and is stored in the payout control built-in RAM, is included in the payout backup information, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process that is performed as one process of the main operation setting process. It is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH based on the above. When the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal operation. That is, it is determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value 1, and the payout ball deviation motion determination setting process is performed. In setting the output of the error state to the CR unit 6, for example, when not communicating with the CR unit 6, a ball rental The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for dispensing.

  As a result, in the CR communication process, the logical state of the PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a at the next timer interrupt from the power recovery. To the CR unit 6. Thus, for example, immediately before the momentary power failure, when the payout operation of the game balls by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state, the state is restored at the time of power restoration, so it is extremely possible after the power is restored. At an early stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out a rental ball is impossible can be output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and the CR unit 6 can be output. It is possible to notify that the payout operation of the game balls by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the useless ball rental request signal BRDY from being output from the CR unit 6 at an extremely early stage after power recovery.

  In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, a CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on this CR connection signal, when the logic is HI, that is, a pachinko game. When the machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are electrically connected to each other through the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869, to pay out the ball In order to convey that the payout operation is possible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the CR unit 6, while the logic is LOW, In other words, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 are the gaming ball lending device. When not electrically connected via the connection terminal plate 869, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to LOW in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the ball is impossible, and the payout control MPU 4120a has a predetermined state. It outputs to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the output port of. The logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information and stored in the payout control board 4110. A CR connection signal that indicates whether or not the CR unit 6 is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, the payout control program performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing (step S556). In the full tank and out-of-ball check processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 described above is stored based on the input information by the detection signal from the full tank switch 550. It is determined whether or not the game balls are full, or the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 described above is a predetermined number or more based on the detection signal from the ball break switch 750. Or not. For example, to determine whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with the game balls stored, the timer interruption period of 2 ms is used to determine whether the tank is full or the full ball switch is performed in this time. The detection signal from 550 is ON, and when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full tank and out-of-ball check processing, that is, the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is from ON to OFF. When the state transitions to, the clocking of the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above is started in the timer updating process of step S552. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update processing, that is, when the full tank determination time comes, whether the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check processing. Determine whether. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the gaming ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is full is stored as the status information storage described above. Store in the area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 550 is OFF, full tank information indicating that the game space in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is not full is stored in the state information storage area. .

  To determine whether or not the number of balls of the game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the timer interruption period of 2 ms is used to determine whether the balls are full or out of ball. When the detection signal from the ball break switch is ON, and when the detection signal from the ball break switch is OFF due to the previous full (2 ms before) and ball break check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball break switch 750 is turned ON from OFF. When the state transitions to, the time counting of the out-of-ball determination time (119 ms) described above is started in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the out-of-ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer updating process, that is, when the out-of-ball determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch 750 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process. Determine whether. In this determination, when the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch 750 is ON, the out-of-ball information indicating that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number is displayed. While the information is stored in the information storage area, when the detection signal from the out-of-ball switch 750 is OFF, it is considered that the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is not more than the predetermined number, and the out-of-ball notification is given. Information is stored in the status information storage area.

  Following step S556, the payout control program performs a command reception process (step S558). In this command receiving process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 (prize ball command and self-check command shown in FIG. 28) are received. When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the various commands cannot be received normally, the connection abnormality is transmitted to inform that the connection between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 4110 is abnormal (various command signals are abnormal). Information is stored in the above-mentioned state information storage area.

  Following step S558, the payout control program performs a command analysis process (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control internal RAM.

  Following step S560, the payout control program performs a main operation setting process (step S562). In this main action setting process, action settings such as prize balls, ball rental, ball removal, and ball scooping are performed, retry operations are determined, and the number of unpaid balls (number of prize balls stock) is monitored. To do.

  Subsequent to step S562, the payout control program performs an LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation processing, various kinds of information are read from the above-mentioned state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator 860b of the payout control board 4110 is created, and are stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as LED display information. Remember. For example, when the above-described ball-out information is read from the state information storage area, and based on this ball-out information, when the number of game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is not a predetermined number or more, corresponding display data (In the present embodiment, the display value 1 (the number "1") is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Following step S564, the payout control program performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various kinds of information are read out from the above-mentioned state information storage area, and various commands (door opening command, door frame closing command, main body frame opening) classified into the status display shown in FIG. A command, a frame closing command, a frame status 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command), an error cancel navigation command (corresponding to the first error canceling command) and a frame status 2 command are created and the main control board 4100 is created. Send to. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, based on this out-of-ball information, if the number of balls of the game balls taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740 is not equal to or more than the predetermined number, the frame state 1 command is issued. It is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100. Further, in this command transmission process, this payout control program, when there is a change in the frame state such as an error relating to the payout operation of the game ball, information relating to the location where the error occurred regarding this payout operation (hereinafter A frame state 1 command (first error release command) including "error occurrence position information" is generated (error occurrence command generating means). On the other hand, in the command transmission process, if the payout control program indicates that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value 1, that is, if the operation signal corresponding to the operation of the operation switch 860a is detected, the above-mentioned error occurs. A cancel navigation command (first error cancel command) is output (command sending means). Further, this payout control program transmits a main frame opening command (first main frame opening command) when the main frame opening detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619 is input (main frame command sending means, 1 body frame command sending means). (I) This payout control program transmits a body frame closing command (first body frame closing command) when the body frame closing detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619 is input (body frame command sending means). , First body frame command sending means). When the door frame opening detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 is input, this payout control program transmits a door frame opening command (first door frame opening command) (door frame command sending means, first door frame command sending means, first door frame opening command). 1 door frame command sending means). On the other hand, when the door frame closing detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 is input, this payout control program transmits a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) (door frame command sending means, first door frame command sending means). 1 door frame command sending means). In the command transmission process (step S566), the payout control program reads the error information including the error content from the state information storage area described above, and detects the machine number information for identifying itself from another pachinko machine and An error information signal based on the error information is output to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. Upon receipt of this error information signal, the hall computer provides the above-mentioned unit number information and the error information to the wireless device possessed by the hall store clerk, and the hall store clerk uses the unit number of the pachinko machine based on this unit number information. In, it is possible to recognize that the error content included in the error information has occurred.

  Following step S566, the payout control program sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is set to be cleared.

  After step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control program sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and checks in step S540 whether or not the power outage notice signal (payout power outage notice signal) is input. If there is no input of this power failure notice signal (payout power failure notice signal), it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, and this 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. If it is, that is, if 2 ms has elapsed, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG in step S544, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, and port output processing is performed in step S548. , Port input processing is performed in step S550, and in step S552 Immediate update processing is performed, CR communication processing is performed in step S554, fullness and out-of-ball check processing is performed in step S556, command reception processing is performed in step S558, command analysis processing is performed in step S560, and main processing is performed in step S562. The operation setting process is performed, the LED display data creation process is performed in step S564, the command transmission process is performed in step S566, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. .. The process of steps S539 to S568 is referred to as "payout control unit main process".

  The processing content of the payout control unit main processing varies depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 4100. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 4120a varies. Therefore, in the port output processing of step S548, the payout control MPU 4120a preferentially outputs to the main control board 4100 a payer ACK signal indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 have been normally received. There is. As a result, the payout control MPU 4120a secures the processing time so that the other processing that fluctuates can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal (payout power failure notice signal) is input in step S540, the interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S570). By this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-mentioned rewriting of payout information is protected.

  Following step S570, the payout control program stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 (step S574). Thereby, the payout of the game balls is stopped.

  Following step S574, the payout control program sets clearing of the watchdog timer (step S60). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S576, the payout control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). For this checksum, the payout information in the work area of the payout control internal RAM, excluding the storage areas for the checksum value and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG value calculated in step S524, is calculated as a numerical value, and the sum is calculated.

  Following step S578, the payout control program sets a value 1 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control program sets prohibition of access to the payout control internal RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

  Following step S582, the payout control program enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the payout control MPU 4120a is reset, and then the payout control program performs the payout control unit power-on process again under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. Note that the processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "processing at power-off of payout control unit".

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4120a) is reset when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, and the payout control unit power-on process is performed by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power-off process is normally ended. Are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information is stored due to an illegal act.

[13-2. Payment control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, in the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited as shown in FIG. 38 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. Registers are switched (saved) (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-mentioned payout control unit main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register will not be overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing of the payout controller from being destroyed.

  Following step S590, the payout control program sets the value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). The 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms. Each is set.

  Subsequent to step S592, the payout control program switches (returns) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the main processing of the payout controller, the value of the auxiliary register will not be overwritten. This prevents the destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S594, the payout control program sets interruption permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[13-3. Rotation angle switch history creation process]
Next, the rotation angle switch history creation process will be described. In this rotation angle switch history creation processing, a history of detection signals from the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 12 is created.

  When the rotation angle switch history creation process is started, in the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program is controlled by the payout control internal RAM as shown in FIG. 39 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S610). This rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). It has a storage capacity, and the history of the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 is stored in the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the payout control RAM as rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST. In step S610, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area.

  Following step S610, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 (step S612). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on process of the payout control unit (main process of payout control unit) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S612, the input information is read from this input information storage area and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752. When the input information includes a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752, the payout control program determines that the detection slit for grasping the rotation position of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted is the light of the rotation angle switch 752. It is determined that the axis has transitioned from the blocked state to the non-blocked state. On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 in the input information, the payout control program determines that the detection slit has transitioned the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state.

  When the detection slit is in the state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is transited from the blocking state to the non-blocking state in step S612, the payout control program performs a shift process of the rotation angle switch detection history information (step S614). In this shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610 is used as the most significant bits B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2. , B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7.

  Following step S614, the payout control program sets the value 1 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S616), and ends this routine.

  On the other hand, when the detection slit is in the state where the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is transited from the non-blocking state to the blocking state in step S612, the payout control program shifts the rotation angle switch detection history information (step S618). . In the shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information, the payout control program performs the same processing as the shift processing of the rotation angle switch detection history information in step S614, and the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S610. The most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7. Shift 1 bit at a time.

  Following step S618, the payout control program sets the value 0 to the least significant bit B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST (step S620), and ends this routine.

  Thus, every time the rotation angle switch history creation process is performed, the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is shifted by one bit from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7, and then the detection slit is rotated. The least significant bit B0 has a value of 1 or depending on the state in which the optical axis of the angle switch 752 transits from the blocking state to the non-blocking state or the detection slit transits the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. Since the value 0 is set, the history of the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 can be created.

[13-4. Sprocket fixed position determination skip processing]
Next, the sprocket fixed position determination skip processing will be described. This sprocket fixed position determination skip processing skips the determination of whether or not the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted is in a fixed position when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Note that the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is also performed when the payout of the game balls by the prize ball device 740 is completed. As a result, the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 can be reliably started in the state where no ball is generated.

  When the sprocket fixed position determination skip processing is started, in the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program is under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a, as shown in FIG. 40, the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-. It is determined whether FLG is 0 (step S630). The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to perform the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body, and when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed (when skipping), the payout rotation is 1. The value is set to 0 when the body position determination is performed (when skipping is not performed).

  In step S630, when the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG has a value of 0 (when not skipped), that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, the payout control program causes the rotation angle switch history information of the payout control built-in RAM. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the storage area (step S632), and it is determined whether or not it matches the fixed position determination value (step S634). This fixed position determination value is stored in the pay-out built-in ROM, and is "000011111B (" B "represents a bit." "In the present embodiment, and B7 to B4 of the upper 4 bits have the value 0 and the lower 4. Bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination of step S634, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

  Here, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST have the value 1, the above-mentioned detection slit is the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 continuously in four timer interrupt cycles. Means that the state has been changed from the cutoff state to the non-blocking state. When the timer interrupt cycle is generated four times, the payout motor 744 shown in FIG. 12 is rotated by four steps. The rotation of the payout motor 744 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. Since the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear have play (backlash), the payout rotating body rotates clockwise or counterclockwise, but the backlash causes the payout rotating body to rotate. Since the rotation is designed to be equivalent to the rotation of the payout motor 744 in about two steps, in the present embodiment, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is performed, the rotation angle switch 752 is operated. History of the detection signal, rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is created by the rotation angle switch history creation processing shown in FIG. 39, and lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the created rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST, that is, This is performed based on the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 generated by the latest four timer interrupt cycles. As a result, in the four timer interrupt cycles, the payout motor 744 is rotated by four steps, so that it is rotating more than the rotation of the payout rotor due to backlash, and the rotation of the payout rotor due to backlash is absorbed. You can Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the fixed position of the payout rotating body due to backlash, so that the rotational position of the payout rotating body can be correctly managed by the rotational position of the payout motor 744. In the present embodiment, the four timer interrupt cycles are 8 ms (= 2 ms × 4 times), which is set as the backlash absorption time.

  In step S634, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S632 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program is The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S636). Accordingly, it is possible to set not to perform (skip) the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body. The payout control MPU 4120a sets the rotational position of the payout rotating body in step S636 to the fixed position of the payout rotating body.

  Following step S636, the payout control program sets the skip determination time to valid (step S638), and ends this routine. Here, the number of detection slits is three, which is the same number as the concave portions of the payout rotating body, and is formed at equal intervals (every 120 degrees) on the outer periphery of the rotation detection plate. Further, as described above, the rotation of the payout motor 744 is the rotation of the payout rotating body of the rotation detection board via the first gear, the second gear, and the third gear. In the present embodiment, the rotation between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board (dispensing rotor) is designed to correspond to the rotation of the dispensing motor 744 in 18 steps.

  The payout control program manages the rotational position of the payout rotating body based on the number of steps of the payout motor 744 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. Specifically, (1) the transition state (referred to as "edge detection state") in which the detection slit transitions the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the blocking state to the non-blocking state, and (2) the detection slit rotates angle. A state in which the optical axis of the switch 752 is transited from the blocking state to the non-blocking state (referred to as “fixed position confirmation state”), and (3) the detection slit transits the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. The state is managed in three states, that is, a state (“fixed position determination skip state”). The edge detection state of (1) corresponds to one step rotation of the payout motor 744, the fixed position determination state of (2) corresponds to four rotations of the payout motor 744, and the fixed position determination skip state of (3). Corresponds to the rotation of the payout motor 744 in 13 steps, and the rotation position between the detection slits (120 degrees) of the rotation detection board, that is, the rotation position of the payout rotating body is managed by a total of 18 steps of rotation.

  In the fixed position determination skip state of (3), since the detection slit is a state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 is transited from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, the skip determination time is the time for rotating the payout motor 744 by 13 steps. Is set. As described above, since the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, the skip determination time is 26 ms (= 2 ms × 13 steps).

  When the skip determination time becomes valid in step S638, the skip determination time is subtracted in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Note that the payout control MPU 4120a subtracts the skip determination time, and when the subtraction result becomes a value 0, sets the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG to an initial value 0.

  On the other hand, when the fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S630 (when skipped), that is, when the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed, or in step S634, step S632. When the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step 3 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value do not match, the payout control program directly ends this routine. . The fixed position determination skip flag SKP-FLG set in step S636 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  The game balls supplied from the pachinko island facility are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail 731, taken into the supply passage of the prize ball device 740, and guided to the prize ball device 740. When the game balls are rubbed against each other and charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise. Therefore, the prize ball device 740 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment. A rotation angle switch substrate 753 of the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 3 is provided with a rotation angle switch 752, and a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball. Cheap. Further, the wiring (harness) connecting between the payout control board 4110 and the prize ball case inside board 754 in the prize ball device 740 shown in FIG. 3 is also affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game balls. Cheap.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise, the fixed position determination skip state (3) described above, that is, the detection slit changes the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 from the non-blocking state to the blocking state. In the transitioned state, the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body is not performed. This improves the accuracy of the fixed position determination of the payout rotating body. The cycle and period required to detect the fixed position of the payout rotating body can be calculated in advance as described above, so that the skip determination time can be easily set and adjusted.

[13-5. Ball Judgment Processing]
Next, the ball gaze determination processing will be described. In the ball-blurring determination process, it is determined whether or not the ball-blurred state due to the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted is generated.

  When the ball head determination processing is started, the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 causes the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM to rotate from the rotation angle, as shown in FIG. The switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read (step S640).

  Following step S640, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the above-described rotation angle switch 752 (step S642). This determination determines whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 matches the fixed position determination value. This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, as described above, and is “000011111B (“ B ”represents a bit.”) ”In the present embodiment, and the upper four bits B7 to B4. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination of step S642, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

  In step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program is The detection slit is in a state in which the optical axis of the rotation angle switch 752 has transited from the non-blocking state to the blocking state, that is, the payout rotating body is rotating, and it is assumed that the ball-bulging state has not occurred, and this routine is finished as it is. To do.

  On the other hand, in step S642, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S640 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the ball is seen. The value 1 is set to the medium flag PBE-FLG (step S644). The in-bulb flag PBE-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not a bulging state due to the payout rotating body has occurred. When the payout motor 744 is performing a bulging motion, the value is 1, The value is set to 0 when no operation is performed.

  Following step S644, the payout control program sets the ball entrainment determination time to valid (step S646), and ends this routine. When the ball gaze determination time becomes valid, the ball gaze determination time is subtracted in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. ..

[13-6. Various prize ball stock number addition processing]
Next, the process of adding the various prize ball stock numbers will be described. The various prize ball stock number addition processing includes a prize ball stock number addition processing and a ball rental prize ball stock number addition processing. The prize ball stock number addition processing is performed from the main control board 4100. This is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a prize ball command, which will be described later, and the process of adding the number of prize ball stock for ball rental is a process of adding the number of balls to be paid out based on a ball rental request signal from the CR unit 6. is there. First, the award ball stock number addition process for prize balls will be described, and then the award ball stock number addition process for ball rental will be described. In the present embodiment, the award ball stock number addition process for award balls is set to be preferentially performed, and the award ball stock number addition process according to the award ball stock number addition process for award balls is performed according to the award ball stock number addition process. After the game balls are paid out by the prize ball device 740, it is set to perform the prize ball stock number addition process for ball rental.

[13-6-1. Prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls]
When the prize ball stock number addition process for prize balls is started, in the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program is controlled by the payout control MPU 4120a, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether there is any (step S650). This determination is performed based on the command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S560 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the analyzed command is stored in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as received command information. In step S650, the payout control program reads the received command information from the received command information storage area and determines whether the command is a prize ball command.

  When the received command information is not the prize ball command in step S650, the payout control program ends this routine as it is, while when the received command information is the prize ball command in step S650, the payout control program changes to this prize ball command. The corresponding prize ball number PBV is read from the prize ball number information table (step S652). The award ball number information table, which will be described in detail later, is an information table stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM in association with the award ball command and the award ball number PBV.

  Following step S652, the payout control program reads out the prize ball stock number PBS from the payout control internal RAM (step S654). The prize ball stock number PBS represents the number of game balls not yet paid out by the prize ball device 740, that is, the number of unpaid balls, and has a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits) in the present embodiment. ing. As a result, the award ball stock number PBS can store the number of unpaid balls from the value 0 to the value 32767. The prize ball stock number PBS is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S652, the prize ball stock number PBS is read from the prize ball information storage area.

  The payout control program adds the prize ball number PBV read in step S652 to the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S654 (step S656), and ends this routine. Note that the prize ball command read out in step S650 after addition in step S656 is deleted from the received command information storage area.

[13-6-2. Addition process for the number of prize balls for ball rental]
Next, the award ball stock number addition processing for renting a ball will be described. When the award ball stock number addition process for ball rental is started, in the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program is under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a signal (step S660). This determination is performed based on the ball rental request signal from the CR unit 6 in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball rental request signal is stored in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as input information. In step S660, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a ball rental request signal.

  When there is no ball-renting request signal in step S660, the payout control program terminates this routine as it is, while when there is a ball-renting request signal in step S660, the payout control program determines the prize ball information in the above-mentioned payout control RAM. The award ball stock number PBS is read from the storage area (step S662), the award ball number RBV is added to the award ball stock number PBS (step S664), and this routine is ended. The number of rented balls RBV is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In the present embodiment, the value 25 is set as the number of lent balls RBV. After the addition in step S664, the payout control program erases the ball rental request signal read in step S660 from the input information storage area. Further, in the present embodiment, since the prize balls are prioritized (the prize balls and the ball rental are separately managed), the ball rental request signal is held even when there is a ball rental request signal. The payout of balls will be made upon completion of the payout of prize balls. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the payout of balls is performed after the prize ball stock number PBS becomes 0.

[13-7. Stock monitoring process]
Next, the stock monitoring process will be described. In this stock monitoring process, it is monitored whether the player is continuing the game during the game in a state where the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 shown in FIG. It is a process to do.

  When the stock monitoring process is started, in the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program is under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a, as shown in FIG. The prize ball stock number PBS is read from the storage area (step S670), and it is determined whether the read prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or greater than the caution threshold TH (step S672). The cautionary threshold value TH is a fixed value and is stored in advance in the payout built-in ROM. In this embodiment, the value 50 is set as the cautionary threshold value TH.

  When the prize ball stock number PBS is equal to or greater than the caution threshold TH in step S672, the payout control program sets the caution flag CA-FLG to a value of 1 (step S674), and ends this routine. This caution flag CA-FLG indicates that the player has started stocking game balls in the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540, and the number of unpaid game balls (the above-mentioned number of prize balls stock) is equal to or greater than the caution threshold TH. It is a flag indicating that it has been reached, and is set to a value of 1 when it has reached the caution threshold TH or higher, and to a value of 0 when it has not reached the caution threshold TH or higher.

  On the other hand, when the prize ball stock number PBS is less than the caution threshold value TH in step S672, the payout control program sets the caution flag CA-FLG to the value 0 (step S676), and ends this routine.

  When the game state becomes a big hit and the player relaxes and pays attention to the effect unfolded on the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 shown in FIG. 14, the player is inadvertent. The game ball paid out as the prize ball during one round may not be pulled out by operating the lower plate ball removal button 354 from the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. 7. When the game is continued in this state, the lower plate 302 is filled with the game balls, and the game balls are collected in the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540. When the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with game balls, as described above, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS increases and becomes equal to or higher than the caution threshold value TH, which is provided on the door frame 5 as a caution effect. Multiple LEDs on various decorative boards blink. By this blinking, it is possible to inform the clerk of the hall that the player is paying attention to the game. As a result, the clerk of the hall can inform the player that the game ball will be removed from the lower plate 302, and the player can fill the lower plate 302 (the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540) with the game ball. It is possible to prevent the game from continuing.

  In the present embodiment, the cautionary threshold value TH is set to a value 50 corresponding to about one fifth of the upper limit value 255 that can be represented by 1 byte (8 bits). As a result, it is possible to notify the clerk of the hall that the player should pay attention to the game as early as possible.

[13-8. Dispensing Ball Gaze Movement Judgment Setting Process]
Next, the payout ball tilting motion determination setting process will be described. This payout ball gaze operation determination setting processing is to pay out the game ball with the payout motor 744 to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. It is a process to set whether to discharge or not to discharge.

  When the pay-out-ball tilt motion determination setting process is started, in the pay-out control unit 4120 of the pay-out control board 4110, the pay-out control program is under the control of the pay-out control MPU 4120a, as shown in FIG. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the RAM (step S680).

  Following step S680, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 752 shown in FIG. 12 (step S682). This determination determines whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 matches the fixed position determination value. This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, as described above, and is “000011111B (“ B ”represents a bit.”) ”In the present embodiment, and the upper four bits B7 to B4. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination of step S682, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

  In step S682, the payout control program, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, It is determined whether the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 (step S684). The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a retry operation described later is abnormally operating. The value is 1 when the retry operation is abnormally operating, and the retry operation is not abnormally operating (retry operation). The value is set to 0 when the operation is operating normally.

  In step S682, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S680 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, or in step S684. , When the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is not 1 (value 0), that is, when the retry operation is not abnormal, the payout control program determines whether or not the in-ball flag PBE-FLG has the value 1. It is determined whether or not (step S686). The in-bulb flag PBE-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not a bulging state due to the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted is generated, and the payout motor 744 causes the bulging in the ball. The value is set to 1 when the motion is performed, and the value is set to 0 when the ball is not tilted.

  In step S686, when the in-bulb flag PEB-FLG is not 1 (value is 0), that is, when the inclining movement is not performed, the payout control program stores the prize ball information in the payout control RAM described above. The prize ball stock number PBS is read from the area (step S688), and it is determined whether or not the read prize ball stock number PBS is larger than 0 (step S690). In this determination, it is determined whether or not there are unpaid balls in the payout of game balls by the payout motor 744.

  When the prize ball stock number PBS is larger than the value 0 in step S690, that is, when there is an unpaid ball number, the payout control program determines whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is full of game balls. It is determined (step S692). This determination is performed based on the full tank information stored in the full tank and out-of-ball check processing of step S556 in the power-on processing of the payout control unit (main processing of the payout control unit) illustrated in FIG. 37. Specifically, the full tank information is stored in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S692, full tank information is read from this state information storage area, and it is determined whether the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is full of game balls stored.

  When the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is not full in the stored game balls in step S692, the payout control program performs a payout setting process described later (step S694), and this routine ends. In this payout setting process, a payout operation for paying out game balls to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 is performed.

  On the other hand, when the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is full in the stored game balls in step S692, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 540 is filled with the stored game balls, the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped. When prize balls are generated while the payout motor 744 is forcibly stopped, the number of unpaid balls by the payout motor 744 increases, and the prize ball stock number PBS is added by the prize ball stock number addition processing for prize balls shown in FIG. Will increase.

  On the other hand, in step S690, when the prize ball stock number PBS is not larger than the value 0 (the value is 0), that is, when there is no unpaid number of balls, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. As a result, the game balls are not paid out.

  On the other hand, in step S686, when the flag PBE-FLG is in the ball tilting state, that is, when the ball tilting motion is performed, the payout control program performs a ball tilting motion setting process described later (step S700), and this routine To finish. In the ball-bending operation setting process, a ball-bending operation for eliminating the ball-bending state by the payout rotating body of the prize ball device 740 is performed.

  On the other hand, in step S684, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has the value 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operated, the payout control program sets the output stop (stop) of the drive signal to the payout motor 744. (Step S702). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control RAM.

  Subsequent to step S702, the payout control program sets the output of the error state to the CR unit 6 (step S704), and ends this routine. In step S704, when the payout control program is not communicating with the CR unit 6 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a in order to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible (CR unit 6). When the logic of BRDY from is LOW, that is, when it is held after falling, the logic of the PRDY signal is held LOW, that is, the lowered state is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information. Then, it is stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thereby, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. The PRDY signal output setting information read out from the lever, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is CR from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Output to unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when rising and held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set as the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thereby, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal in which the logic is maintained, is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869. .. Note that “maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal” means that when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained, and the logic of the EXS signal is HI. At some time (the EXS signal is held rising), that logic HI is maintained.

[13-8-1. Payment setting process]
Next, the payout setting process will be described. In this payout setting process, the payout motor 744 is driven to set the payout of game balls.

  When the payout setting process is started, in the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program sets the drive command number DRV from the payout control internal RAM as shown in FIG. 46 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. Read out (step S710). The drive command number DRV commands the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744, and has the same value as the prize ball stock number PBS. The drive command number DRV is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S710, the drive command number DRV is read from the prize ball information storage area.

  Following step S710, the payout control program determines whether the drive command number DRV is 0 (step S712). This determination is made based on the drive command number DRV as to whether or not the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744 remains.

  When the drive command number DRV is 0 in step S712, that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out by the payout motor 744 is zero, the payout control program stops the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 (stop). ) Is set (step S714). With this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control RAM.

  Following step S714, the payout control program reads the prize ball stock number PBS from the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM (step S716), and reads the actual ball count PB (step S718). The actual ball count PB is a count of the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 744. This count will be described later in detail, but in the port input process of step S550 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control main process) shown in FIG. 37, the count from the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. Based on the detection signal. The actual ball count PB is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S718, the actual sphere count PB is read from the prize sphere information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S718, the payout control program sets a value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB read in step S718 from the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 to the prize ball stock number PBS and the drive command number DRV. (Step S720), the value 0 is set to the actual ball count PB (step S722), and this routine is ended. When the drive command number DRV and the actual ball count PB are 0, the value of the prize ball stock number PBS read in step S716 is directly set to the drive command number DRV in step S722.

  On the other hand, when the drive command number DRV is not 0 in step S712, that is, when the payout motor 744 has the number of game balls to be paid out, the payout control program sets the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 744. (Step S724). With this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control RAM.

  Following step S724, the payout control program subtracts 1 from the drive command number DRV (decrements, step S726), and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 (step S728). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on process of the payout control unit (main process of payout control unit) shown in FIG. Specifically, the detection signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S728, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751.

  When there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S728, the payout control program adds the value 1 to the actual ball count PB (increments, step S730), and ends this routine. By incrementing the actual ball count PB in step S730, the actual ball count PB is incremented.

  On the other hand, when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S728, the payout control program directly ends this routine. As described above, the payout control program is a case where the drive command number DRV is decremented in step S726 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a, and when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the determination in step S728, that is, the actual value. When the ball count PB is not incremented, one game ball cannot be paid out because the game ball was not received in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted. to decide. Therefore, the payout control program sets a value obtained by subtracting the actual ball count PB from the prize ball stock number PBS to the drive command number DRV in step S720 described above in order to pay out the one ball to be paid out again. As a result, when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the determination of step S728, that is, when the actual ball count PB is not incremented, the value 1 which is one ball to be paid out can be included in the prize ball stock number PBS. In other words, in other words, the value 1 which is the one ball to be paid out can be rounded into the prize ball stock number PBS, so that the retry operation for paying out the one ball to be paid out again can be performed. By performing this retry operation, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is not yet paid out to the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the unpaid game ball.

[13-8-2. Sphere movement setting process]
Next, the ball-bending motion setting process will be described. The ball-bending operation setting process is a process of setting to eliminate the ball-bending state by the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 is transmitted.

  When the ball gaze operation setting process is started, in the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program causes the ball gaze judgment time to elapse as shown in FIG. 47 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. It is determined whether or not (step S750). This determination is performed on the basis of the ball-bending determination time subtracted in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the ball gaze determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S750, the time management information is read from this time management information storage area and it is determined whether or not the ball-bending determination time has elapsed.

  When the ball deflection determination time has not elapsed in step S750, the payout control program reads the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST from the rotation angle switch history information storage area of the above-described payout control built-in RAM (step S752). ..

  Following step S752, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the above-described rotation angle switch 752 (step S754). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 matches the fixed position determination value. This fixed position determination value is stored in the payout built-in ROM, as described above, and is “000011111B (“ B ”represents a bit.”) ”In the present embodiment, and the upper four bits B7 to B4. The value 0 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 are the value 1. In the determination of step S754, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

  In step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program is The output of the drive signal to the dispensing motor 744 is set so as to perform the ball-bending operation (step S756), and this routine ends. With this setting, drive information for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 744 is set and stored in the output information storage area of the above-described payout control RAM.

  On the other hand, in step S754, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S752 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value, the payout control program Sets the stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 (step S758). With this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control RAM.

  Subsequent to step S758, the payout control program sets a value 0 to the in-ball entrainment flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball entangling operation (step S760), and ends this routine. The in-bulb flag PBE-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not a bulging state due to the payout rotating body has occurred. When the payout motor 744 is performing a bulging motion, the value is 1, When no motion is performed (end of the ball-bending motion), the value is set to 0.

  On the other hand, when the ball entrainment determination time has elapsed in step S750, the payout control program sets stop of the drive signal to the payout motor 744 (step S762). In this setting, drive information for stopping the drive signal is set in the payout motor 744 and stored in the output information storage area of the payout control RAM.

  Following step S762, the payout control program sets the output of the error state to the CR unit 6 (step S764). Here, in order to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is not possible, the payout control MPU 4120a is not communicating with the CR unit 6 (the BRDY logic from the CR unit 6 is LOW, that is, (When falling and held), the logic of the PRDY signal is LOW, that is, the lowered state is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. To do. Thereby, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. The PRDY signal output setting information read out from the lever, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is CR from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Output to unit 6. On the other hand, when communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when rising and held), the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained. Is set as the EXS signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thereby, the EXS signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. The read EXS signal output setting information, that is, the EXS signal in which the logic is maintained, is output to the CR unit 6 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869. .. Note that "maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal" means that, as described above, when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (when the EXS signal falls and is held), the logic LOW is maintained, and the EXS signal is maintained. Is HI (the EXS signal is rising and held), that logic HI is maintained.

  Subsequent to step S764, the payout control program sets a value 0 to the in-ball entrainment flag PBE-FLG as the end of the ball entangling operation (step S766), and ends this routine.

[13-9. Retry operation monitoring process]
Next, the retry operation monitoring process will be described. In this retry operation monitoring process, it is a process of monitoring whether or not the retry operation for paying out the game ball to be paid out again is normally performed.

  When the retry operation monitoring process is started, in the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program, under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a, as shown in FIG. The rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST is read from the switch history information storage area (step S770).

  Subsequent to step S770, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the above-described rotation angle switch 752 (step S772). This determination determines whether or not the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 matches the fixed position determination value. As described above, the fixed position determination value is stored in the payout control built-in ROM, and is "000011111B (" B "represents a bit.") "In the present embodiment, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. Has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination of step S772, it is determined whether the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match.

  In step S772, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value match, the payout control program, The value 1 is added to the inconsistency counter INCC (increment, step S774). This inconsistency counter INCC, the number of balls of the game ball which is received in the concave portion of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751, Is a counter for calculating the difference, and usually, the number of balls of the game ball received and paid out in the recess of the payout rotating body and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 match. , The value becomes 0. Since the payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout setting process shown in FIG. 46, by this retry operation, the number of game balls received by the recess of the payout rotating body and paid out, and an actual counting switch. The number of balls detected in 751 and the payout of game balls that do not match each other due to a mismatch with each other are determined by monitoring with the inconsistency counter INCC. The inconsistency counter INCC is stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. In step S774, the payout control program increments the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S774 or in step S772, the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the rotation angle switch detection history information RSW-HIST read in step S770 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the fixed position determination value. Sometimes, the payout control program determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 (step S776). This determination is performed based on the detection signal from the counting switch 751 in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on process of the payout control unit (main process of payout control unit) shown in FIG. Specifically, as described above, the detection signal is stored as the input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S776, the payout control program reads the input information from the input information storage area and determines whether or not there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751.

  When there is a detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S776, the payout control program subtracts 1 from the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM (decrement, step S778). ..

  Following step S778 or when there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751 in step S776, the payout control program determines whether or not the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH (step S780). ). In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one unsuccessful gaming ball will be paid out by the retry operation is about one in several millions. In the present embodiment, the mismatch threshold value is obtained. The value 5 is set as INCTH.

  As described above, in the process of setting the work area of the payout control internal RAM in step S530 of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 37, the payout backup information is stored in the payout control internal RAM when the power is restored. The information used for the retry operation monitoring process is set based on the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area. By this processing, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery is restored to the value of the inconsistency counter INCC or the like immediately before the power failure or power failure stored as payout backup information. You can do it. As a result, in the determination of step S780, it is possible to continue monitoring the payout operation (retry operation) of the game balls by the prize ball device 740, which has been performed until immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure, from the time of the power recovery. ing. Therefore, for example, immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure, if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in the determination of step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is normally performed, that is, the prize ball. It is possible to determine that the payout operation of the game balls by the device 740 is in a normal state, and even when the power is restored, it is possible to determine that the payout operation of the game balls by the prize ball device 740 is in a normal state by the determination in step S780. On the other hand, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in the determination of step S780, it is determined that the retry operation is abnormal, that is, the game ball payout operation by the prize ball device 740 is abnormal. Even when the power is restored, it can be determined in step S780 that the payout operation of the game balls by the prize ball device 740 is in an abnormal state.

  When the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH in step S780, this routine is finished as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is greater than or equal to the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the payout control program displays the "retry error". In order to inform that it is, the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM is set by setting retry error information for displaying the number “5” on the error LED display 860b which is a segment display mounted on the payout control board 4110. Is set (stored) in the state information storage area (step S782). On the other hand, when notifying that the prize ball is being stocked, the payout control program sets the prize ball stock information in which the number "9" is displayed on the error LED display 860b and incorporates the payout control described above. It is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the RAM (step S782).

  Following step S782, the payout control program sets the value 0 (initial value 0) to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM (step S784). In step S784, the mismatch counter INCC determines that the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the mismatch counter INCC is greater than or equal to the mismatch threshold INCTH. Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this internal factor. The inconsistency counter INCC is initialized when the operation switch 860a is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, in response to the occurrence of this external factor. When the operation switch 860a is operated when the power is turned on, as described above, the operation signal corresponding to the operation is input to the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 11 as a RAM clear signal. Under the control of the main control MPU 4100a, the above-mentioned main control program erases all the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as described above, and issues the RAM clear notification command to the peripheral control board shown in FIG. Output to 4140. As a result, the RAM clear notification sound is made to flow from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 shown in FIG.

  Following step S784, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 1 (step S786), and this routine ends. The retry error flag RTERR-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormally operating. The value is 1 when the retry operation is abnormally operating, and the retry operation is not abnormally operating (retry operation is When operating normally, the value is set to 0 respectively.

  The payout control program shows the retry error information (or prize ball stock information) set (stored) in the output information storage area of the payout control internal RAM in step S782 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a, as shown in FIG. In the power-on process of the payout control unit (main process of payout control unit), a retry error status command is created in the command sending process of step S566 and sent to the main control board 4100, and LED display data is created in step S564 in the same process. In the processing, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 860b is created and stored as LED display information in the output information storage area, and the LED display information stored in the output information storage area is stored in the output information storage area in step S548 of the same processing. The drive signal is output to the error LED display 860b based on To display the number "5" on the error LED display device 860b. In the main control board 4100 that has received the status command, the main control program transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. The peripheral control board 4140 causes the door frame side lighting blink command to output a lighting signal, which causes a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 5 to emit light in a predetermined color (red in this embodiment). It outputs to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in (4) to cause the plurality of LEDs to emit light in a predetermined color. As described above, the clerk or the like in the hall who notices the light emission of the plurality of LEDs opens the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 to display the number "" on the error LED indicator 860b mounted on the payout control board 4110. By visually observing that "5" is displayed, it can be confirmed that a "retry error" has occurred. Thereby, the clerk or the like in the hall, in order to investigate the cause of the occurrence, confirms the malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, and the like. As compared with the case where the light emission of the plurality of LEDs and the display content of the error LED indicator 860b are not notified, the operation can be performed extremely quickly.

  Further, by intentionally deactivating the counting switch 751, it is difficult to detect the game ball that is paid out by being received in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted, and is described above. Even if an illegal act of forcibly generating a retry operation and illegally acquiring a game ball paid out by this retry operation is performed, the value of the above-described inconsistency counter INCC becomes equal to or more than the inconsistency threshold INCTH. Since a plurality of LEDs on various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 emit light, a clerk in the hall or the like will come to check the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Then, the player who engages in the cheating is forced to interrupt the act so that the act is not discovered, and the player cannot continuously obtain the fraudulent gaming ball due to the cheating. Even if the value of the inconsistency counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player performing the cheating is the same as the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, that is, 5 balls. Therefore, the damage to the hole due to the act of intentionally deactivating the counting switch 751 can be suppressed to be extremely small.

  Furthermore, as described above, the inconsistency counter INCC determines that the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not smaller than the inconsistency threshold INCTH in step S780, that is, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is greater than or equal to the inconsistency threshold INCTH. Initialization is triggered by the occurrence of the internal factor of becoming. As a result, the inconsistency counter INCC is not initialized, for example, when an external factor such as operating the operation switch 860a to cancel the error occurs. Therefore, even if the operation switch 860a or the like is tampered with and the operation signal is input to the payout control MPU 4120a, the inconsistency counter INCC may be forcibly initialized by such an illicit act. Absent.

[13-10. Mismatch counter reset judgment processing]
Next, the mismatch counter reset process will be described. In this inconsistency counter reset processing, the number of balls of the game sphere which is received by the concave portion of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted, and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751. Is a process of determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC that calculates the difference between the.

  When the inconsistency counter reset determination process is started, in the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program is controlled by the payout control MPU 4120a, as shown in FIG. It is determined whether the time has passed (step S790). This determination is performed based on the inconsistency counter reset determination time updated in the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the inconsistency counter reset determination time is stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S790, the time management information is read from the time management information storage area and it is determined whether or not the mismatch counter reset determination time has elapsed.

  If the mismatch counter reset determination time has not elapsed in step S790, the payout control program ends this routine as it is. On the other hand, when the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed in step S790, the payout control program initializes the inconsistency counter reset determination time (step S792). By this initialization, the initial value 7000s (about 2 hours) is set as the mismatch counter reset determination time.

  Subsequent to step S792, the payout control program sets a value 0 (initial value 0) to the inconsistency counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control internal RAM described above (step S794), and this routine To finish. As described above, the inconsistency counter INCC is detected by the counting switch 751 and the number of game balls that are paid out by being received in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted. It is a counter for calculating the difference between the number of balls and the number of balls of the game ball that is received and paid out by the concave portion of the payout rotating body, and the number of balls detected by the counting switch 751 is usually one. As a result, the value becomes 0. The payout control program performs a retry operation in the payout setting process shown in FIG. 46 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a. Therefore, by this retry operation, the ball of the game ball received in the concave portion of the payout rotating body and paid out. The number of balls actually detected by the counting switch 751 and the number of balls actually detected by the counting switch 751 do not match each other, and the payout of game balls that are inconsistent is monitored by the inconsistency counter INCC to determine whether or not the payout is repeated. With the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present invention, it has been experimentally obtained that the probability that one unsatisfied gaming ball due to a retry operation will be paid out is about several millions.

  Here, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the gaming board 4 and the frame body such as the main body frame 3 to which the gaming board 4 is mounted. By exchanging the gaming board 4 (replacement of a new machine). Since the game specification can be changed, the payout control board 4110 for controlling the prize ball device 740, the power supply board 851 for generating the driving power supply for the prize ball device 740 and the control power supply for the payout control board 4110 are common. It is equipped on the frame side as a function. In the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program, under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a, monitors the inconsistency counter INCC to determine whether or not the retry operation is repeated. The operation can be determined, and in the payout control unit power-off process in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the process of step S530 in the power-on process of the payout control unit shown at 36 (setting at the time of power recovery of the RAM work area), the process is restarted from the stored inconsistency counter INCC when the power is turned on.

  Then, when the power is cut off and the gaming board 4 mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is replaced with a gaming board 4'having a different game specification from the gaming board 4 and the power is turned on, the payout control is performed. The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 on the board 4110 starts processing again from the inconsistency counter INCC stored when the game board 4 was mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. In other words, when the player plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the gaming board 4 ′ mounted, the inconsistency counter INCC in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the gaming board 4 before replacement is inherited as it is. Therefore, the player plays the pachinko gaming machine 1 on which the gaming board 4'is mounted, and by chance, there is a probability of one millionth of a million, and the number of unmatched gaming balls occurs, causing an inconsistency counter INCC. When the mismatch counter INCC becomes equal to or higher than the mismatch threshold value INCTH described above, the payout control MPU 4120a determines that the retry operation is an abnormal operation within a short period of time when the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4 ′. May occur. That is, in a period shortly after the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4 ', a malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, etc. Although the error does not occur, the retry operation may be suddenly determined to be an abnormal operation.

  In this way, when the game board 4 is replaced with the game board 4 ′ and it is determined as an abnormal operation of the retry operation in a short period of time, the replacement game board 4 ′ is new, but the impression is that the game board 4 ′ is likely to malfunction. It may be given to the player. The probability that one inconsistent game ball will be paid out by the retry operation is one millionth of the probability when the pachinko game machine 1 is installed in the hall and continuously operated for one week during the business hours of the hall. , The probability that one unsatisfied game ball due to the retry operation is paid out is the same as the probability that one ball is paid out, and therefore the probability of several millionth from the mismatch counter INCC in the processing of step S778 in the retry operation monitoring processing shown in FIG. With, the value 1 cannot be subtracted. Then, in one week, the inconsistency counter INCC is incremented by 1 and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes 1, and in two weeks the inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by 1 and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes 2. In the week, the inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by the value 1 and the inconsistency counter INCC is the value 3, and in 4 weeks the inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by the value 1 and the inconsistency counter INCC is the value 4 by 5 weeks. The inconsistency counter INCC is further incremented by 1 and the inconsistency counter INCC becomes the value 5, which coincides with the above-described inconsistency threshold INCTH. That is, after 5 weeks have passed, the inconsistency counter INCC matches the inconsistency threshold INCTH, so that the payout control program executes the control of the payout control MPU 4120a in step S776 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. In the determination, it is determined that there is no detection signal from the counting switch 751, which causes a malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, and the like. It is a segment indicator mounted on the payout control board 4110 to notify that there is a “retry error” in the processing of step S782 in the retry operation monitoring processing shown in FIG. 48. Retry error that displays the number "5" on the error LED indicator 860b Set the information so that the set (stored) in the status information storage area of the payout control chip RAM.

  Therefore, when the payout control MPU 4120a determines in step S790 in this inconsistency counter reset determination process that the inconsistency counter reset determination time has elapsed, that is, every 7000 s (about 2 hours), the inconsistency counter reset is repeatedly performed. By forcibly setting the value 0 to the inconsistency counter INCC in the processing of step S794 in the determination process, that is, forcibly resetting it, the increment of the inconsistency counter INCC that occurs with a probability of a few millionths is performed. It is disabled. As a result, an error occurs in the retry operation even though there is no malfunction of the counting switch 751, disconnection of various harnesses from the counting switch 751 to the payout control board 4110, contact failure of various connectors, or the like. It is possible to prevent the retry error information that conveys the message from being set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  It is noted that by intentionally deactivating the counting switch 751, it is difficult to detect the game ball that is paid out by being received in the recess of the payout rotating body to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 744 is transmitted, and is described above. Even if an illegal act of forcibly generating a retry operation and illegally acquiring a game ball paid out by this retry operation is performed and the counting switch 751 is intentionally repeatedly deactivated for a short period of time, it is described above. As described above, when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC becomes equal to or more than the inconsistency threshold INCTH, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 emit light, so that a clerk or the like in the hall changes the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. You will have to rush to confirm. Then, the player who engages in the cheating is forced to interrupt the act so that the act is not discovered, and the player cannot continuously obtain the fraudulent gaming ball due to the cheating. On the other hand, when the counting switch 751 is intentionally repeatedly deactivated for a long time so that the value of the inconsistency counter INCC does not exceed the inconsistency threshold INCTH, the inconsistency counter INCC is changed every 7000 s (about 2 hours). Although reset, during this period, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player performing the cheating is the mismatch counter INCC up to the mismatch threshold INCTH as described above, and the counting switch 751 is intentionally set. The number of game balls that can be obtained by a player who commits an illegal act can be extremely reduced even when the game machine is repeatedly deactivated for a long time.

[13-11. Error release operation determination processing]
Next, the error cancellation operation determination process will be described. In this error cancellation operation determination process, it is determined whether the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. 12 is operated.

  When the error release operation determination process is started, in the payout control unit 4120 of the payout control board 4110, the payout control program causes the operation switch 860a to release the error under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it is operated (step S800). This determination is performed based on the operation signal from the operation switch 860a in the port input process of step S550 in the power-on process of the payout control unit (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. Specifically, the operation signal is stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above. In step S800, it is determined that the payout control program does not read the input information from the input information storage area, and does not instruct to cancel the error when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is HI. It is determined that the operation switch 860a has not been operated, and when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 860a is LOW, the operation switch 860a is operated by determining that the instruction is to cancel the error. It is determined that

  When the operation switch 860a is not operated in step S800, the payout control program ends this routine as it is, while when the operation switch 860a is operated in step S800, the payout control program performs the error flag state confirmation processing. Perform (step S802). In this error flag state determination processing, the state of the error flag corresponding to various error information regarding the prize ball device 740 is confirmed. For example, the state of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation is abnormal is confirmed. As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG has a value of 1 when the retry operation is abnormal, and a value of 0 when the retry operation is not abnormal (the retry operation is normally operating). Since it is set, the payout control program confirms whether the value of the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is 0 or 1 under the control of the payout control MPU 4120a.

  Following step S802, the payout control program performs state information setting processing (step S804). In this state information setting process, based on the error flag confirmed in step S802, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, the state information corresponding to the error flag is set to It is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 37, various information (state information) is read from the state information storage area, and the read state A state command is created based on the information and transmitted to the main control board 4100. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-described retry operation is abnormally operating is a value 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operating, it is determined that an error has occurred in the retry operation. When the retry error information to be transmitted is set (stored) in the state information storage area of the payout control internal RAM, in the command transmission process of step S566 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG. 37, A retry error status command is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100.

  In the main control board 4100 that has received the retry error information, the main control program transmits it to the peripheral control board 4140 in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S92 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. In the control board 4140, the sub-control program performs retry operation error notification processing for notifying that an error has occurred in the retry operation. In this retry operation error notification processing, the error notification announcement of the retry operation of "Please check the prize ball unit." And "Please check the harness of the payout control board." 2 times. Repeatedly flowing from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5 shown in FIG. It is supposed to do. The clerk in the hall or the like who hears the error notification announcement of the retry operation, the malfunction of the counting switch 751 shown in FIG. Can be confirmed much earlier than in the case where the error notification announcement of the retry operation does not flow from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5. Further, in the retry operation error notification process, a plurality of LEDs of various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 5 are caused to emit light of a predetermined color (red in this embodiment).

  Subsequent to step S804, the payout control program performs a cancellation setting process (step S806). In this cancellation setting process, if the status of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, it corresponds to the error flag based on the error flag corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802. The CR unit 6 indicates that the error is forcibly stopping the contents displayed by the error LED display 860b which is the segment display already mounted on the payout control board 4110, or that the ball lending is ready. In order to convey to the above, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is kept at HI, that is, the state where it is raised is held, and the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board 869 is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120. It outputs to the CR unit 6 via. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the retry operation described above is abnormally operating is a value 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operating, the error LED indicator 860b has already been displayed. In order to forcibly stop the number "5" for informing that there is a "retry error", the retry error information stored in the state information storage area of the payout control internal RAM described above is "normal". The information to which the graphic "-" for notifying the effect is displayed is forcibly overwritten. Also, in order to notify the CR unit 6 that the ball lending is possible, the logic of the PRDY signal is held at HI, that is, the rising state is held, and the game ball is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4120a. It outputs to the CR unit 6 through the equal lending device connection terminal board 869.

  Following step S806, the payout control program performs an error flag initialization process (step S808), and this routine is ended. In this error flag initialization processing, if the state of the error flag indicates that an error has occurred, the error flag is set based on the error flag corresponding to the various error information confirmed in step S802. initialize. For example, when the retry error flag RTERR-FLG indicating whether or not the above-described retry operation is abnormally operating is the value 1, that is, when the retry operation is abnormally operating, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 0. Set and initialize. At this time, the logic of the PRDY signal described above is held at HI, that is, the rising state is held, and the logic state of the PRDY signal is set in the PRDY signal output setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area. Thereby, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. The PRDY signal output setting information read out by the lever, that is, the PRDY signal whose logic is LOW, is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a to the CR unit 6 via the terminal device connection terminal board 869 for playing game balls and the like. .

  As described above, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is the internal factor when the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is greater than or equal to the inconsistency threshold INCTH in the determination of step S780 in the retry operation monitoring process shown in FIG. When the operation switch 860a is operated while the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to 1 in the process of step S786 of the same process when the occurrence of the error occurs, this external factor causes When the error occurs, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to the value 0 and initialized. When the operation switch 860a is operated to clear the RAM when the power is turned on, the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is triggered by this, that is, the operation switch 860a is operated to clear the RAM to clear the error. Similar to the case where the switch 860a is operated, the initialization is triggered by the occurrence of this external factor.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 executes the operation control switch 860a (operation switch), which was originally supposed to be used to release the error occurred regarding the payout operation, from the time the power is turned on to the main processing on the main processing side. Instead, for a predetermined time until the operation is performed, an operation for demonstrating a RAM clear function for starting initialization of the main control internal RAM (game storage unit) and the payout control internal RAM (payout storage unit) It functions as a department. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 causes the operation switch 860a to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred in the payout operation of the game ball after the predetermined time has elapsed. Here, even if the hall clerk is a person who is not accustomed to operating the pachinko machine, as long as he / she remembers the position of the operation switch 860a on the rear surface of the gaming machine, it can be changed according to the timing of operating this operation switch 860a. If a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, while exhibiting the function of canceling the error that has occurred with respect to the payout operation of the game ball, depending on the timing of operating the operation switch 860a, it is a predetermined time from the power on. Within the time, the function of initializing the storage unit can be exerted. Therefore, even if an error occurs in such a gaming machine, the hall clerk can improve the efficiency of the switch operation at the time of dealing with the error and appropriately deal with the switch operation without hesitation, so that the game is interrupted. The player can resume the game before the player loses the motivation for the game.

[13-12. Exchange of various signals with CR unit]
Next, the CR communication process of step S554 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. 37 will be described using a timing chart. In this CR communication processing, various signals are exchanged between the payout control board 4110 and the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. First, the signal processing during the payout operation by the ball lending will be described, and subsequently, the input signal confirmation processing from the CR unit 6 will be described. Here, as the amount of money, the number of game balls for 200 yen (in the present embodiment, 50 balls, and for the amount of money, 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out twice) is used as the number of lent balls. A case of paying out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 shown in FIG. 7 will be described. The BRQ signal, the BRDY signal, and the CR connection signal from the CR unit 6 are read from the input information storage area of the payout control RAM and stored in the read input information. Checks the logical state of the BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal from the input information every 2 ms which is the interrupt timer period.

[13-12-1. Signal processing during payout operation by ball lending]
The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 reads the PRDY signal output setting information from the CR communication information storage area of the payout control internal RAM, and the read PRDY signal output setting information pays out the rented ball. When the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation is possible is set to the logical state, as shown in FIG. 51D, the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible. In order to convey the PRDY signal, the logic of the PRDY signal is set to HI, that is, raised and held, and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120, and as the PRDY, a lending device connection terminal such as a game ball. Output to the CR unit 6 through the plate 869 (timing H0). In this state, for example, when the player presses the ball lending button 361 of the ball lending unit 360 shown in FIG. 2, the ball lending switch 365b is turned on (turned on). An operation signal is input to the CR unit 6 as the TDS shown in FIG. 13 from the frequency display plate 365 via the game ball and other lending device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 to which this TDS is input pays out the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls, so as shown in FIG. The ball request signal BRDY is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU4120a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H1). .. This BRDY is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a as a BRDY signal.

  In the payout control MPU 4120a to which the BRDY signal is input, the payout control program, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), changes from the timing H1 to the lending request monitoring time HA (in the present embodiment, from 20 milliseconds (ms) to 58 ms). By the time the set amount of time elapses, a predetermined number of lent balls (25 balls in the present embodiment, from the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal plate 869 for gaming balls, etc. in one payout operation. , Which corresponds to 100 yen as the amount of money.) Whether or not BRQ, which is a single payout operation start request signal for paying out, rises.

  Since the CR unit 6 first pays out the number of game balls for 100 yen among the number of game balls for 200 yen as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls, FIG. ), The BRQ is output from the CR unit 6 to the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal plate 869 for playing balls etc. by the time the lending request monitoring time HA elapses from the timing H1. Start up and hold (timing H2). This BRQ is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 4120a as a BRQ signal.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (c), when the BRQ signal rises from timing H1 until the lending request monitoring time HA elapses, the payout control MPU 4120a starts timing H2 and outputs the BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB (in the present embodiment, 20 ms ± 1 ms) is set, the EXS signal logic is set to HI, that is, the startup state is held and the payout control MPU4120a is transmitted in order to notify that the payout operation is started once. Is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of, and is output to the CR unit 6 as EXS via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing H3).

  The CR unit 6 to which this EXS is input, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), before the lending instruction monitoring time HC (set to 20 ms to 58 ms in the present embodiment) elapses from the timing H3. , BRQ which is started up and held from the timing H2 is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 through the game ball and other lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H4).

  As shown in FIG. 51 (c), the payout control MPU 4120a performs one payout operation from timing H4 until the payout monitoring time HD (in the present embodiment, the ball payout time is set). Then, a predetermined number of lent balls, that is, the number of game balls for 100 yen is paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls. Then, when the payout monitoring time HD has elapsed, the EXS signal that has been raised and held from the timing H3 is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a with its logic being set to LOW, that is, in the lowered state. , EXS is output to the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal board 869 for gaming balls and the like (timing H5).

  Since the CR unit 6 pays out the remaining 100 yen of the number of game balls out of the number of 200 yen balls as the amount of money to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 as the number of lent balls, the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. ), The next request confirmation timing HE (in the present embodiment, the maximum is set to 268 ms) from timing H5, BRQ, from the CR unit 6 to the game ball lending device connection terminal board. It is output to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via 869, and the signal is raised and held (timing H6).

  Similarly, when the payout control MPU 4120a pays out the number of game balls for the remaining 100 yen to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 using the method described above, as shown in FIG. 51 (c). , The rising and holding EXS signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU4120a with the logic set to LOW, that is, in the lowered state, and the terminal is connected to the lending device such as a game ball as EXS. Output to the CR unit 6 through the plate 869 (timing H7).

  The CR unit 6 rises from the timing H1 until the CR unit lending completion monitoring time HF (set to 268 ms at maximum in this embodiment) elapses from the timing H7, as shown in FIG. The BRDY that has been raised and held is output from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 (payout control MPU 4120a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the signal is lowered and held (timing H8).

  The above-mentioned loan request monitoring time HA, BRQ request acknowledgment ACK monitoring time HB, lending instruction monitoring time HC, payout monitoring time HD, next request confirmation timing HE, CR unit loan completion monitoring time HF are the payout control shown in FIG. The time is counted by the timer updating process of step S552 in the process of turning on the power to the unit (main process of the payout control unit).

  Note that the payout control MPU 4120a does not communicate with the CR unit 6 when the ball is out, the ball is out, the counting switch error, the retry error, the full tank, or the like (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is Is LOW, that is, when it is held after falling, as shown in FIG. 51 (d), the PRDY signal that was started and held from timing H1 is set to LOW, that is, the state of falling. It holds and outputs from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and outputs it as the PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the terminal device connection terminal plate 869 for playing game balls and the like (timing H9). On the other hand, while communicating with the CR unit 6 (when the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, that is, when the logic is rising and held), although not shown, the logic state of the EXS signal is maintained and paid out. It is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the control MPU 4120a, and is output to the CR unit 6 as EXS via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. “Maintaining the logic state of the EXS signal” means maintaining the logic LOW when the logic of the EXS signal is LOW (the EXS signal falls and is held), and the logic of the EXS signal is HI ( The EXS signal is held at the rising edge) to maintain its logic HI.

  In this way, the CR unit 6 exchanges various signals with the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110, and the payout control MPU 4120a sets the number of game balls of 200 yen as the amount of money to 100. By performing the payout operation of 25 balls for a circle twice, the game balls with the lent number of 50 balls are paid out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302. In addition, a setting staff (not shown) provided on the front side of the CR unit 6 is operated by a clerk or the like in the hall, and, for example, the number of game balls worth 100 yen is used as the number of balls to be rented, and the upper plate 301 or When it is set to pay out to the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU4120a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen once as the amount of money, and the number of game balls for 500 yen as the amount of money as the number of lent balls. When it is set to pay out to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money 5 times, and the number of game balls for 1000 yen as the amount of money. When the number of lent balls is set to be paid out to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302, the payout control MPU 4120a performs a payout operation of 25 balls for 100 yen as the amount of money 10 times.

[13-12-2. Input signal confirmation processing from CR unit]
The payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120 in the payout control board 4110 allows the CR unit 6 to output the BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball and other rental device connection terminal board 869 even after the above-mentioned loan request monitoring time HA has elapsed. Then, the CR unit 6 outputs BRDY to the payout control board 4110 and the signal is not activated, or even if the above-mentioned lending instruction monitoring time HC has elapsed, and the CR unit 6 connects the gaming ball or other lending device. The CR unit 6 outputs the BRQ from the CR unit 6 even if the output is made to the payout control board 4110 via the terminal board 869 and the signal is not lowered, or even if the above-described next request confirmation timing HE has elapsed. The output is made to the payout control board 4110 via the ball lending device connection terminal board 869, and the signal is not activated, or as described above. Even if the R unit lending completion monitoring time HF elapses, the CR unit 6 outputs BRDY from the CR unit 6 to the payout control board 4110 via the lending device connection terminal plate 869 for gaming balls and the like, and the signal is stopped. If not, the PRDY and EXS described above are used to confirm whether the BRQ and BRDY are normal. Specifically, when the payout control MPU 4120a determines that BRQ and BRDY are not normal as shown in FIGS. 51 (e) and (f) (timing J0), a predetermined period JA (in this embodiment, from this timing J0) is set. , 200 ms ± 1 ms)), the logic of the PRDY signal is set to LOW, that is, the falling state is held and output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a of the payout control unit 4120. Then, as PRDY, it is output to the CR unit 6 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and the logic of the EXS signal is set to LOW, that is, the lowered state is held and a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a. Output from the output terminal of the, and as the EXS, to the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal plate 869 for gaming balls, etc. To force (timing J1).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held at the timing J1 to HI after falling for a predetermined period JB (200 ms ± 1 ms in this embodiment) from the timing J1. That is, it is held in the activated state and is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J2. ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal started and held from the timing J2 to LOW after a lapse of a predetermined period JC (100 ms ± 1 ms in the present embodiment) from the timing J2. That is, the output is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a while being kept in the lowered state, and is output to the CR unit 6 as PRDY via the game ball and other lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J3. ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held at the timing J3 to HI after falling for a predetermined period JD (set to 100 ms ± 1 ms in the present embodiment) from the timing J3. That is, the output is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a while being kept in the activated state, and is output to the CR unit 6 as PRDY via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J4. ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal started and held from the timing J4 to LOW after a predetermined period JE (100 ms ± 1 ms is set in the present embodiment) from the timing J4. That is, the output is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a while being kept in a lowered state, and is output as PRDY to the CR unit 6 via the game ball or other lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J5. ).

  Subsequently, the payout control MPU 4120a sets the logic of the PRDY signal held at the timing J5 to HI after falling for a predetermined period JF (10000 ms ± 1 ms in this embodiment) from the timing J5. That is, the output is held from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 4120a while being kept in the activated state, and is output to the CR unit 6 as the PRDY via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 (timing J6. ).

  The above-described predetermined period JA to predetermined period JF are clocked by the timer updating process of step S552 in the payout control unit power-on process (payout control unit main process) shown in FIG.

[14. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 4140 that receives various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) shown in FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 56. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on process, FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, and FIG. 54 is an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the peripheral control board 4140 includes a peripheral control unit 4150 and a liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. Here, various control processes of the peripheral control unit 4150 will be described. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, and then the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process will be described. . In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process is set to the highest priority as the priority of the interrupt process, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

[14-1. Various control processing of peripheral control unit]
[14-1-1. Peripheral controller power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral controller 4150 shown in FIG. 14 performs peripheral controller power-on processing, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs an initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4150a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the production control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 4150a first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4150a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs from the main control board 4100, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, as shown in FIGS. 29 and 30. , It becomes a state in which various commands such as commands relating to control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be received.

  In the hot start / cold start determination processing, for the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 15, the effect backup information (1fr) which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 4150cb thereof. ) And the production backup information (1 ms), which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms), and Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 4150cc. The production backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in, is compared, and the production backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) ms), and when the compared contents match, the contents stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is the storage area normally used in the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Production backup information (1fr) and production backup information (1ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1ms) for Bank0 (1ms), are copied back to perform a hot start, while comparing When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are storage areas normally used in the peripheral control RAM 4150c. And cold start.

  Further, in the hot start / cold start determination processing, also for the peripheral control SRAM 4150d shown in FIG. 15, the effect backup information which is the content backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 4150db. (SRAM) is compared, and the production backup information (SRAM) in the backup second area 4150dc, which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM), is compared. When the compared contents match each other, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a storage region which is normally used in peripheral control SRAM 4150d shown in FIG. ) Is copied back to perform a hot start, but when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value is set to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a storage area normally used by the peripheral control SRAM 4150d. Forcibly write 0 to start cold. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed target work area 4150cf of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. After performing the initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af shown in FIG. 15 and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e shown in FIG. 14 to reset the peripheral control MPU 4150a. I try not to get it covered.

  Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, the calendar information for specifying the year / month / day and the time information for specifying the hour / minute / second are acquired from the RTC internal RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage section and the current time information is set in the time information storage section. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, a brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and sets the first brightness so as to be the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information. A process of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and lighting it is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes the brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and the current setting information. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, is included.

  In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75% and the backlight of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on. When the light is turned on, the brightness of the backlight of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, the light is turned on, and the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC controller 4165 is stored. When the backlight of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in is equal to 80%, the brightness of the backlight of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Lights up. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the usage time of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is not performed at all. It's hard not to be discouraged. This is because the correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% every time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent being done.

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 4150a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after performing the current time information acquisition processing so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, which will be described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady process. When not executed, the value is set to 0 respectively. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control, which will be described later, triggered by the input of a V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the V blank signal interrupt process. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. There is.

  Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 and it is repeatedly determined whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such a determination, the state becomes a standby state until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, and resets the peripheral control MPU 4150a. I try not to get it covered.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, first, the steady processing in-process flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S1009). The steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady process is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer starting process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer process is activated Also, the value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Following step S1010, the effect control program performs a lamp data output process (step S1012). In this lamp data output processing, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 15 is utilized to perform serial transmission for the lamp drive board serial I / O port. When the serial transmission for the lamp drive board serial I / O port is started, the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Gaming board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 4 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. Has been set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 15 specifies the transmission of the lamp drive board serial I / O port as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the peripheral data of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa is specified. The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the head address is passed through the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai to the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and 1 byte of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. The data of 1 is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac receives the transmission interrupt request of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board as a trigger (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board is used). It is triggered when the written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of 1-byte data.), And the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa is byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transmission of serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring to the buffer register and writing, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and synchronizes with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. One byte of data in the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board.

  In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also in this case, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a is used to perform continuous transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED serial I / O port. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the door frame 5 is created in the 4150cab by a lamp data creation process described later. Has been set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area The first 1 byte of the door-side light emission data STL-DAT stored at the start address of the 4150cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer and write to the I / O port transmit buffer register. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac receives the transmission interrupt request of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a trigger (in the present embodiment, the serial I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED). The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is triggered by the fact that the 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of the 1-byte data.). Is not using the bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab is byte by byte, the external bus 4150h, and the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad. , And decorate the frame via the peripheral bus 4150ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. 1 byte of data in the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, and continuous transmission is performed by the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED serial I / O port. There is.

  Following step S1012, the effect control program performs operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the dial operation unit 401 is based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. Rotation (rotation direction) and various kinds of information obtained by operating the pressing operation unit 405 (for example, rotation (rotation direction of dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in operation unit 400). ) History information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is set based on the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The presence / absence of operation of the unit 405 is monitored, and the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and Appropriately determined whether to reflect the state of operation of the pressure operation unit 405 to the game effects.

  Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a by the display data creation process described later is displayed by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a on the channels CH1, 2, 3 to the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and the second liquid crystal display device 3252. As a result, various screens are drawn on the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and the second liquid crystal display device 3252. In the display data output process, when drawing exceeding the drawing capability of the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display. The output to the device 470 is canceled. This makes it possible to prevent a delay in processing time, but so-called frame drop occurs, but the lamp data output processing in step S1012 causes the various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 shown in FIG. A speaker housed in a speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 shown in FIG. 5 by an effect by a plurality of LEDs and a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided in the door frame 5 and a sound data output process described later, and The speaker 130 provided on the door frame 5 shown in FIG. 2 has a mechanism that can prioritize the synchronization with the effects such as music and sound effects matched with various effects.

  Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, the effect control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 4160c as serialized audio data of sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 4160a in the sound data creation processing described later. In addition to music and sound effects, the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound is output as serialized audio data to the audio data transmission IC 4160c. When the audio data transmission IC 4160c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a, the right audio data is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate 194 as serial data of a differential method in which the right signal is a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time as the transmission, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a differential method using a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, in addition to stereo-playing music and sound effects according to various effects from the speaker housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5, in addition to the notification sound and the notification sound. Is also played in stereo.

  Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. For example, in the scheduler update processing, of the screen data arranged in chronological order that configures the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the screen data from the first screen data to the VDP 4160a with a built-in sound source. Update the pointer to indicate what to print.

  In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the emission data arranged in time series, which constitutes the emission mode generating schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, the emission data of the various LEDs from the emission data at the head to the emission data. The pointer is updated in order to instruct whether the mode is set.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound data such as the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in time series and constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, are designated. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to instruct which sound command data from the head sound command data should be output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, from the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series which constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae, The pointer is updated to instruct which drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitute the electric drive source schedule data, is described below. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor / solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data designated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated each time the own processing is executed. In other words, the drive data designated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing. Even if the other drive data is instructed from the drive data that is supposed to be performed, it is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data that should be originally instructed in the scheduler update process.

  Following step S1020, the effect control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, the production control program analyzes various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 in various commands received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command receiving means) described later (command analysis). means). That is, the production control program, the command received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt process, for example, the start mouth winning command for instructing the start of the start mouth winning effect, the number of reserved normal symbols (0-4) Ordinary symbol storage command for identifying, a symbol synchronization production start command for instructing the start of symbol synchronization production, a symbol storage command output when the number of starting suspension changes, With the special winning a prize 1 count display command (special winning a prize count command) output to, or the frame state 1 command (second error generation command, full tank error generation command) showing the content of full tank shown in FIG. It analyzes whether or not there is (command analysis means), and recognizes which game state is currently in effect. In addition, the command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is the main frame opening command, the main frame closing command, the door opening command, or the door frame closing after a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on. Analyze whether it is a command. Various commands from the main control board 4100 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 4150cac. The various commands are shown in FIG. 29 and are classified into special figure 1 tuning effect-related, various commands classified into special figure 2 tuning effect-related, various commands classified into jackpot-related, and power-on. Various commands, various commands related to general figure synchronization effect, various commands related to ordinary electric role effect, various commands classified to notification display shown in FIG. 30, the above-mentioned door frame opening command , Status display such as door frame close command, main frame open command, main frame close command, error release navigation command (corresponding to second error release command) and frame status 1 command (corresponding to second error occurrence command) There are various classified commands, various commands related to tests, and other classified commands.

  Here, in the effect control program, the command analyzed in the received command analysis process (step S1022) is the frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command) or the special winning opening 1 count display command (large winning opening count command). ), It is indicated by using the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 (second display device), as shown in FIG. As a result, based on the suggestion display object image data, for example, the display control of the arrow-shaped icon in the display mode in which the phrase "please press the button to call the clerk" is overlaid is performed (operation calling means). Subsequently, the production control program, as a call control function, starts the display of the arrow-shaped icon, and then controls the calling operation different from the most recent directing operation to the outside with the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 (calling). The control means) and the hall clerk can be easily noticed.

  By doing this, the player who tries to call the hall clerk does not have to extend his arm or body to reach the data counter, which is often placed above the pachinko machine 1. Since it suffices to press the pressing operation unit 405 provided on the door frame 5 which is closer to the player, it is possible to suppress the physical inconvenience and the physical burden of calling the hall clerk. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 1 plays a game for a long time, it becomes difficult to receive unnecessary stress. Therefore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the operating rate.

  By the way, the work by the hall clerk who appears at the player in response to the above-mentioned call should be completed as soon as possible, considering the psychological state of the player who wants to restart the game as soon as possible. You should have the desire to cooperate with the hall clerk as much as possible. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, the effect control program analyzes the error content based on the frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command) received from the main control board 4100 (error content analysis means). Further, the effect control program is based on an error content management table (not shown) that manages whether or not the player should leave the seat according to each error content, and a complicated coping work by the hall clerk according to the error content (for example, When it is determined that the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5 needs to be opened / closed), as described above, only the standard message “please call the clerk by pressing the button” is superimposed on the arrow-shaped icon. On the other hand, if it is determined that the hall clerk does not need to do complicated work according to the error content, an additional message "Please leave your seat" is added to the above arrow-shaped icon in addition to the standard message above. The display mode is superimposed. In this way, the player who encounters such an error will immediately take action as he / she does not hesitate whether to leave the seat and wait for the hall clerk due to the presence of the above-mentioned additional message. It can be decided whether it should be done, and if necessary, the hall clerk can be given sufficient working space to complete the subsequent work.

  In addition, when the production control program detects the operation signal output according to the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, it determines whether or not the arrow-shaped icon is displayed, and when the arrow-shaped icon is displayed, It is assumed that the pressing operation unit 405 is operated in response to the appearance of the operation signal by the arrow-shaped icon. On the other hand, when the effect control program detects the operation signal, when the arrow-shaped icon is not displayed, the operation signal indicates that the operation signal is not the appearance of the arrow-shaped icon but other factors (operation for the production is prompted. It is considered that the pressing operation unit 405 has been operated in response to the above.

  Here, if the effect control program determines that the normal game state has transitioned to the jackpot game state (special game state) based on the command received from the main control board 4100, then the suggestion read from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b Based on the display object image data, an arrow-shaped icon is displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 (second display device), for example, "please press the push operation unit to call a clerk when it is about to overflow the dollar box". It is also possible to have overlapping display modes. In this way, if the game ball discharged through the lower plate 302 after being paid out in the big hit game state is about to overflow from the storage box (corresponding to the dollar box), the player Since it is not necessary to extend the arm or body to manually operate the so-called call button of the data counter, it is possible to concentrate more on the game and suppress a decrease in the operating rate.

  By the way, in order to call a hall clerk in search of a new storage box in the big hit game state in this manner, if the form is urged to the player to operate the pressing operation unit 405 by the display mode of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470, the production control At first glance, the program seems to be difficult to distinguish the operation signal from the case where the player is actually prompted to operate the pressing operation unit 405 in the big hit game state itself. That is, the production control program, when the operation signal is detected, the player operated the pressing operation unit 405 in search of a new housing box, or the player presses in response to the effect in the jackpot gaming state. It seems that it cannot be distinguished whether the part 405 is operated.

  However, the production control program uses the concept of time sharing to urge the player to actually operate the pressing operation unit 405 in the production in the big hit game state (special game state) and execute the call operation by the call control function. The participation operation possible time zone where the operation is restricted and the shop assistant callable time zone when the hall salesclerk can be called by the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 and the calling operation by the call control function is permitted are distinguished. (Time sharing control means). Specifically, the effect control program has determined that the command analyzed in the received command analysis process (step S1022) is a frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command) indicating that the tank is full. In this case, it is considered as the time zone in which the clerk can be called, while the other time zone is set as the time zone in which the participation operation is possible. As shown in FIG. 58, this production control program uses the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 (second display device) that indicates that the big hit is being made, when it is considered that the store clerk can call. In addition to controlling the display of the phrase "please pull out the ball" at the top of the screen, control the display of the arrow-shaped icon in the display mode with the phrase "Please press the button to call the clerk". There is. In this way, the effect control program, in the case of detecting the operation signal in the big hit game state, when the detection timing is within the participation operation possible time zone, in response to the effect of the big hit game state, the press operation unit. While it is determined that 405 has been operated, if the detection timing is within the above-mentioned store clerk callable time zone, it is determined that the pressing operation unit 405 has been operated in order to call the hall clerk, and discrimination is made. The effect control program described above may be configured such that a touch panel is mounted on the surface of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 and the operation of the button displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 instead of the pressing operation unit 405 is prompted. By the way, the production control program indicates that the command analyzed in the received command analysis process (step S1022) is the special winning opening 1 count display command (large winning opening count command) and is full. When it is determined that the frame state command is the 1st command (second error occurrence command), the game balls are likely to not fit in the accommodation box at the time of a big hit, and as a trigger for the player to call the hall clerk, it is described above. The screen shown in FIG. 58 is displayed.

  By the way, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process (step S1022) is found to be the door opening command or the main body frame opening command (that is, the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3) When it is opened or when the body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2), the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 (second display device) is caused to display in the following display mode. That is, the production control program issues an instruction for displaying the service mode screen (see FIG. 59) for the work by the hall clerk on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470, and then the dial operation unit 401 (operation by the player). When it is detected that the “meal break setting” is selected by the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) after the rotation operation of the (part), the operation setting for setting the operation stop time that does not allow the operation described above. An instruction for displaying a break timer setting screen (see FIG. 60) corresponding to the screen is given (operation setting screen display control means). In this way, by using the door opening command or the main body frame opening command that can occur only by the operation of the hall clerk, it is difficult for the player to operate such a break timer setting screen. You can

  In addition, the production control program displays the time information (for example, 60 minutes) input on the break timer setting screen (operation setting screen) according to the operation of the hall clerk using the dial operation unit 401 (operation unit) and the pressure operation unit 405. Set as the operation stop time (operation stop time setting means). Further, the production control program is triggered by the setting of the operation stop time on the break timer setting screen (operation setting screen), and sets the operation stop time of the set stop time on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 (second display device). The remaining time is displayed as shown in FIG. 61 (remaining time display control means). In addition, the effect control program may set at least a part of the effect operation by the peripheral control board 4140 to a stopped state or a suppressed state (remaining time display control means). It should be noted that this effect control program at least suppresses the display operation of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 (first display device) by the peripheral control board 4140 over the set operation stop time, and, for example, a blackout display mode. You may make it perform (1st display control suppression means). By doing so, it is possible to suppress the power consumption of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 during the operation stop time during which the player does not play.

  In addition, the production control program, when the remaining time of this operation stop time is in a prescribed state, for example, when the count is zero, or when the command analyzed in the above-described received command analysis process (step S1022) is the door closing command or the main body. When it is determined that the command is a frame closing command, the display control of the remaining time of the operation stop time shown in FIG. 61 is ended, and the stop state or the suppression state of the part of the effect operation is released (stop state releasing means). In this way, by using the door closing command or the main body frame closing command that can be generated only by the operation of the hall clerk as described above, it is difficult for the player to perform such a release by the operation. You can

  By the way, in this effect control program, the remaining time of the operation stop time is zero (regulated state), and the command analyzed in the above-described received command analysis process (step S1022) is the door closing command or the main frame. If the command is not a closing command, for example, the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is controlled in a specific mode different from the most recent effect operation to execute a notification operation to the effect that the remaining time of the operation stop time has ended (start notification operation). means). By doing so, not only the hall clerk but also the player who is waiting for the pachinko machine 1 to be opened to a third party can immediately and easily know that the allowable break time has ended. it can. Furthermore, when the production control program finds that the command analyzed in the above-described received command analysis processing (step S1022) is the door closing command or the body frame closing command after the notification operation is started (that is, the door is closed). When the frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 or when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the above-mentioned notification operation is stopped (notification operation stopping means). In this way, the time during which the pachinko machine 1 cannot operate based on the player's intention, such as a break, can be shortened as much as possible.

  In this way, since the main body frame 3 or the door frame 5 needs to be opened and closed to suspend or restart the operation of the pachinko machine 1, only the hall clerks who have the key required to open and close the pachinko machine 1 The operation of the machine 1 can be suspended and restarted. Moreover, a certain hall clerk pays attention to each pachinko machine 1 and each player by suspending the operation of the pachinko machine 1 for a while as it is taking a break and receiving calls from many players. Even when the pachinko machine 1 that has been suspended cannot be operated, as soon as the operation stop time elapses, it becomes publicly easily recognizable by a third party that the operation low time elapses. . Therefore, even if the player does not come back from the break easily, the hall clerk can bring the pachinko machine 1 into a state in which other players can play the pachinko machine 1 at an early stage. The operating rate of the machine 1 can be increased even a little, and the operating rate of each pachinko machine 1 installed in each island facility can be increased as a whole.

  By the way, the effect control program is based on the calendar information and the time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 mounted on the peripheral control board 4140, according to the time zone when the player takes a break, When setting the operation stop time, the unit time that can be changed per operation (hereinafter referred to as "variable unit time") is changed from 5 minutes to a desired unit time (for example, 15 minutes) as shown in FIG. May be. If this kind of change is possible, it is possible to flexibly set the operation stop time according to the time of day or the day of the week. ) To keep the occupancy rate high by shortening the variable unit time, and to improve the conscience of the hall service by making the variable unit time longer during the time when it is difficult to expect a high occupancy rate (weekday daytime). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play the game again in the hole next time.

  On the other hand, if the command analyzed in the received command analysis process (step S1022) is the error cancellation navigation command (second error occurrence command) as described above, this effect control program executes this error cancellation navigation command. The error occurrence position information included in is extracted and acquired (error occurrence place identifying means).

  Following step S1022, the effect control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed by the reception command analysis process of step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit 4150 stores the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification. It is extracted from various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control ROM 4150b or the peripheral control RAM 4150c and set to 4150cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order from the highest priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the other abnormalities are automatically notified. It is supposed to do. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that one abnormal condition has occurred after another abnormal condition has occurred and before that abnormal condition is resolved. You can

  Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the above-described received command analysis process (step S1022) is divided into the status displays shown in FIG. In the case of various commands such as an error release navigation command (second error release command), by controlling the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 in a mode different from the normal effect mode associated with the effect operation, for example, a liquid crystal display A device 1900 (rendering device), a top plate liquid crystal display device 470 (rendering device), a lamp (rendering device) is used to visually warn the outside, or a pair of side speakers 130 (rendering device) are used to auditorily alert the outside. Warning to the outside (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player tries to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 4100 by operating the operation switch 860a of the payout control board 4110 despite the game state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the main control board 4100 that may affect the progress of the game.

  When notified to the outside as described above, the effect control program uses this as a trigger to read the main frame back image data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b (data storage unit), and the read main frame back image. Based on the data, on the body frame rear image specified on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 (second display device) based on the error occurrence position information included in the frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command). A maintenance screen in which the specific area of (1) is displayed in a prescribed manner is displayed as shown in FIG. 57 (error occurrence position suggesting means).

  In the maintenance screen shown in FIG. 57, the error number and the error content are displayed horizontally in a slender shape at the top, and in addition to the above-mentioned arrow-shaped icon, for example, "Payout is insufficient. Details of the error content are displayed. Furthermore, in this maintenance screen, the main frame back image is displayed in the right half. The main frame back image is a schematic view of the pachinko machine 1 viewed from the rear, that is, the arrangement of each part on the rear side of the main frame 3 on which the game board 4 is mounted. The effect control program described above is based on the error occurrence position information included in the frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command) received from the main control board 4100, and corresponds to the specific area (corresponding to the area 740Z) on the main frame rear image. ) Is specified, and the specific area 740Z is made to blink on the rear surface image of the main body frame (a prescribed display mode).

  In this way, the hall clerk who arrives at the player in response to the call of the player opens the main frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and is attached to the main frame 3 as in the conventional case. Maintenance of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 (second display device) provided on a part of the door frame 5 without checking the error content of the error LED display 860c provided on the payout control board 4110 of the panel 4 By confirming the area 740Z on the rear surface image of the main body frame on the screen, it is possible to immediately recognize which part of the pachinko machine 1 has an error by visually recognizing the blinking mode of the area 740Z. Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, even in a situation in which the pachinko machine 1 is complicated as in recent years, it is possible to prevent the time required for error handling from becoming long, and the pachinko machine 1 having a complicated configuration is suppressed. Also in this case, the hall clerk can complete the error handling as soon as possible, and the player's impatience and dissatisfaction during the error handling can be suppressed.

  Here, the production control program erases the error occurrence position suggestion image from the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 upon receiving the error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), or instead of that. When the body frame closing command is received before the error canceling navigation command, the body frame closing command is regarded as an error canceling navigation command, and upon receipt of the body frame closing command, the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 ( The main frame maintenance image is erased from the second display device) (screen restoration means). By doing so, even if the hall clerk who has completed the error handling forgets to operate the operation switch 860a, the main body frame closing command is regarded as a substitute for the error release navigation command, and not only the error notification is released but also the upper liquid crystal The display of the maintenance screen of the display device 470 can be turned off. By doing so, even if the hall clerk forgets to turn off the maintenance screen of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 after dealing with the error, it is automatically turned off by closing the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2, and then the player feels uncomfortable. You can continue playing without feeling.

  Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update processing, the effect control program stores it in the calendar information storage unit which is acquired in the current time information acquisition processing in step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. The calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update processing, the hour, minute, second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year, month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit, based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

  Following step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer is instructed by the pointer in the emission control program, in which the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 and the time-sequential light emission data forming the schedule data for light emission mode generation is arranged. Based on the light emission data, the game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 4 shown in FIG. DAT is created by extracting it from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and is set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. And various decorations provided on the door frame 5 Door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of the board is stored in the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c. It is created by extracting it from the image data and set it in the LED transmission data storage area 4150cab of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side of the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG.

  Following step S1028, the effect control program performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series that constitutes the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer. Is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts sprite data by extracting character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b based on the input screen data, and creates the sprite data. Also, drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is generated in the built-in VRAM.

  Following step S1030, the effect control program performs touch panel processing (step S1031). In this touch panel processing, the effect control program detects the contact state on the contact surface of the touch panel 480 based on the detection signal received from the touch panel 480 (contact state detection means). The effect control program acquires the coordinate value of the contact surface of the touch panel 480 indicating the center of the contact portion based on the contact state, specifies the position represented by this coordinate value as a detection point (detection point acquisition means), Operation information including this initial position is acquired. The effect control program may acquire not only such coordinate values but also the range of the contact surface (hereinafter referred to as the contact range). Details of this touch panel processing will be described later.

  Following step S1031, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the effect control program in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 4160a. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 4150a, the sound source built-in VDP 4160a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 4160b and controls the built-in sound source to generate a sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number defined in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 4150ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotating position of the knob portion 4140a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from the value 0 to the value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 levels is divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6, and the board volume 0 is set to mute and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume. The volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. By controlling the liquid crystal and the sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160 so that the sound volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, the audio data is audio data that is serialized by the sound data output processing of step S1018 described above By outputting to the transmission IC 4160c, music and sound effects are made to flow from the speaker accommodated in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 and the speaker 130 provided in the door frame 5.

  Further, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the sound volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, and the sound volume of the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 4160 is controlled by the program from the mute to the maximum sound volume. The built-in VDP 4160a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and it is possible to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a store clerk in the hall or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjusting volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the speaker and the door frame 5 housed in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3 will be Although the effect sound such as music and sound effect that flows from the provided speaker 130 is reduced, a large volume (in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in trouble or when the player is conducting an illegal act). The notification sound set to (maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming less likely to notice a malfunction or a player's cheating by the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume that is set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music or the sound effect, while the advertising sound is not disturbed. The volume of sound is increased to add music and sound effects, and the screen unfolded by the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is rendered more powerful. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility that the game state will shift to an advantageous state for the player.

  Following step S1032, the effect control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 15 in the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d externally attached are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the backup target of the peripheral control RAM 4150c is displayed for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 15, that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Which is included in Bank0 (1fr), the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 4150caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 4150cab, the reception command storage area 4150cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 4150cad, and The effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 4150cae is used as effect backup information (1fr) as Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1f) in the backup first area 4150cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are designated to copy to the backup first area 4150cb to Bank1 (1fr), and the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). The contents up to the stored contents are successively copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa sets the peripheral control D. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are designated as the request factor of the A controller 4150ac, and the copy to the Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb is designated, and the contents stored in the head address of Bank0 (1fr) The contents stored up to the end address of (1fr) are all copied in order from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb in succession by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte).

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc, and Bank0 (1fr). ) To the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr) from the content stored in the start address of) to the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc continuously for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) From the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa requesting the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to the backup second area 4150cc to Bank4 (1fr). Shi Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc, from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr), continuously for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) All are sequentially copied from the first address of.

  In the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 4150d is a backup target for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 4150da shown in FIG. 15, that is, for each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac operates at high speed in the Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db, using the effect information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as effect backup information (SRAM). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The stored contents are copied in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank 1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa is copied. Contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) by designating copy of contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to the backup first area 4150db to Bank2 (SRAM) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. To the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) sequentially from the top address of Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 4150db.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and the Bank0 (SRAM). ) To the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) continuously by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte), the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the second area 4150dc. From the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa to the bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 4150dc as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac. P is specified and the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in the second area 4150dc. All are sequentially copied from the top address of Bank 4 (SRAM).

  Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e so that the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the in-steady-processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit stationary processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is set to a value 0 for initialization, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

  This peripheral control unit steady process starts with the production control program first setting the value 1 to the steady process in-process flag SP-FLG on the assumption that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. .., and then step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, a value 0 is set in the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing. Set to complete. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed in response to the input of the V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 4160a indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second, as described above, and thus V blank The interval at which signals are input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[14-1-2. Peripheral controller V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 14, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 can be received is input from the liquid crystal and sound source built-in VDP 4160a of the sound control unit 4160. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is executed in response to this, will be described. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 (step). S1045). As described above, the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 52 is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady state. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

  When the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral controller steady processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed and the peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady process is not executed.

  In the present embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. Sometimes, in step S1050, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1. However, this is because the V blank signal is input and V blank is input while the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady process currently being executed is assumed to be performed as the peripheral control unit steady process in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the peripheral control unit steady process is started from the beginning by forcibly canceling it on the way, the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. 52 is turned on for the purpose of preventing this. The peripheral control unit V blank signal, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed by setting the value 1 in the steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG in step S1009 in the processing (peripheral control unit steady process). Completion of the peripheral control unit steady process by notifying the interrupt process and setting the value 0 to the steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) of FIG. By transmitting the fact to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is this routine, the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is this routine. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady process has been completed. In other words, this is a measure in the case where the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, resulting in so-called processing failure.

  As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady process of this time, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, it is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Then, a state of waiting until the V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing of which the processing has been omitted is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process described later, which is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller power-on process (peripheral controller steady process) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but when there is the peripheral control unit steady process of this time, which has been dropped, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. Instead, it is only executed 32 times. In other words, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is dropped, the consistency between the production progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the production progress state by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is consistent. It doesn't collapse. Therefore, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is missed, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[14-1-3. Peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 52 will be described. .. When the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral controller 4150 shown in FIG. 14 determines whether the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S1100). This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting in the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process of step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 52 as described above. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. Therefore, the interval at which the V blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed 32 times before the execution of. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, ..., And the 32 1 ms timer interrupts sequentially. Will occur.

  When the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is ended as it is. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has a higher priority than the peripheral control unit V in this embodiment. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the V blank signal is generated, the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first generation of the 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. This means that the number of times the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

  Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 15 are arranged in time series. Among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, according to the drive data designated by the pointer, the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. Is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 15 is used to perform continuous transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I / O port. When continuous transmission of serial I / O ports for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is started, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached is first set. A drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 shown in FIG. 7 based on the drive data designated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series. Door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c and created, and the peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. Frame decoration It is set to send a dynamic amplifier board-side motor data storage area 4150Caf. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies the transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores the transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first 1 byte of the door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the top address of the area 4150caf is used to drive the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the serial I / O port for writing. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the transmission shift register is synchronized with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. 1 byte of data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac receives the transmission interrupt request of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a trigger (in the present embodiment, the serial I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor). The peripheral control CPU core 4150aa is triggered by the fact that the 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of the 1-byte data.). Is not using a bus, the remaining door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf is byte by byte, the external bus 4150h, and the peripheral control bus controller. 4150ad, and via the peripheral bus 4150ai, By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the decoration drive amplifier board motor, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. To transmit the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and continuously transmit by the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I / O port. Is going.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also in this case, the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. 15 is utilized to perform serial transmission for the motor drive board serial I / O port. When the serial transmission for the motor drive board serial I / O port is started, first, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 4150cae of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached is configured. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided in the game board 4 shown in FIG. 8 based on the drive data designated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series. And the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the solenoid and the solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 4150b of the peripheral control unit 4150 or the various control data copy areas 4150ce of the peripheral control RAM 4150c, and created. Peripheral control RAM 415 shown in FIG. Set to the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag of c. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a specifies transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac, and stores it in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag. The first 1 byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is transmitted through the external bus 4150h, the peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and the peripheral bus 4150ai to the transmission buffer of the motor drive board serial I / O port. Transfer to a register and write. As a result, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK to set 1 of the transmission shift register. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request of the motor drive board serial I / O port is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port is registered). It is triggered when the written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of 1-byte data.), And the peripheral control CPU core 4150aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag is byte by byte via the external bus 4150h, peripheral control bus controller 4150ad, and peripheral bus 4150ai. , Motor drive board serial I / O port By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. 1 byte of data in the transmission shift register is synchronously started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition processing, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 4 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah, the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies provided on the game board 4 can be acquired.

  Following step S1106, operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this operation unit information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the operation unit 400 are input, so that the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, the dial operation unit). Rotation (rotation direction) history information of 401, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) is created, and the operation unit information acquisition storage area of the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached shown in FIG. Set to 4150 cai. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai, the rotation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 405 can be acquired.

  Following step S1108, a backup process is performed (step S1110), and this routine ends. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external peripheral control RAM 4150c shown in FIG. 15 are copied to the backup first area 4150cb and the backup second area 4150cc, respectively, and backed up. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the peripheral control SRAM 4150d attached externally are copied and backed up in the backup first area 4150db and the backup second area 4150dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 4150c executes the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, every time the 1ms interrupt timer in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 15 occurs. Each time the backup is performed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 4150caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 4150cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 4150cah included in the backup target Bank0 (1 ms) are included. , And the effect information (1 ms) stored in the operation unit information acquisition storage area 4150cai as effect backup information (1 ms), Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1) of the backup first area 4150cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in s) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 4150cc (1ms) and peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank4 (1 ms) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) to Bank1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150cb, and change the contents stored in the beginning address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1 ms). The contents up to the stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of Bank1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa sets the peripheral control D. The contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) are requested by the A controller 4150ac and the copy of the backup first area 4150cb to Bank2 (1 ms) is designated, and the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (1 ms) are changed to Bank0. Up to the contents stored in the end address of (1 ms) are sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of Bank2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 4150cb.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) to the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to Bank3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 4150cc, and Bank0 (1 ms). ) To the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) consecutively by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), the start address of Bank3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 4150cc From the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa requesting the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 4150cc. Shi Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 4150cc from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) continuously for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) All are sequentially copied from the first address of.

  As described above, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of step S1104 to step S1108 described above as the progress of effects are executed within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 52, within the period of about 33.3 ms, various processes related to the effect of step S1012 to step S1032 described above as the progress of the effect are executed. is doing. In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt will occur. After the start of the 1ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control is newly generated by the 1ms timer interrupt process. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a. Even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 4140 on which the sound source built-in VDP 4160a is mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 4140, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, It is possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[14-1-4. Peripheral control block command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 4100 will be described. The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 14 starts main transmission serial data in the peripheral control MPU 4150a when various commands from the main control board 4100 are started to be transmitted as serial data. 1 byte (8 bits) of information is fetched into the reception buffer by the board serial I / O port, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated triggered by this, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte The calculated sum value is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100.

  If the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, if the 1-byte (8-bit) information in the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 is within a period that can be received, The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port for the main control board built in the control MPU 4150a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data is fetched from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main-cycle serial data, is fetched from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode that is the second byte of the main-cycle serial data is set. The value is 2 when taken out from the receive buffer, and the value 3 is taken out when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is taken out from the receive buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status, which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, are sequentially output from the reception buffer. It is determined whether it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter SRXC does not have the value 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the third byte of the main circumference serial data When the sum value is not sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period in which the mode which is the second byte of the main serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has the value 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the status of 3 of the main circumference serial data. When the sum value at the byte is sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, an initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, which has already been fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202, is regarded as a numerical value, and the sum (sum value ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data of the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with gaming balls from the pachinko island facility, and when the gaming balls rub against each other and become charged, electrostatic discharge causes noise, so the pachinko gaming machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a vulnerable environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 4150 regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. Then, the sum (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 4100. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines whether or not the main circumference serial data between the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 is changed to normal circumference data different from the normal one due to the influence of noise. be able to.

  In step S1214, when the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the received main circumference serial data is received. The status allocated as the 1st byte of the above and the mode allocated as the 2nd byte of the main serial data are shown in FIG. 15, the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the received command storage area 4150cac of the peripheral control RAM 4150c externally attached (Step S1216), and this routine ends. The reception command storage area 4150cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are the reception command storage area. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 4150 cac. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. It stores data sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and returns to the beginning when the end of the buffer is reached. Remember. The peripheral control MPU 4150a allocates the status assigned as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the second byte of the main circumference serial data received when the peripheral control MPU4150a stores the status in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. The stored sum is stored in association with the stored mode, and the sum value assigned as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period over which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 4100 is exceeded. If, or, in step S1214, the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[14-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal executed when the power failure notification signal (peripheral power failure notification signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100e of the main control board 4100 shown in FIG. 17 is input from the main control board 4100. The interrupt processing will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 shown in FIG. 14 first activates a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300), and the power failure advance notice signal (peripheral power failure advance notice). Signal) is input (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this determination, this routine is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If 2 macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power outage notice signal is input. When the power outage notice signal is not input, this routine is ended as it is, while the power outage notice is issued. When the signal is input, it is again determined in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

  In step S1304, when the peripheral control unit power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started and the power failure advance notice signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper dish side liquid crystal display device 470 are turned off, the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 4 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko gaming machine 1, even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU 4150a can operate.

  Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 4100, the peripheral control MPU 4150a can receive the commands being transmitted at least for a period of 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a and the external control RAM 4150c externally attached reception command storage area 4150cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) shown in FIG. The received command is stored in ().

  Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 4150ca shown in FIG. 15 are changed to Bank1 (1fr) and the backup first area 4150cb. The peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc at high speed.

  A high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 4150aa of the peripheral control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. As a request factor of the control DMA controller 4150ac, the content stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is designated to be copied to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb. However, the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are changed to the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). The contents up to this point are continuously copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb, and the peripheral control MPU core is copied. 4150aa transfers the content stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the request command area of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 4150cb. From the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) with copy specified , A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 4150Cb.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU core 4150aa includes the content stored in the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. Specifying a copy to the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) from the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) All the contents up to this point are copied sequentially by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) from the top address of the received command storage area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc, and peripheral control is performed. The PU core 4150aa stores the contents stored in the received command storage area 4150cc included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4150ac into the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc. To the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the received command storage area 4150cac included in Bank0 (1fr). , A predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 4150cc.

  Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is input (step S1312). If the power failure notice signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, the peripheral control MPU 4150a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 4150af shown in FIG. 15 and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e shown in FIG. 14 to prevent the peripheral control MPU 4150a from being reset. ..

  On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is input. By continuously determining in this way, when the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU4150a outputs the clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT4150af and the peripheral control external WDT4150e. Cannot be output and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 4150a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 4150a is reset, the peripheral controller power-on process shown in FIG. 52 is restarted.

  As described above, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues to be input in the endless loop in the determination in step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. The MPU4150a is designed not to be reset. On the other hand, when the input of the power failure notification signal is canceled in the endless loop without being continued in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed, and therefore the peripheral control built-in WDT 4150af and the peripheral control external WDT 4150e are connected. The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage notification signal interrupt process, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like and the noise is generated for a period of more than 2 microseconds and the determination at step S1302 is passed, If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is canceled in the endless loop in the determination in S1312 and is canceled, the peripheral control MPU4150a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting and returning.

  According to the embodiment described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes the main control board 4100 of FIG. 11 and the payout control board 4110 of FIG. The main control board 4100 is a starting area in which the game balls that are shot by the hitting ball launching device 650 of FIG. The main control MPU 4100a of FIG. 11, which is a game control microprocessor for controlling the progress of the game based on the entry into the upper start opening 2101 or the lower start opening 2102, is mounted. The payout control board 4110 controls payout of game balls by the prize ball device 740 of FIG. 5 based on the prize command of FIG. 28 (a), (b) which is a payout command from the main control board 4100. The payout control MPU 4120a of FIG. 12, which is a processor, is installed.

  The main control MPU 4100a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a. The main control built-in RAM can store information about a game even after the power is cut off.

  The payout control MPU 4120a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU 4120a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information about payout even after the power is cut off.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment further includes the operation switch 860a shown in FIG. When the operation switch 860a is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 32 is performed after the power is turned on, the information about the game stored in the main control internal RAM is erased. For outputting the RAM clear signal of FIG. 19 for main control MPU4100a which is a game control microprocessor, and during the period when the determination process of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process of FIG. Then, the RAM clear function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 24 to the payout control MPU 4120a, which is the payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing the information related to the payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and turning on the power. From the beginning, the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. If the operation is performed after a period in which the determination process in step S16 is performed (or a period in which the determination process in step S512 in the payout control unit power-on process in FIG. 35 is performed after the power is turned on), the prize ball device 740 is operated. As an error canceling signal for canceling the error that has occurred with respect to the error canceling function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 24 to the payout control microprocessor which is the payout control microprocessor without outputting the RWMCLR signal to the main control MPU4100a which is the game control microprocessor, It is a combination of.

  As described above, when the operation switch 860a is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 32 is performed after the power is turned on, the game stored in the main control internal RAM is stored. The RAM clear signal of FIG. 19 for erasing the information regarding is output to the main control MPU4100a which is a game control microprocessor, and the determination processing of step S512 in the payout control unit power-on processing of FIG. When operated within a predetermined period, the RAM clear which outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 24 to the payout control MPU 4120a which is the payout control microprocessor as a RAM clear signal for deleting the information related to the payout stored in the payout control internal RAM. Functions and processing from power-on to power-on of the main control side of FIG. If the operation is performed after the period in which the determination process of step S16 in step S16 is performed (or the period in which the determination process of step S512 in the power-on process of the payout controller in FIG. 35 is performed after the power is turned on), the prize ball device is operated. As an error canceling signal for canceling the error generated with respect to 740, the error canceling function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 24 to the payout control microprocessor MPU4120a without outputting to the main control MPU4100a which is the game control microprocessor. , And the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be provided with two different functions, that is, a RAM clear function and an error clear function, by operating one operation switch 860a. Therefore, the RAM clear function and the error clearing function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the touch panel 480 is provided on the door frame 5 that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3 so that the operation surface overlaps the display area of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470. The effect control program is a selection display object image data or operation menu background image data used for displaying the read selection display object stored in advance in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b by the sound source built-in VDP 4160a under the control of the peripheral control MPU 4140a. 62, the operation liquid crystal display device 470 (second display device) is caused to display the operation menu screen in a display mode in which at least one selection display object is superimposed on the operation menu background image as shown in FIG. 62 (selection display). Object display control means). Specifically, on this operation menu screen, for example, an operation for switching between a volume light quantity selection display object for volume / light quantity reset and an operation means (production button and touch panel 470) used in player participation type production. For beginners who imitate a game ball with a means switching selection display object, an extra selection display object that imitates a violent person who wears sunglasses and calls himself a "bomb king", and a phrase "first pachinko" that draws the line of sight of an unfamiliar pachinko beginner The selected display objects are arranged and displayed at substantially equal intervals along the horizontal direction, and the selected display object arranged substantially at the center is displayed slightly larger than the other selected display objects.

  As shown in FIG. 63, the operator touches the contact surface of the touch panel 480 with his / her finger F at the position of the selected display object for beginner displayed on the display area of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 or slightly on the right side, and from right to left. When it is slid toward, the effect control program reduces and displays the above bonus selection display object based on the contact state of the contact surface of the touch panel 480 and expands the selection display object for beginners, for example, as a candidate to be selected next. 64, and the selected display objects are moved to the left as shown in FIG.

[First Example of Wave Changing Effect]
Next, the wave changing effect will be described. When a player is playing a game and a big hit does not come easily, in a so-called addicted state, I feel that some players think that it may not be possible even if they continue playing as it is, I feel awkward As a result, the interest in the game may be reduced and the game may be stopped. Furthermore, by giving up the game, the operating rate of the gaming machine in the gaming hall also decreases.
Thinking that you may not be in luck when you are in such a state, you can reset your feelings by taking a meal break etc., and you may be able to get the flow of the big hit lottery, Many players have the so-called occult idea.
As an effect that the player can freely select and perform for such a player, a wave changing effect is an effect that causes the player to change the flow of the game.

Next, a series of flow of the wave changing effect will be described.
When the player taps the contact surface of the touch panel 480 corresponding to the bonus selection display object displayed in the display area of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470, the display content of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 is switched to the bonus screen. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130, when the fortune telling selection display having a fortune telling function is on the left side of the screen and the big hit lottery is not in the center of the screen, the probability of the big hit lottery increases. A wave change selection display object for performing an effect reminiscent of a player, and a calculator selection display object having a calculator function is displayed on the right side of the screen.

  When the contact surface of the touch panel 480 corresponding to the wave change selection display object displayed on the bonus screen of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 is tapped, as shown in FIG. 131, the player is asked whether or not to perform the wave change effect. The wave change confirmation screen for selection is displayed. Tap the contact surface of the touch panel 480 corresponding to the image displayed as “Yes” on the left side of the screen displayed in the display area of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 to start the wave changing effect and “No” on the right side of the screen. When the contact surface of the touch panel 480 corresponding to the displayed image is tapped, the wave changing effect is not started and the display returns to the bonus screen.

  When "Yes" is selected by the player on the wave change confirmation screen, as shown in FIG. 132, an image of splashing waves on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 (wave change effect image). Is displayed to indicate that the wave changing effect is being performed. At that time, in order to increase the sense of presence of the effect, a sound effect such as “dodododo” may be emitted from the speaker 130. The wave changing effect image may be displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900.

  After that, when a predetermined time has passed, as shown in FIG. 133, a wave changing effect completion image for notifying that the wave changing effect has ended is displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 480. As a result, the player can be notified that the wave changing effect has been completed. The wave change effect completion image may be displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900.

  In addition, the wave changing effect is not an effect that actually increases the probability that the big hit lottery will be drawn, but the player who saw the effect remembers the feeling that the flow of the game may have changed, and it depends on the lottery means. Since it is possible to give the player an expectation that the probability of the jackpot lottery will be high, it is possible to maintain the player's feeling that he / she wants to win even if he / she is in a hooked state. By continuing the game, it is possible to increase the operating rate of gaming machines in the gaming hall.

[Second Embodiment in Wave Changing Effect]
Next, a second embodiment of the wave changing effect will be described.
The first example of the wave changing effect described above is an effect that makes it appear that the probability that a jackpot lottery will come when the wave changing effect is selected is completed, and is completed at that time. Although there is no change in the effect related to, in the present embodiment, after the wave changing effect is performed by the operation of the player, the symbol is changed when the game ball is won at the starting opening, and the predetermined The appearance, voice, etc. of an effect (hereinafter, also referred to as a lottery effect) that is triggered by a condition are changed by a predetermined lottery (for example, 10 fluctuations) (hereinafter, a change effect after wave change). After performing the wave changing effect, the subsequent lottery effect changes compared to before performing the wave changing effect, so it is possible to make the player feel that the jackpot effect is more likely to arrive. It will be possible.

[Example of change production after wave change]
Next, a series of flow of change effect after wave change will be described below with reference to FIG.
FIG. 134 is a diagram showing a series of flows of the change effect after the wave change.
First, when the lottery effect is not performed in the first liquid crystal display device 1900, when the so-called symbol variation is stopped (FIG. 134 (A)), the wave change selection displayed on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 is selected. When the display object is selected by the player (FIG. 134 (B)), a wave changing effect is performed (FIG. 134 (C)).
After the wave changing effect is performed by the player's operation, the image CGT simulating the ladybird appears in the subsequent wave changing changing effect (FIG. 134 (D)). An image that did not exist in the lottery effect before the wave changing effect (normal lottery effect) appears in the lottery effect immediately after the wave changing effect (change effect after wave changing) performed by the player's operation. , The player who saw it noticed that the image that did not appear so far is displayed, thinking that the wave of the game has really changed and the luck has come around, the interest in the game has increased, It is possible to inspire the player to continue playing the game.

The change effect after wave change described above causes a character image to appear in the lottery effect, but other examples will be given below.
1) The background image in the lottery effect is different from the image before the wave changing effect.
For example, if the background image related to the lottery effect before the wave changing effect is an image depicting the streetscape in the morning, even if it is an image of the same cityscape in the change effect after the wave changing, the background image in the evening, etc. By changing, even if the contents of the effect itself are the same, it is possible to make you feel like you are watching a completely different effect, and for the player who notices that the background image is changing, the same content Even if it's a staging, there is a difference in the background, so it is possible that it might be a hot staging, and the interest in the game is increased, and it is possible to keep the game going.

2) The music played during the change production after the wave change is different from the music of the normal lottery production.
After the wave changing effect is performed by the player's operation, the music of the lottery effect is changed from that before the wave changing effect is performed. The player who listened to the changed music recalls that the appearance may be the same, but it may be a hot production because the music is different, so the expectation for the jackpot lottery increases and it becomes possible to increase the interest in the game.

3) The color of the character image appearing in the lottery effect is different from the color before the wave changing effect is performed.
The character image that appears in the normal lottery effect also appears in the change effect after wave change, but since the color of the character image that appears in the change effect after wave change has changed, the player who sees it sees it. , Even if the images have the same content, the colors are different, so I think that it is a hot production, the expectation for the jackpot lottery increases, and it becomes possible to increase the interest in the game.

4) The number of character images appearing in the lottery effect is different from the number before the wave changing effect is performed.
Although the character image that appears in the normal lottery effect also appears in the change effect after wave change, the character image that appears in the change effect after wave change appears in a large amount compared to the normal lottery effect, In addition, since it changes to a mode in which it appears less than the normal lottery effect, the player who sees it notices that the number of character images appearing in the normal lottery effect is changing, Recalling that it may be a hot production because the number of appearances is different, the expectation for the big hit lottery increases and it becomes possible to increase the interest in the game.

5) It is assumed that the probability of selecting an effect that prompts the player to input an operation is higher than that before performing the wave changing effect.
As the contents of the conventionally known lottery effect, a player participation type effect that enhances the expectation for the big hit lottery by utilizing the buttons that the player can operate and operating at a predetermined timing However, by performing the wave changing effect, the content of the effect after that is compared with the normal lottery effect, and more effects that prompt the player to operate the operation buttons, the touch panel, etc. are selected. And By increasing the ratio of the productions where the interest in the game can be increased more than in the ordinary lottery production, the expectation for the jackpot lottery is increased and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

  Further, the change effect after the wave change in this embodiment starts when the wave change effect is performed by the operation of the player, and the manner of the subsequent lottery effect is a predetermined change from before the wave change effect is performed. It has been described that the number of times of change (for example, 10 times of change) reaches a predetermined number of times of change and the time is changed to a normal lottery effect, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Below, the opportunity to switch from the normal lottery effect to the change effect after wave change, the opportunity to switch from the change effect after wave change to the normal lottery effect, in other words, another example of the start and end of the change effect after wave change will be presented. .

1) After the wave changing effect is performed, the normal lottery effect is performed a predetermined number of times, and then the wave changing effect is changed to the changed effect.
In the case where the post-wave change change effect is performed immediately after the wave change effect is performed by the operation by the player, depending on the player, if the wave change effect is performed, the post-wave change change effect is always performed. , It may remind you that the wave of the game is not changing, but after the wave change effect is generated, the normal lottery effect is specified after the wave change effect is generated. By performing the change effect after the wave is changed after the number of times of change or after the lapse of a predetermined time, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned recollection, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

2) Each time the wave changing effect is performed, the normal lottery effect and the post-wave changing effect are switched.
With the above configuration, for example, the first player performs the wave changing effect, switches from the normal lottery effect to the wave changing and changing effect, and after the game is finished, the second player starts the game. Then, the game is started in a state of performing the change effect after the wave change. When the second player performs the wave changing effect in that state, the change effect after the wave changing is switched to the normal change effect. The second player starts the game from the state of performing the change effect after the wave change, and thus recalls that the content of the normal lottery effect is hotter than the change effect after the wave change. As a result, the same effect as when switching from the normal lottery effect to the change effect after the wave change is produced, and the interest in the game can be increased.

3) After switching to the change effect after the wave change, the configuration is changed to the normal lottery effect when a predetermined time elapses.
The end of the change effect after wave change is triggered by the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes), so that the end of the change effect after wave change is changed by a predetermined number of changes, and thus the change after wave change is changed. By making it difficult to measure the end timing of the effect, it is possible to suppress patterning by the player.

4) After the wave is changed, the change effect is switched to, and then, the normal lottery effect is changed at a predetermined timing.
By making the end of the change effect after wave change, for example, the timing when the big hit lottery or the small hit lottery is won, the player increases the probability that the big change or small hit lottery wins the change effect after wave change. Considering that it is equivalent to the so-called probability variation state, it is possible to increase the interest in the game by recalling that the probability that the big hit lottery will come by the wave changing effect has increased.

  Up to now, the change effect after the wave change has been described as being switched from the normal lottery effect immediately after performing the wave change effect, or after a predetermined number of fluctuations and a predetermined period of time, but the invention is not limited to this. The post-change effect may be a normal lottery effect or a post-wave-change change effect determined by lottery when a game ball enters the starting opening after performing the wave changing effect. Hereinafter, it will be described in detail according to a specific implementation method.

[Specific implementation method in change production after wave change]
Next, a specific method of performing the change effect after the wave change will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, when the control command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is received by the command receiving means 4560, the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device are based on this. The peripheral control unit 4150 and the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 have various functions for controlling the 470. That is, as the production table corresponding to the winning lottery in the normal lottery production, the normal hitting time production mode table and the normal out-of-time production mode table are stored in advance, and further correspond to the winning lottery after the wave changing performance, The wave change hitting time effect mode table 4603 and the wave change off time effect mode table are stored in advance, and the effect modes in the step effect and the development effect are determined based on these tables. .. Before the wave change effect is performed, the effect mode is determined from the effect mode table of the normal hit time effect mode table or the normal deviation time effect mode table, and after the wave change effect is performed, the wave change hit time effect. The effect mode is determined from the effect table of the mode table or the wave disengagement effect mode table.

  First, the above-mentioned four effect mode tables will be described in detail. The normal hit time effect mode table and the wave changing hit time effect mode table are used in the case of a big hit (or a small hit), and a random number for effect determination (described later) and an effect mode (here, effect in step effect and development effect). Pattern). Further, the normal disengagement effect mode table and the wave change disengagement effect mode table are tables used in the case of disengagement, and show the relationship between the effect determination random number and the effect pattern.

  Next, the flow until the change effect is performed after changing the wave will be described. When the wave changing effect is performed by the operation of the player, the effect modes to be determined are the normal changing time effect mode table and the normal deviation time effect mode table, the wave changing time effect mode table and the wave changing time effect mode table. Switch to. Then, in the lottery effect triggered by the game medium being driven in and the game medium entering the upper starting opening 2101, when the win / loss command included in the control command indicates a big hit (or a small hit) The effect mode is determined from the wave change hitting time effect mode table, and after the wave change after change effect described above, the big hit effect (or the small hit effect) is performed. After that, one of the final stages of the above-described post-wave change change effect is used as a trigger, and the effect mode table to be determined is the normal change time effect mode table from the wave change hit time effect mode table and the wave change off time effect mode table. The mode is switched to the effect mode table of the normal mode effect mode table.

  In addition, in the big hit performance when the wave change hitting time effect mode table is determined, the effect mode of the big hit effect may be made to remind the player that the wave change effect has been performed. For example, the image (the image of splashing waves) displayed during the wave changing effect is displayed on the background during the jackpot effect. As a result, the player who is aware of the background can remember that the jackpot has actually arrived because he has performed the wave changing effect, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

  In addition, in the wave change hitting time effect mode table and the wave change off time effect mode table, not all the effect modes are post-wave change change effects, but the rate at which the wave change after change effects is determined is the normal hit time. It is higher than the production mode table and the normal off-time production mode table. That is, the normal lottery effect may be determined even in the state where the change-over-hit effect mode table and the wave-change-off effect mode table are switched. Further, even when the effect mode is determined from the normal hit time effect mode table and the normal deviation time effect mode table, a small percentage compared to the wave change hit time effect mode table and the wave change off time effect mode table Therefore, the same effect as the change effect after the wave change may be determined.

  The specific example of the post-wave changing change effect has been presented above, but the present invention is not limited to what has been described so far and can be implemented in various modes.

[First pachinko]
When the pachinko selection display object KHB for the first time is tapped with the finger F as shown in FIG. 65, the effect control program specifies the detection point based on the contact portion according to the contact state of the contact surface of the touch panel 480 (detection point acquisition). means). Furthermore, the effect control program, at the corresponding detection point in the display area of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470, the first pachinko game based on the ring-shaped image data read from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b (effect control storage unit). A small initial ring-shaped display object KHB is displayed at the position of the selected display object (initial display control means).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 67, the effect control program enlarges and displays the above-mentioned “first time pachinko” word to make the player visually recognize that the first time pachinko selection display object has been selected. As shown in FIG. 68, the effect control program reduces the density while leaving an afterimage of the annular display object in the middle of a display mode in which the initial annular display object is continuously enlarged with time at the detection point. While displaying the final annular display object by continuously enlarging while extinguishing the first pachinko selection display object corresponding to the detection point, the next transition destination screen associated with the first pachinko selection display object is displayed. Display (afterimage display control means).

  By doing so, the operator of the touch panel 480 can visually recognize the annular display object KHB displayed in the display area of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 through the contact surface in accordance with his / her operation. Here, nowadays, it is possible to display a fine effect, and generally, even if the response of the touch panel is very slight, the player does not respond to his / her operation at first glance. It is likely that the psychology of actively recognizing that this might be the case and actively participating in the player participation type production becomes difficult to work. However, according to the present embodiment, even if a fine effect display is possible, an afterimage of the ring-shaped display object KHB remains according to the operation of the operator, so that the operator can operate even if the response to the operation is slightly delayed. It is possible to visually confirm that the response to is surely made.

  By the way, the afterimage display as described above is performed constantly on the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470, but instead of the production control program, an error release navigation command (second error release) associated with the operation of the payout control board 4110 operation switch 860a is performed. When the command) is received from the main control board 4100, the command mode may be temporarily switched to the test mode for confirming the operation of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 and then executed. That is, although the effect control program normally does not perform the afterimage display using the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470, after the operation switch 860a is operated, the control mode is switched to the test mode to perform the afterimage display. You can In this case, the effect control program controls to switch from the test mode to the normal mode when the operation switch 860a is operated again. In this way, according to the operator's convenience, the display operation of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 can be temporarily tested (for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is shipped) in the test mode, or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 can be used. The afterimage can be constantly displayed as a part of the effect.

  On the other hand, in the operation menu screen as shown in FIG. 69, the operator touches the touch surface of the touch panel 480 corresponding to the volume adjustment selection display object displayed in the display area of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 as shown in FIG. When tapping is selected, the effect control program displays a small initial ring-shaped display object KHB as shown in FIG. 71 based on the contact portion based on the contact state. This effect control program causes the final annular display object KHB to be displayed as shown in FIG. 72 via the annular display object KHB in the middle of the display mode in which the initial annular display object KHB is continuously enlarged (final display Control means). That is, the effect control program, for example, continuously expands the annular display object KHB from the initial annular display object KHB to the final annular display object KHB, or displays the annular display object KHB stepwise in 10 steps, for example. The object KHB may be enlarged.

  In this way, as described above, the operator of the touch panel 480 can see the annular display object that is transmitted through the contact surface and displayed in the display area of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 according to his / her operation. You can Here, if the sluggish reaction still remains in today's case where a fine effect display is becoming possible, when such a precise effect display can be realized in the future, it will be At first glance, it may be possible to give a relatively uncomfortable feeling to the player. However, according to the present embodiment, the appearance (display) of the annular display object displayed in the display area of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 triggered by touching the contact surface of the touch panel 480 enables accurate visual recognition. Since the response inspection can be performed, even if a more detailed effect display can be realized in the future, it is possible to prevent the operator from feeling uncomfortable due to the direct response to the operation.

  On the other hand, similarly, on the operation menu screen as shown in FIG. 69, the operator also touches the touch panel 480 corresponding to the volume adjustment selection display object displayed in the display area of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 as shown in FIG. 71, when the contact surface of the contact portion based on the contact state is larger than the predetermined contact area (that is, when the pressing force is strong), the effect control program is displayed in FIG. As shown in FIG. 72, at least a part of the intermediate ring-shaped display KHB is omitted after displaying the small initial ring-shaped display KHB, or without displaying the final ring-shaped display KHB. You may allow it. When the pressing force is strong in this way, the initial annular display object KHB in the display area that is visually recognized by the operator's finger through the contact surface of the touch panel 480, or even the annular display object in the middle of the part. Although the KHB is also hidden, the production control program omits the display control of a part of the annular display objects KHB in this way, thereby reducing unnecessary display that cannot be visually recognized by the player and reducing the processing load. can do.

  After the final ring-shaped display object KHB is displayed as described above, the effect control program, based on the tone adjustment background image data read from the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 4160b, sets the volumes 1 to 6 as shown in FIG. A volume adjustment background image including the scale VSCL is overlapped with a volume adjustment icon OCI with a note mark based on the volume setting icon image data similarly read from the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 4160b so as to be slidable along the volume scale VSCL. The volume adjustment screen of the aspect is displayed.

  When the operator taps the volume adjustment icon OCI on the volume adjustment screen with the finger F and slides it to the left as shown in FIG. 73, the effect control program causes the detection point based on the contact portion based on the contact state. Based on the annular image data read from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b to the corresponding detection point in the display area of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 (second display device). First, the small initial ring-shaped display object KHB is displayed (initial display control means).

  Further, when the operator slides the volume adjustment icon OCI with the finger F along the volume scale VSC as shown in FIG. 74, the effect control program causes the contact portion based on the contact state to be touched as shown in FIG. 73. A movement locus of a certain position (hereinafter, referred to as an initial position) is detected for each movement detection point (movement locus acquisition means). Then, as shown in FIG. 74, the effect control program independently and continuously expands the initial annular display object KHB at each movement detection point along the detected movement locus as time passes. The final ring-shaped display object KHB is displayed via the ring-shaped display object KHB in the middle of the display mode (moving locus display control means). At this time, as shown in FIG. 75, the effect control program moves and displays the volume adjustment icon OCI so as to slide along the volume scale in response to the slide of the finger F tapping the volume adjustment icon OCI, and finally displays. Similarly, as shown in FIG. 76, similarly, the display mode is such that the volume adjustment icon OCI is moved to the position of the finger F which has completed the slide, via the display of the circular display object in the middle. When the operator releases the finger F from the contact surface of the touch panel 480, the effect control program detects the contact state on the contact surface, and since any contact object is lost, the final contact is made as shown in FIG. 77. The final enlarged ring display object is displayed near the surface.

  In this way, as described above, the operator of the touch panel 480 visually recognizes the annular display object KHB displayed on the display area of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 through the contact surface according to the operation of the operator. be able to. Therefore, at each movement detection point along the movement locus of the contact portion on the contact surface by the operator's operation, the final ring-shaped display object KHB is displayed via the intermediate ring-shaped display object KHB which is represented like an afterimage of the initial ring-shaped display object KHB. Since the ring-shaped display object KHB is displayed, the operator does not need to memorize the most recent operation history along the movement locus, and is less likely to feel stress during the operation.

When it is desired to switch the operation means used for player participation type effect from the touch panel 480 to the effect button and from the effect button to the touch panel 480, it is displayed in the display area of the upper plate liquid crystal display device 470 as shown in FIG. 129. When the contact surface of the touch panel 480 corresponding to the selected operation means switching selection display object is tapped, it switches.
When the touch panel 480 is selected from the effect buttons as the operation means used for the player participation type effect, depending on the player, the viewpoint from the first liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 at the time of effect. When moving the screen, it may take some time for the eyes to come into focus, causing fatigue in the eyes, or it may be difficult to produce using a touch panel that requires various operations. In that case, the first liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device is changed without changing the line of sight by switching the operation means used for the player participation type effect to an effect button capable of operating the effect without looking at the hand. Since it is possible to participate in the production while looking at 3252, it is possible to reduce the burden on the eyes due to the movement of the viewpoint, and since the operation required for the player participation type production is limited to pressing the button, the operation of the touch panel is performed. Since a player who dislikes the game can participate in the production and can enjoy the production without feeling any pain, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  On the contrary, the player who is tired of the player participation type effect of simply pressing the button switches the operation means for participating in the player participation type effect from the touch panel 480 to the effect button, thereby touch panel 480. You can enjoy the performance with various operations (tap, flick, etc.). As a result, the motivation for the game is increased, and the interest in the game can be further enhanced.

Further, when the operation means for participating in the player participation type effect is switched from the touch panel 480 to the effect button, the operation is not performed while watching the upper plate side liquid crystal display content 470, and therefore, the upper plate side liquid crystal display during the effect. The content (sub effect) displayed on the device 470 needs to be displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900.
As a display method, the sub effect and the display content (main effect) displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900 are alternately displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the progress of the effect, or the first liquid crystal display. The effect area of the display device 1900 may be divided into two areas vertically, horizontally, or diagonally, and the main effect and the sub effect may be separately displayed. Alternatively, the main effect may be displayed on the second liquid crystal display device 3252 and the sub effect may be displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900, or vice versa.

  In the case of the player participation type effect using the effect buttons, the player participates in the effect without looking at the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, but the touch panel 480 is used by adopting the above configuration. The display content of the effect can be displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 instead of being displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Thereby, it is possible to enjoy the effect contents comparable to the player participation type effect using the touch panel 480.

  By the way, the effect control program described above may be controlled so as to enlarge the size of the final annular display object KHB in proportion to the maximum width of the contour area of the contact portion based on the contact state of the touch panel 480 described above, for example. Good (final display control means, residual image display control means, movement locus display means). Specifically, this effect control program relatively increases the size of the final ring-shaped display object KHB when the contour area is relatively large, while it finalizes when the contour area is relatively small. The size of the annular display KHB is relatively reduced. By doing so, the size of the final ring-shaped display object KHB is proportional to the pressing force of the contact surface by the operator, so that the operator can feel how much this pressing force was afterwards. Can be recognized.

  Instead of or in addition to this, this effect control program controls the enlargement mode of the final annular display object KHB in proportion to, for example, a change in the contour area in the contact portion based on the contact state of the touch panel 480 described above per unit time. It is also possible to do so (final display control means, residual image display control means, movement trajectory display means). Specifically, when the change of the contour area per unit time is large, the size of the annular display object KHB on the way is changed in a relatively short time, while the contour area per unit time is changed. If the change is small, the size of the annular display KHB on the way is changed in a relatively long time. With this configuration, when the operator touches the contact surface in a relatively short time, the annular display object KHB expands relatively quickly, while when the operator touches the contact surface in a relatively long time, the annular display object is displayed. Since the object KHB expands relatively slowly, not only can the reaction of the touch panel 480 according to the operation mode of the operator be inspected more accurately, but also the player operates an object in the real world. It becomes possible to obtain a feeling of operation closer to the feeling of operation at the time.

[Embodiment of production explanation information]
Next, the effect explanation information will be described. In recent years, many new game machines tend to be provided in a short period of time, and it may be difficult for a player to properly understand the effect of each model and the meaning of the effect. Therefore, the player reads the information magazine about the game machine in advance, or reads the booklet explaining the game machine, which is arranged in the hall where the game machine is installed, to show the effect and its effect. You may play a game by understanding the meaning. However, since it takes time and labor to read the information magazine or the like in advance, it is not uncommon for some players to feel uncomfortable and enter the game without reading the information magazine or the like in advance.

  In addition, there are cases where cards that explain the game specifications and effects of the game machine are installed for each game machine, and by allowing the player to read these cards while playing the game, In some cases, information such as game specifications and effects to be developed may be obtained. However, when trying to obtain information such as game specifications and effects of the gaming machine from the cards while playing the game, the player looks away from the gaming machine and reads the cards, so the effect image on the gaming machine is displayed. You might miss it. In addition, since the card has a lot of explanations about game specifications and effects that are played on the gaming machine, it is necessary to find the place where the information the player wants is written on the card. It may take some time, and some players may find it annoying.

  Therefore, some players may give up on obtaining information such as game specifications and effects in advance and play a game. It is possible to enjoy the game to some extent by just looking at the game specifications and effects, especially with recent game machines, without accurately understanding information such as the game specifications and effects of the game machine. It goes without saying that it is more enjoyable to play the game by understanding the meanings of the respective game specifications and effects. However, it may be difficult for a person with little experience in playing the game to understand the meaning of the game specification and the effect by simply repeating the game without obtaining information from others. Therefore, a game may be played without the player's full understanding of the new game specifications and effects.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the meaning of the presentation information performed by the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Hereinafter, description will be given with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example of display on the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 in the present embodiment. On the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect image in the middle of the wave changing effect, which is also shown in FIG. 132, is displayed. However, depending on the player, even if he or she looks at this effect image, only the information on the symbol itself that a large wave is occurring may be grasped, and the meaning represented by this effect image may not be grasped. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect image is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 by displaying "The effect display for changing the flow of the customer's game is displayed." It is possible for the player to understand that the effect image is displayed to change the flow of the game.

  Further, the information displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is displayed after a preset delay time after the effect image is displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900. Accordingly, when the player cannot understand the meaning of the effect image displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900, it is not necessary to hurry to shift the line of sight to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and the effect information is surely obtained. It becomes possible to confirm the contents. The value of the delay time can be set appropriately, but it is preferably set within a range of approximately 2 to 5 seconds.

  FIG. 136 is an example showing another display form. In the first liquid crystal display device 1900, various effect displays which differ depending on the game machine are displayed during the game, but when the meaning represented by the effect display developed in the first liquid crystal display device 1900 cannot be grasped at that time. There is. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the effect display developed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900 represents, by displaying on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, “probability change probability 70%”. It becomes possible for the player to grasp a specific expected value of the probability variation, which is difficult to grasp simply by looking at the effect display image displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900. Even in the case of the present embodiment, the information displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is displayed after a preset delay time after the effect display is displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900. Preferably.

  FIG. 137 is an effect information table 4152 showing correspondence between effect display developed by the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and other effect devices and effect explanation information corresponding to the effect display. Although not shown, it is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 4150b in the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG.

  The effect information table 4152 is composed of six items, and includes effect information 4152a, effect 4152b, effect time 4152c, effect explanation information 4152d, effect explanation information display time 4152e, and delay time 4152f. The production information 4152a stores a plurality of series of production information provided in each gaming machine. Here, as the effect information 4152a, there is also one that is completed by one operation of one member such as turning on a specific lamp, but one effect information like the effect display in the first liquid crystal display device 1900. 4152a may be composed of a series of multiple effects 4152b. In this effect information table 4152, for example, A of effect information 4152a indicates that it is composed of four effects 4152b, a1, a2, a3, and a4.

The effect time 4152c is set and stored for each effect 4152b in units of seconds.
As the effect explanation information 4152d, information corresponding to each effect information 4152a or effect 4152b is prepared and stored in advance. Here, depending on the type of the effect information 4152a, there is a meaning of effect for each effect 4152b that makes up the effect information 4152a, such as A of the effect information 4152a, and like the case of B of the effect information 4152a. In some cases, a plurality of effects 4152b configure one effect information 4152a as a series, and the effect information 4152a as a whole has one meaning. Therefore, in the case of A of the effect information 4152a, effect explanation information 4152d, a1 ', a2', a3 ', a4' is set for each individual effect 4152b, a1, a2, a3, a4, and the effect information 4152a is set. In the case of B, one effect explanation information 4152d is set for the entire effect information 4152a.

  The effect explanation information display time 4152e is set to the time for displaying each effect explanation information 4152d. The effect explanation information display time 4152e corresponds to the effect explanation information 4152d. When the effect explanation information 4152d is set for each effect 4152b, it is set accordingly, and the effect explanation information 4152d is set for each effect information 4152a. If set to, it is also set accordingly. Further, the effect explanation information display time 4152e can be set to the same length as the effect time 4152c, or when the effect explanation information 4152d is set for each effect information 4152a, the effect time of the entire effect information 4152a is compared. Since it is a relatively long time, the effect explanation information display time 4152e is set to a time shorter than the effect time of the entire effect information 4152a, or, as will be described later, the effect explanation information 4152d is a predetermined value after the effect information 4152a is displayed. Since the display is made with the delay time, the effect explanation information display time 4152e can be set shorter by the delay time, and the effect explanation information 4152d can be ended at the same time as the effect information 4152a is ended. ..

  A delay time 4152f is set in the effect explanation information 4152d. The delay time 4152f is set in consideration of the time difference between the player looking at the effect on the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and the like and then shifting his line of sight to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and reading the effect explanation information. Can be appropriately set in about 2 to 5 seconds according to the type of effect information.

  In the present embodiment, the effect information 4152a has been described by taking the effect information 4152a displayed by the first liquid crystal display device 1900 as an example, but the effect information 4152a is not limited to the display on the first liquid crystal display device 1900. It does not mean that the effect is generated by lighting the decoration lamp or the sound from the speaker. With respect to these effects, it may be difficult to understand the intention of the effect only by lighting the decoration lamp or the sound, so it is useful to explain the meaning by the effect explanation information 4152d.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the effect explanation information 4152d is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 when the effect is performed. Since the effect explanation information 4152d is displayed on a display device different from the first liquid crystal display device 1900 on which the effect is performed, the player may look at the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 as necessary, but a skilled game A person who understands the contents of the effect on the gaming machine may find it annoying that the effect explanation information 4152d is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 every time. Therefore, it is also possible to configure so that the effect explanation information 4152d is not displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 by turning on / off the effect explanation information changeover switch (not shown).

  In addition, depending on the type of the production information 4152a, such that the player does not need the production explanation information 4152d for all the production information 4152a, but wants to see only the production explanation information 4152d for the expected value of the probability change. There may be a request to view the presentation explanation information 4152d. Therefore, the switching stage of the effect explanation information changeover switch is set more finely, for example, in the effect information table 4152, effect explanation information 4152d is displayed for A of effect information 4152a, and effect explanation information for B of effect information 4152a. 4152d may be made non-display so that display / non-display of the effect explanation information 4152d can be switched depending on the type of effect information 4152a and effect 4152b.

[Another embodiment of performance explanation information]
In the embodiment described above, the effect explanation information 4152d is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 when being displayed. As a result, the player can enjoy the effect of the effect information 4152a and shift his line of sight to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 as necessary, so that the effect information 4152d does not hinder the display of the effect information 4152a. The meaning of the effect information 4152a can be understood from the effect explanation information 4152d.

  However, especially if the player has little experience in playing games or a beginner, if the production information 4152a has many unclear points, it is necessary to always confirm the meaning of the production information 4152a. Sometimes it can be annoying to switch eyes to see.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the display of the effect explanation information 4152d can be switched between the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 by the operation setting of the player. Hereinafter, description will be given with reference to the drawings.

  138 and 139 are diagrams showing an example of the display of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 in the present embodiment, and FIG. 138 shows the effect explanation information 4152d in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. FIG. 139 shows an example in which the effect explanation information 4152d is displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900.

  As shown in FIG. 138 and FIG. 139, in the lower right corner of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the effect explanation information display switching icon 482 composed of a circle and vertical arrows is displayed. .. The effect explanation information display switching icon 482 can be operated by the touch panel 480 provided so as to overlap with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470.

  Specifically, when the operation is performed by rubbing the effect explanation information display switching icon 482 from the bottom to the top in the state of FIG. 138, the effect explanation information 4152d is displayed from the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to the first liquid crystal display. Moving to the display device 1900 side, as shown in FIG. 139, the display of the effect explanation information 4152d disappears from the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and the effect explanation information display section at the lower right of the first liquid crystal display device 1900. 1900A, and thereafter, the effect explanation information 4152d is displayed on the effect explanation information display portion 1900A of the first liquid crystal display device 1900.

  On the contrary, when the effect explanation information display switching icon 482 is rubbed from the state of FIG. 139 from top to bottom, the effect explanation information 4152d is displayed from the effect explanation information display unit 1900A of the first liquid crystal display device 1900. , The upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 side, and as shown in FIG. 138, the display of the effect explanation information 4152d disappears from the first liquid crystal display device 1900, and the central plate of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is displayed. After that, the effect explanation information 4152d is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470.

  In this way, by operating the effect explanation information display switching icon 482, the display position of the effect explanation information 4152d can be switched between the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the first liquid crystal display device 1900. As a result, it is possible to switch the display location of the effect explanation information 4152d according to the player's request, and it is possible to display the effect explanation information 4152d according to the taste of the player.

  In the present embodiment, the operation explanation information 4152d is switched by operating the touch panel 480 using the effect explanation information switching icon 482 displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 as an operation unit for switching. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a display switching switch or the like may be provided at a position different from the touch panel 480. Further, similarly to the previous embodiment, it is possible to switch the display explanation switch 4152d so as not to be displayed by operating the display changeover switch or the effect explanation information changeover switch different from the display changeover switch.

  Further, in displaying the effect explanation information 4152d, the effect information table 4152 as shown in FIG. 137 is used as in the previous embodiment. However, the form of the effect information table 4152 is as in the previous embodiment. It is possible to use the same format as the above, and further prepare items related to the display location so that the display method and the like can be selected for displaying on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and displaying on the first liquid crystal display device 1900. It can also be different. For example, when displaying on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, the delay time for display is set to 3 seconds, and when displaying the same content on the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the delay time is set. It is possible to make settings such as shortening somewhat.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as an example of the change in the display mode by the player, the display position of the effect explanation information 4152d is changed to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the first liquid crystal display by the operation of the effect explanation information switching icon 482. Although only the device 1900 can be switched, the example in which the display mode is changed by the operation of the player is not limited to this. Another example will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 140 shows a state in which the effect explanation information 4152d is displayed at substantially the center of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Here, as shown in FIG. 140, when the player touches the effect explanation information 4152d and slides it upward by operating a finger or the like, as shown in FIG. 141, The display location of the effect explanation information 4152d is moved upward in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Conversely, as shown in FIG. 141, when the player touches the effect explanation information 4152d and slides it downward, as shown in FIG. 142, the effect explanation information 4152d. It is also possible to return the display position of the above to the substantially central portion in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, or to change it downward as shown in FIG. 142.

  In this modification, an example of changing the display position of the effect explanation information 4152d on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 has been described, but similarly, the display position of the effect explanation information 4152d on the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is also a game. It can also be changed by an operator's operation. In addition to the above, according to the player's preference, the display mode of the effect explanation information 4152d when it is displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 or the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and other displays are displayed. By setting the size, position, color, etc., it is possible to customize the player's preference.

  In particular, the gaming machines are often arranged in rows in the hall where the gaming machines are installed, and a passage is provided between the rows where the gaming machines are installed so that other players can It is designed so that you can pass freely. Therefore, depending on the player, the player who is playing the game next to him or the other player who passes through the aisle sees his or her own game content and the presentation explanation information 4152d of the effect of the gaming machine. There may be some players who do not want to be known, or conversely, some players who want to positively appeal to other players that their probability of probability variation of their own games is high. In the present embodiment and the modified example, when the player plays the game, not only can the display position of the effect explanation information 4152d be changed so that the player can easily see it, but also the requests of the players of various types as described above. On the other hand, for a player who does not want others to know, it is displayed in a small size in a place that is difficult for other players to see, and conversely, for players who want to appeal to others, it is large so that other players can easily see it. It is also possible to customize the display such as displaying.

[Embodiment for switching display mode of effect explanation information]
In the above-described embodiment and modification, the effect explanation information 4152d is displayed collectively on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the first liquid crystal display device 1900. However, for convenience of production, or in the case of complicated production, the display of the production explanation information 4152d cannot be collectively displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 or the first liquid crystal display device 1900. May be displayed such that the effect explanation information 4152d sequentially moves. FIG. 143 is a diagram showing a state in which the effect explanation information 4152d is sequentially moved and displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. The effect explanation information 4152d is, in order from the head of the explanation, the upper plate side liquid crystal. It is displayed so as to flow at a predetermined speed from the right side of the display device 470.

  FIG. 144 shows a state where the player has touched the effect explanation information 4152d in the state of FIG. 143. As shown in FIG. 144, by touching the touch panel 480 at a position corresponding to the effect explanation information 4152d that is sequentially moved and displayed, as shown in FIG. 145, it is displayed when the player touches. It is stopped and displayed in the state of the effect explanation information 4152d. As a result, the player can stop and display the effect explanation information 4152d which is sequentially moved and displayed, and the player can surely grasp the content of the effect explanation information 4152d which he thinks is necessary. Becomes

Next, when the production explanation information 4152d is touched again from the state shown in FIG. 145 as shown in FIG. 146, the production explanation information 4152d comes to be sequentially moved and displayed again, and FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, the end of the explanation sentence of the effect explanation information 4152d is moved and displayed until it flows to the left side of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470.
The switching between the moving display and the stop display of the effect explanation information 4152d is not limited to once, and the moving display and the stop display can be repeated as many times as the player desires.

  The embodiment in which the display of the effect explanation information 4152d is switched between the moving display state and the stop display state has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the display of the effect explanation information 4152d is described as an example in which the display is sequentially moved from the right side to the left side of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 in one line, but it is sequentially moved in a plurality of columns of two or more lines. It is also possible to set a plurality of columns of display rows in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and to display so as to sequentially move from the lower row to the upper row. In addition, in the present embodiment, the display of the effect explanation information 4152d is displayed horizontally, and the display flows from right to left. However, for example, the display of the effect explanation information 4152d is vertically written and the display is changed from bottom to top. It is possible to make appropriate changes such as the configuration so as to flow into

  Further, in the present embodiment, switching is performed by touching the touch panel 480 provided on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 as a means for switching between the display in which the effect explanation information 4152d sequentially moves and the stop display. However, the switching means is not limited to this, and various methods such as using a button or a switch provided at a position different from the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 can be used.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the effect explanation information 4152d is switched from the moving display state to the stop display state, the display state of the stop display state remains the same as the display state of the moving display state. Also, regarding this, for example, in the moving display state, the display is performed in units of one line, but when in the stop display state, a plurality of lines are displayed in the entire display range of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. It is also possible to change the display format and the like of the effect explanation information 4152d between the moving display state and the stop display state.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 139, even when the effect explanation information 4152d is displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the present embodiment is applied and the display form is changed to the moving display state and the stop state. It is also possible to switch between the display states.

  In the present embodiment, the display of the effect explanation information 4152d is configured to be switched from the moving display state to the stop display state by operating the switching means such as touching the touch panel 480. Instead of the above, it is possible to set the flow speed of the sequential display in the moving display state to a low speed so that the player can easily read the effect explanation information 4152d. Even in this case, it is possible to return to the original moving display state speed by operating the switching means again such as touching the touch panel 480 after the display state at a low speed.

  In the present embodiment, the display of the effect explanation information 4152d is switched from the moving display state to the stop display state by an operation on the switching means such as touching the touch panel 480, and the stop display is performed until the next operation on the switching means is performed. The state continues. Therefore, if the stopped display state continues for a long time, the display of the effect explanation information 4152d may end only partially even after the period in which the effect is performed ends. Therefore, in order to prevent this, a preset stop display state duration is set in advance, and when the predetermined stop display state duration has elapsed after switching from the moving display state to the stop display state, the stop display state is restarted. You may make it switch to a moving display state.

  Further, as still another modified example, as shown in FIG. 148, when the stop display state has passed a predetermined stop display duration, the display of the first effect explanation information 4152d remains in the stop display state. It is also possible to display the next effect explanation information 4152d in another position in a moving display state. As a result, even if the effect display information 4152d is stopped and displayed for a long time, it is possible to avoid the subsequent display of the effect description information 4152d not being displayed.

[15. Second Embodiment]
78 to 80 are views for explaining the second embodiment of the present invention, FIG. 78 is a front view of a gaming machine, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of a door frame, and FIG. 80 is a touch panel of FIG. 79. It is an enlarged view of the vicinity. In the present embodiment, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the touch panel 480 provided so that the operation surface overlaps the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is substantially central in the width direction of the door frame 5 that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3. It is provided in the section. In the touch panel 480, the contact state on the contact surface of the player's touch panel 480 is detected, the coordinate value of the contact surface of the touch panel 480 indicating the center of the contact portion is acquired based on the contact state, and is represented by the coordinate value. The position is specified as the detection point. Further, an operation such as tapping, rubbing, or flicking on the touch panel is discriminated by an internal mechanism (not shown), and is acquired as operation information in the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG.

  The participation of the player in the player participation type effect is performed while driving the game ball into the game area 1100. Since the player normally operates the handle device 500 with the right hand, the operation for the player participation type effect is not performed. Since it is usual to use the left hand which is not used to operate the handle device 500, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the touch panel 480 are arranged substantially in the center of the door frame 5 in the width direction. It is possible to provide an optimal operating environment in the pattern production.

  In addition, the operation unit 400 is arranged on the front side of the upper plate 301 on the left side of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the touch panel 480, and the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the pressure that the player can press. The operation unit 405 is provided, and the operation of the player can be accepted, the dial operation unit 401 can be moved, and the pressing operation unit can be pressed according to the game state. Here, reference numeral 368 is an auxiliary mark which is provided around the touch panel 480 and the operation unit 400 and indicates a portion operated by the player.

  In the present embodiment, the operation unit 400 is provided on the left side of the upper plate-side liquid crystal display device 470 and the touch panel 480 provided at the substantially central portion of the door frame 5 in the width direction, and as described above, Since it is normal for the player to operate the touch panel 480 and the operation unit 400 with the left hand, the operation unit 400 can be easily operated. Further, the operation of the operation unit 400 does not hinder the visual recognition of the display on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. However, the present invention is not limited to the operation unit 400 arranged on the left side of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the touch panel 480, and may be an upper side or a lower side as long as it can be operated by the player without trouble. It may be arranged on the side or the like, and even if it hinders the display of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to some extent, the arrangement on the right side or the like is not excluded.

Further, in the present embodiment, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the touch panel 480 and the operation unit 400 are arranged at different positions in a plan view, but the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the touch panel 480 are arranged. It is also possible to arrange the operation unit 400 so that it overlaps the location where it is present. With such an arrangement, the range operated by the player becomes a limited range, which facilitates the operation by the player.
Further, in the present embodiment, the touch panel 480 is provided so that the operation surface overlaps the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, but the touch panel 480 does not necessarily overlap the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. As described above, the touch panel 480 alone may be provided, or the touch panel 480 may be provided on the operation unit 400. When the touch panel 480 is provided on the operation unit 400, the range of operation by the player becomes a more limited range, and the types of operations of the operation unit 400 can be increased while facilitating the operation by the player. Become.

[16. Third Embodiment]
A third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. An operating portion light emitting device 490 is provided between the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the touch panel 480 and the upper plate 301, and an upper plate light emitting device 492 is provided between the upper plate 301 and the game board 4. ing. Further, in the game area 1100 on the game board 4, a game board light emitting device 2150 is provided near the lower portion of the upper starting opening 2101.
Further, a touch panel light emitting device 494 is provided between the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the touch panel 480 and the operation light emitting device 490.
In the present embodiment, the game board light emitting device 2150 and the operation unit light emitting device 490 suggest the operation timing of the touch panel 480 and the operation unit 400, and the upper plate light emitting device 492 and the touch panel light emitting device 494 are used. When the touch panel 480 is operated, the fact that the operation is being performed is notified.

Since the operation unit light emitting device 490 is located in the vicinity of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the touch panel 480, empirically, when the operation unit light emitting device 490 emits light, the player can operate the touch panel 480 and the operation unit. It can be recognized that 400 is associated with the operation unit light emitting device 490. In addition, since the player knows that the touch panel is touched and operated, it is suggested that the operation unit light emitting device 490 emits light at the timing when the touch panel 480 and the operation unit 400 can be operated. Becomes
Further, the upper plate light emitting device 492 and the touch panel portion light emitting device 494 emit light in accordance with the timing at which the player operates the touch panel 480, or in accordance with the type of operation of the touch panel 480 (touch operation, flick operation, etc.). By changing the mode, it can be recognized that the upper plate light emitting device 492 and the touch panel portion light emitting device 494 are emitting light in response to the operation of the touch panel 480. Therefore, the player can easily understand that the touch panel 480 is operated.

  The operation of the touch panel 480 and the operation unit 400 needs to perform a predetermined operation at a predetermined timing, and the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 also notify the predetermined timing. However, since the liquid crystal display device always emits light by the backlight, even if the predetermined timing of the operation is notified by light emission or the like, the light emission for notification may not be noticed. In addition, since the angle of the line of sight with respect to the liquid crystal display device varies depending on the physique or the like, the player may not be able to see the liquid crystal display device depending on the angle and may not notice the notification. Furthermore, since the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 are located slightly apart from each other, it may be difficult for the player to visually recognize both liquid crystal display devices at the same time. Even if an operation instruction is given on the liquid crystal display device, the player may not notice. As in the present embodiment, by making a suggestion by the light emitting device from the position of the game board 4 to the position of the upper plate 301, the player can surely grasp the operation timing and operation type of the touch panel 480 or the operation unit 400. You can

  98 and 99 show a method of suggesting a specific light emitting device to the touch panel portion. As shown in (a), the game board light emitting device 2150, the upper plate light emitting device 492, the operating portion light emitting device 490, and the touch panel light emitting device 494 can be turned on at the same time, or, as in (b), Only the upper plate light emitting device 492 and the touch panel light emitting device 494 can be turned on at the same time, or only the game board light emitting device 2150 and the operation unit light emitting device 490 can be turned on at the same time as in (c). Also, as in (d), the lights are sequentially turned on from the side closer to the effect display device 1900 to the side closer to the touch panel 480, or the number of light emitting devices to be turned on sequentially as in (e) is increased. You can also go. Further, at present, the suggestions are made by turning on the respective light emitting devices, but it is also possible to make the suggestions by blinking instead of turning on the lights, and vice versa. Further, it is also possible to make a suggestion by using a light emitting device capable of multicolor light emission as each light emitting device and making the emission colors the same.

In addition, by combining the display contents of the liquid crystal display devices, such as displaying “hit!” Or “HIT” on the first liquid crystal display device 1900 or the plate-side liquid crystal display device 470 after each light emitting device is turned on or blinking. Suggestions can also be made. Further, the light emitting device does not necessarily have to include all of the game board light emitting device 2150, the operation unit light emitting device 490, the upper plate light emitting device 492, and the touch panel light emitting device 494, and for example, only the operation unit light emitting device 490 close to the operation unit informs. It is also possible to carry out the above, and conversely, it is possible to provide a larger number of light emitting devices in addition to the current four light emitting devices.
As shown in FIG. 81, a second liquid crystal display device 3252 which is visible through the game window is attached and fixed to the upper center of the upper unit 3100. As the player participation type effect, for example, an example in which the touch panel 480, the first liquid crystal display device 1900, and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 are interlocked, for example, reach occurrence due to a decorative pattern in the first liquid crystal display device 1900. The operation unit light-emitting device 490 is turned on in response to, and the player is suggested to pay attention to the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the touch panel 480.

  Note that the display operation of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 by the peripheral control board 4140 may be at least suppressed until the operation on the touch panel 480 is enabled, for example, a blackout display mode may be set. In this way, it is possible to suppress the power consumption of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 during the operation stop time during which the player does not make a contact operation. In addition, when the operation on the touch panel 480 is enabled, the touch panel 480 indicates that the operation on the touch panel 480 is effective on the display panel of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and touch operation such as tap, flick, pinch open, and pinch close. You may make it display the assist screen which shows the kind of.

  After that, a shuriken image that shoots out the changing decorative pattern is displayed on the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and a character display "I'm now !!" is displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900 to prompt an operation on the touch panel 480. When the player slides the touch panel 480 so as to repel it, the upper plate light emitting device 492 and the touch panel portion light emitting device 494 are turned on to notify the player that the touch panel 480 is being operated. After that, the shuriken image is moved and displayed from the second liquid crystal display device 3252 toward the first liquid crystal display device 1900 so as to disappear, the shuriken image is displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900, and the fluctuating decorative pattern is shot out. Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect as if the shuriken flew from the second liquid crystal display device 3252 to the first liquid crystal display device 1900 by the operation of the player.

  As an example of player participation type production, the example of interlocking the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the touch panel 480, the first liquid crystal display device 1900, and the respective light emitting devices is given. The device 2150 is lit and displayed, and it is suggested to the player to look at the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the touch panel 480. After that, the shuriken pattern for punching out the jackpot pattern and the pattern "I'm now !!" are displayed on the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and the operation of the touch panel 480 is prompted. When the player slides the touch panel 480 so as to repel it, the upper plate light emitting device 492 and the touch panel portion light emitting device 494 are turned on to notify the player that the touch panel 480 is being operated. After that, each light-emitting device sequentially lights up from the touch panel light-emitting device 494 to the game board light-emitting device 2150, the shuriken is displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900, and the changing pattern is shot. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect as if the shuriken flew from the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to the first liquid crystal display device 1900 by the operation of the player.

  As a notification means for operating the touch panel, a notification means is known in which the liquid crystal touch panel vibrates when the liquid crystal touch panel is touched. However, in the case of just the vibration, the player touches the touch panel. I can only recognize that. However, as in the present embodiment, the light emission mode of the upper plate light emitting device 492 and the touch panel portion light emitting device 494 changes according to the type of operation of the touch panel 480 (touch operation, flick operation, etc.), and thus the touch panel The type of operation (touch, flick, etc.) on the 480 can also be recognized.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game board light emitting device 2150 and the operation portion light emitting device 490 suggest the operation timing of the touch panel 480 and the operation unit 400, and the upper plate light emitting device 492 and the touch panel light emitting device. 494 indicates that the touch panel 480 is reliably operated by emitting light when the touch panel 480 is operated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, a light emission mode according to an expected value depending on the effect. It is also possible to give different roles to each of the various light emitting devices, such as changing the display level, displaying the volume of the gaming machine and the brightness of the liquid crystal display device like a level meter.

  Further, although the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the touch panel 480 are arranged in the central portion in the width direction of the door frame 5 to provide the operation portion light emitting device 490, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the touch panel 480 are the first. It is also possible to provide an operation unit light emitting device 490 while being arranged in the right position as in the above embodiment, and to suggest an operation of the touch panel 480 or the operation unit 400 in combination with the game board light emitting device 2150.

[Fourth Embodiment]
A fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 100 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the touch panel according to this embodiment. In the present embodiment, as the light emitting devices around the touch panel 480, three light emitting devices are provided on the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the touch panel 480, and on the upper side of the touch panel 480, the first light emitting device on the touch panel portion 4941, A touch panel upper second light emitting device 4942 and a touch panel upper third light emitting device 4943 are provided. On the right side of the touch panel 480, the touch panel right first light emitting device 4951, the touch panel right second light emitting device 4952, and the touch panel right. The third light emitting device 4953 is provided, and the touch panel lower first light emitting device 4961, the touch panel lower second light emitting device 4962, and the touch panel lower third light emitting device 4963 are provided below the touch panel 480. The first light emission on the left side of the touch panel on the left side Location 4971, the touch panel portion left second light emitting device 4972, the touch panel unit third left light emitting device 4973 is provided.

  101 and 102 are diagrams showing an example of a light emission mode when suggesting an operation on the touch panel 480. 101 to 102, each light emitting device around the touch panel 480 sequentially emits light to suggest an operation. First, at the first timing shown in FIG. 101A, the upper and lower left and right outermost light emitting devices of the touch panel 480 are the first light emitting device 4941 on the touch panel portion, the first light emitting device 4951 on the right touch panel portion, and the first light emitting device below the touch panel portion The light emitting device 4961 and the touch panel left first light emitting device 4971 emit light, and the touch panel upper second light emitting device 4942 and the touch panel right second light emitting device are located one step inside at the next timing shown in FIG. 101B. 4952, the touch panel lower second light emitting device 4962, and the touch panel left second light emitting device 4972 emit light, and at the next timing shown in FIG. 102 (c), the innermost touch panel upper third light emitting device 4943, Touch panel right third light emitting device 4953, touch panel lower third light emitting device 4963, touch panel left 3 light-emitting device 4973 emits light, at that timing, the player as shown in FIG. 102 (d) to perform an operation on the touch panel 480.

  103 and 104 are diagrams showing another example of the light emission mode when suggesting an operation on the touch panel 480. 103 to 104, each light emitting device around the touch panel 480 sequentially emits light to suggest an operation. First, at the first timing shown in FIG. 103 (a), the touch panel left first light emitting device 4971, which is the light emitting device on the outermost left side of the touch panel 480, emits light, and then the next shown in FIG. 103 (b). The two outer light-emitting devices on the touch panel 480, that is, the first light-emitting device on the touch panel portion 4941 and the second light-emitting device on the touch panel portion 4942 emit light at the timing of, and then the next light emitting device shown in FIG. At the timing, the light-emitting device on the right side of the touch panel 480, that is, the touch panel right first light emitting device 4951, the touch panel right second light emitting device 4952, and the touch panel right third light emitting device 4953 emit light, and at that timing, FIG. The player operates the touch panel 480 as shown in FIG.

  105 and 106 are diagrams showing another example of the light emitting mode when suggesting an operation on the touch panel 480 and a state when the player does not perform an operation after the suggestion. 105 to 106, each light emitting device around the touch panel 480 sequentially emits light to suggest an operation. First, at the first timing shown in FIG. 105 (a), the touch panel left first light emitting device 4971, which is the light emitting device on the left outermost periphery of the touch panel 480, emits light, and then the next shown in FIG. 105 (b). The second light emitting device 4942 on the touch panel unit on the touch panel 480 emits light at the timing of, and the right third light emitting device 4953 on the right touch panel unit of the touch panel 480 emits light at the next timing shown in FIG. To do. Although the player suggests to operate the touch panel 480 at that timing, if the player does not operate the touch panel 480, the right side of the touch panel portion shown in FIG. 106 (c). After a lapse of a predetermined time after the third light emitting device 4953 emits light, as shown in FIG. 106 (d), all the light emitting devices around the touch panel 480 emit light, and the player returns to the touch panel 480 again. It suggests to do the operation.

  It should be noted that the light emission modes suggesting an operation on the touch panel 480 shown in FIGS. 101 to 106 are merely examples, and the light emission modes are not limited to these light emission modes. Various modifications are conceivable, such as sequentially emitting light from the inner light emitting device, sequentially changing the starting point of light emission to rotate the light counterclockwise in reverse, or causing light to be emitted for a number of rounds. Further, the suggestion again when the player does not perform the operation after the lapse of a predetermined time after the suggestion of the operation is not limited to the light emission mode shown in FIG. 106 (d), and may be repeated from the outside to the inside. Various modifications are conceivable, such as shining in sequence or shining as if rotating around.

  FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a light emitting mode when the operation state of the touch panel 480 is shown by the light emitting device provided around the touch panel 480. As shown in FIG. 107A, when the player touches the left side of the touch panel 480, the touch panel left first light emitting device 4971, which is the light emitting device on the left side of the touch panel, the touch panel left second light emitting device 4972, The touch panel left third light emitting device 4973 emits light. Thereafter, when the player slides his / her finger to the right side, as shown in FIG. 107 (b), the touch panel left first light emitting device 4971 and the touch panel left second light emitting which are left panel light emitting devices. The device 4972 and the touch panel left third light emitting device 4973 are turned off, and the touch panel right first light emitting device 4951, the touch panel right second light emitting device 4952, and the touch panel right third light emitting device 4953, which are right light emitting devices of the touch panel, emit light. As a result, it is possible to reliably inform that the player has operated the touch panel 480.

  FIG. 108 is a diagram showing a light emitting mode when the player slides his / her finger from bottom to top. Similar to the left-to-right slide shown in FIG. 107, when the player touches the lower side of the touch panel 480, as shown in FIG. The touch panel lower first light emitting device 4961, the touch panel lower second light emitting device 4962, and the touch panel lower third light emitting device 4963, which are devices, emit light. After that, when the player slides his / her finger and moves it to the upper side, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), the touch panel lower first light emitting device 4961 and the touch panel lower second light emission which are light emitting devices on the touch panel. The device 4962 and the touch panel lower third light emitting device 4963 are turned off, and the touch panel upper first light emitting device 4941, the touch panel upper second light emitting device 4942, and the touch panel upper third light emitting device 4943, which are the light emitting devices on the touch panel, emit light.

  107 and 108 show an example of the light emitting mode of the light emitting device when the player slides his / her finger on the touch panel 480, but the light emitting device can also notify other operations of the player. .. For example, when tapping on the touch panel 480, all the light emitting devices around the touch panel 480 emit light for a moment, or when a pinch-in operation is performed, light is emitted sequentially from the outer circumference to the inner circumference of the light emitting device, or conversely, the pinch out operation is performed. In this case, the light emitting device can emit light sequentially from the inner circumference to the outer circumference. Further, these light emitting modes are examples, and the present invention is not limited to this light emitting mode, and various modified examples are possible.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which three light emitting devices are arranged on each of the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the touch panel 480 has been described, but the number of light emitting devices is not limited to three, and each side has one side. Or a larger number of light-emitting devices, a series of light-emitting devices connected at the corners, a light-emitting device that surrounds the periphery with a circle or an ellipse, or light-emitting devices on only some sides. Various modifications are conceivable, such as having.

[Fifth Embodiment]
A fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 109 is a front view of the game board in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the game panel 1150 is made of transparent acrylic, and on the rear side of the game panel 1150, between the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and the touch panel 480, the first game board light emitting device 2151, A plurality of game board light emitting devices including a 2 game board light emitting device 2152, a third game board light emitting device 2153, a fourth game board light emitting device 2154, and a fifth game board light emitting device 2155 are sequentially arranged. Further, the width of each game board light emitting device is gradually widened from the first game board light emitting device 2151 on the first liquid crystal display device 1900 side to the fifth game board light emitting device 2155 on the touch panel 480 side. Is formed in.

  110 to 112 are enlarged views of the portion A of FIG. 109, omitting the starting port and the like and showing only the game board light emitting device. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing an example of a light emitting mode of the game board light emitting device when suggesting an operation on the touch panel 480. First, the first game board light emitting device 2151 emits light at the first timing shown in (a), and then the second game board 2151 keeps emitting light at the next timing shown in (b). The board light emitting device 2152 emits light, then the third game board light emitting device 2153 emits light as shown in (c), and then the fourth game board light emitting device 2154 emits light as shown in (d). Finally, as shown in (e), the fifth game board light emitting device 2155 emits light and all the game board light emitting devices on the game board emit light, and the player operates the touch panel 480 at that timing.

  FIG. 111 is a diagram showing another example of the light emitting mode of the game board light emitting device when suggesting an operation on the touch panel 480. First, the first game board light emitting device 2151 emits light at the first timing shown in (a), and then the first game board light emitting device 2151 goes off at the next timing shown in (b) and the second game board. The light emitting device 2152 emits light, then only the third game board light emitting device 2153 emits light as shown in (c), and then only the fourth game board light emitting device 2154 emits light as shown in (d). Finally, as shown in (e), the fifth game board light emitting device 2155 emits light, all the game board light emitting devices on the game board emit light, and the player operates the touch panel 480 at that timing. .. Although the player suggests to operate the touch panel 480 at that timing, if the player does not operate the touch panel 480, the fifth game board emission shown in (e) After a lapse of a predetermined time after the device 2155 emits light, as shown in (f), all the five game board light emitting devices emit light so that the player operates the touch panel 480 again. Making suggestions.

  When suggesting the operation on the touch panel 480 shown in FIGS. 110 and 111, the light emission of the fourth game board light emitting device 2154 and the fifth game board light emitting device 2155 is higher than that of other game board light emitting devices. It is also possible to reduce the amount of light. The fourth game board light emitting device 2154 and the fifth game board light emitting device 2155 are positions near the special winning opening at the time of a big hit, and at the time of a big hit, the player can watch the movement of the game ball flowing into the big winning opening. Normally, at that time, the amount of light of the fourth game board light emitting device 2154 and the fifth game board light emitting device 2155 near the special winning opening is reduced, so that the player looks at the special winning opening. It is possible to recommend fatigue of the person.

  Note that the light-emission modes suggesting an operation on the touch panel 480 shown in FIGS. 110 and 111 are merely examples, and the invention is not limited to these light-emission modes. Various modification examples are conceivable, such that the game board light-emitting device emits light so that every other device flows, or a combination of continuous light emission and blinking state. Further, the suggestion again when the player does not perform the operation even after the lapse of a predetermined time after the suggestion of the operation is not limited to the light emitting mode shown in FIG. 111 (f), and the first game board emits light again. Various modifications are conceivable, such as emitting light from the device 2151 to the fifth game board light emitting device 2155, or combining a continuous light emission and a blinking state.

  FIG. 112 is a diagram showing a light emitting mode of the game board light emitting device when showing the operation state of the touch panel 480. When the player operates the touch panel 480 toward the first liquid crystal display device 1900, first, the fifth game board light emitting device 2155 emits light as shown in (a), and then (b) to. As shown in (e), the game board light emitting device sequentially emits light, so that it can be surely notified that the player has operated the touch panel 480.

  FIG. 112 shows an example of the light emitting mode of the light emitting device when the player slides his / her finger on the touch panel 480 in the direction of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, but other operations of the player also emit light. It can also be notified by the device. For example, when the touch panel 480 is tapped, all the game board light emitting devices emit light for a moment, or when the pinch-in operation is performed, the game board light emitting device is directed from the first game board light emitting device 2151 to the fifth game board light emitting device 2155. It is possible to sequentially emit light from the fifth game board light emitting device 2155 to the first game board light emitting device 2151 when a pinch-out operation is performed. Further, these light emitting modes are examples, and the present invention is not limited to this light emitting mode, and various modified examples are possible.

  Further, although an example of suggesting the operation of the touch panel 480 by the game board light emitting device and an example of notifying that the touch panel 480 has been operated have been separately described, the operation on the touch panel 480 using the game board light emitting device is described. It is also possible to perform both of the suggestion of No. 1 and notification of the operation of the touch panel 480.

  FIG. 113 is a front view of a game board in a modified example in which the shape of the game board light emitting device in this embodiment is changed. In this modified example as well, the point that the game panel 1150 is made of transparent acrylic is the same, but the game board light emitting device 2158 provided on the rear side of the game panel 1150 is the first liquid crystal display device 1900 side. It is different in that it is integrally provided from the touch panel 480 to the lowermost part on the touch panel 480 side. Although the game board light emitting device 2158 in the present modification is integrally formed over a wide range, it is possible that the whole is not turned on and off at the same time but is turned on and off for each part.

  114 and 115 are views showing only the game board light emitting device 2158 by enlarging the B portion of FIG. 113 and omitting the starting opening and the like. Further, FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an example of a light emitting mode of the game board light emitting device when suggesting an operation on the touch panel 480. First, at the first timing shown in (a), the vicinity of the uppermost portion of the game board light emitting device 2158 emits light, and then, in the order of (b) to (d), emits light so that the light emitting position gradually moves downward. Finally, as shown in (d), the lowermost part of the game board light emitting device 2158 emits light, and the player operates the touch panel 480 at that timing.

  FIG. 115 is a diagram showing a light emitting mode of the game board light emitting device 2158 when showing the operation state of the touch panel 480. When the player operates the touch panel 480 toward the first liquid crystal display device 1900, first, the lowermost part of the game board light emitting device 2158 emits light as shown in (a), and then (b). As shown in (d) to (d), the game board light emitting device sequentially emits light, so that it is possible to reliably notify that the player has operated the touch panel 480.

  Also, in this modification, the light emitting modes shown in FIGS. 114 and 115 are examples, and the present invention is not limited to these light emitting modes. Further, as shown in FIG. 111 (f), it is possible to add a function of notifying again when the operation is not performed for a predetermined time even if the operation is suggested.

  In the present embodiment, the arrangement position of the game board light emitting device is arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1150 between the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and the touch panel 480. By arranging it on the back side of the panel, restrictions on the arrangement position of the game board light emitting device are reduced, so that the operation for the player is not limited to the area between the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and the touch panel 480. It may be provided at another position on the rear side of the game panel 1150 within a range where the suggestion of the above and the notification of the operation state can be appropriately performed.

  FIG. 116 is a front view of a game board in a modified example in which the shape of the game board light emitting device in this embodiment is changed. Also in this modification, the game panel 1150 is the same in that it is made of transparent acrylic, but the game board light emitting device 2158 provided on the rear side of the game panel 1150 is a game board side liquid crystal display device 1900. Side to the lowermost part on the touch panel 480 side are different in that they are integrally provided. Although the game board light emitting device 2158 in the present modification is integrally formed over a wide range, it is possible that the whole is not turned on and off at the same time but is turned on and off for each part.

  117 and 118 are views showing only the game board light emitting device 2158 by enlarging the portion B of FIG. 116 and omitting the starting opening and the like. Further, FIG. 117 is a diagram showing an example of a light emitting mode of the game board light emitting device when suggesting an operation on the touch panel 480. First, at the first timing shown in (a), the vicinity of the uppermost portion of the game board light emitting device 2158 emits light, and then, in the order of (b) to (d), emits light so that the light emitting position gradually moves downward. Finally, as shown in (d), the lowermost part of the game board light emitting device 2158 emits light, and the player operates the touch panel 480 at that timing.

  FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a light emitting mode of the game board light emitting device 2158 when showing the operation state of the touch panel 480. When the player operates the touch panel 480 toward the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900, first, the lowermost part of the game board light emitting device 2158 emits light as shown in (a), and then (b). ) To (d), the game board light emitting device sequentially emits light, so that it is possible to reliably notify that the player has operated the touch panel 480.

  Also, in this modification, the light emitting modes shown in FIGS. 117 and 118 are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to these light emitting modes. Further, as shown in FIG. 111 (f), it is possible to add a function of notifying again when the operation is not performed for a predetermined time even if the operation is suggested.

  In the present embodiment, the arrangement position of the game board light emitting device is arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1150 between the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the touch panel 480. By arranging on the rear side of the game panel, there are less restrictions on the arrangement position of the game board light emitting device. Therefore, not only the area between the game board side liquid crystal display device 1900 and the touch panel 480, but also to the player. It may be provided at another location on the rear side of the game panel 1150 within a range in which the suggestion of the operation and the notification of the operation state can be appropriately performed.

[Functional configuration for game on main control board]
Subsequently, a functional configuration relating to a game such as a special symbol controlled by the main control board 4100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 to 84. FIG. 83 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration relating to the first winning lottery on the main control board. FIG. 84 is a block diagram showing the functional configuration of the second winning lottery on the main control board.

  As shown in FIG. 83, the main control board 4100 has a first hit determination table 4501, a first hit symbol table 4502, a first hit time variable time setting table 4503, and a configuration for the first hit lottery. The table 4504 for the first deviation time variation time is stored in advance, and based on these tables 4501 to 4504, the winning / absence of the lottery in the first winning lottery, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 1185, and the variation time. Is determined.

  The first hit determination table 4501 shows the relationship between the big hit determination random number value and the success or failure of the big hit or the small hit, and the winning percentage is different between the normal time and the high probability time. Further, the first hit symbol table 4502 shows the relationship between the big hit symbol random number value and the stop symbol in the first special symbol indicator 1185, and the big hit symbol random number values are divided into a plurality of groups. The range and the lighting state of the 7-segment LED (first special symbol) are associated with each other.

  Further, the first hitting time variation time setting table 4503 is used when the result of the winning or hitting in the first hitting lottery is a big hit or a small hit, and the first variation time random number and the first special symbol display device 1185 to be extracted. It shows a relationship with the variation time of the first special symbol in. The first deviation time variation time setting table 4504 is used when the result of the winning or failing in the first winning lottery is deviation, and the first variation time random number to be extracted and the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 1185. It shows the relationship with the fluctuation time of.

  The first lottery probability selecting means 4505 performs a process of selecting either one of the normal table and the high probability table based on the gaming state. Further, although not shown, the table 4502 for the first hit symbol is provided with a table for probability variation big hit, a table for special hit, a table for normal big hit, and a table for small hit, respectively. A table corresponding to the winning type determined by the first winning / deciding determination means 4506, which will be described later, is selected.

  Further, on the main control board 4100, when a winning to the upper starting opening (hereinafter referred to as the first starting opening) 2101 is detected by the upper starting opening switch (hereinafter referred to as the first starting opening sensor) 3022, a random counter ( Random number generation means), the first hit determination random number extraction means 4507 for extracting the big hit determination random number, and the first hit symbol random number extraction means 4508 for extracting the big hit symbol random number are provided. Further, the first variation time random number extracting means 4509 for extracting the variation time random number based on the determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number is provided.

  Further, when the big hit determination random number is extracted by the first hit determination random number extracting means 4507, the first hit determination means 4506 for determining the hit or hit of the big hit using the first hit determination table 4501, and the first hit symbol. When the big hit symbol random numbers are extracted by the random number extracting means 4508, the first stop symbol determining means 4510 for determining the stop symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 using the first hit symbol table 4502 is provided. There is.

  Further, when the first variation time random number extraction means 4509 extracts the variation time random numbers and the first hit determination means 4506 determines that it is a big hit, the first variation time setting table 4503 is used. Then, the variation time of the first special symbol is determined, on the other hand, when the variation time random number is extracted and it is determined by the first hit / absence determining means 4506 that there is a deviation, the first deviation time variation time setting table 4504. The first variation time determining means 4511 for determining the variation time of the first special symbol using is provided.

  Further, on the main control board 4100, while starting the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1185, after the lapse of the variation time determined by the first variation time determination means 4511, the first stop symbol determination The special symbol variation control means 4512 to stop the variation at the stop symbol determined by the means 4510, and the variation command of the first special symbol, before or after the variation of the first winning or deciding means 4506, the hit command (in FIG. 29) regarding the presence or absence of the big hit. Special symbol 1 designation) shown, and command transmitting means 4513 for transmitting a control command (related to special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. 29) including a variation display command corresponding to the variation mode (time) of the first special symbol are provided. ing.

  Further, in the main control board 4100, when the winning to the first starting opening 2101 is detected by the first starting opening sensor 3022 during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, a certain number of balls (4 times) ) Is the upper limit, the first starting memory number is counted and stored, and the first holding and extinguishing means 4514 is provided for repeatedly performing the variable display of the first special symbol for the number of starting memories.

  In other words, the first holding and extinguishing means 4514 that waits for execution of the first process based on the detection of the game ball by the first starting opening sensor 3022 is provided. Explaining in more detail the first holding digestion means 4514, the first holding digestion means 4514 is provided with a first holding control means 4514a and a first digestion control means 4514b. During the variation of the one special symbol or the second special symbol, if the first starting opening sensor 3022 detects a winning in the first starting opening 2101, the first starting memory number must reach the upper limit value "4". For example, while increasing the value of the first starting memory number by "1", the first big hit determination random number and the first big hit symbol random number are extracted, and each extracted random number is stored in the first special symbol random number storage means 4515. It is stored in the highest storage area in the inside.

  On the other hand, the first digestion control means 4514b, when the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped, and a new variation of the first special symbol becomes possible, the starting memory number for the first special symbol is " If it is not "0", the first big hit determination random number and the first big hit symbol random number are read from the storage area corresponding to the starting memory number [1], and the value of the first starting memory number is reduced by "1", and Each random number value stored in each storage area n is shifted to the storage area of n−1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 84, the main control board 4100 has a second hit determination table 4521, a second hit symbol table 4522, and a second hit time variation time setting table 4523 as a configuration related to the second hit lottery. , And the second out-of-time variation time setting table 4524 are stored in advance, and based on these tables 4521 to 4524, the winning / absence of the lottery in the second winning lottery, the stop symbol in the second special symbol display device 1186, and The variable time is determined. Since the configuration of each table is the same as the configuration of each table in the first winning lottery, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

  Further, on the main control board 4100, when the lower start opening switch (hereinafter referred to as the second start opening sensor) 2109 detects the winning of the lower start opening (hereinafter referred to as the second start opening) 2102, the second winning lottery is performed. Second hit determination random number extraction means 4525 for extracting a big hit determination random number, a second big hit symbol random number extraction means 4526 for extracting a big hit symbol random number related to the second hit lottery, a judgment random number and a big hit symbol random number Second random time random number extracting means 4527 for extracting random time random numbers based on the above.

  Moreover, when the big hit determination random number is extracted by the second hit determination random number extraction means 4525, the second hit determination means 4528 for determining the hit or hit of the big hit using the second hit determination table 4521, and the second hit symbol. When the big hit symbol random number is extracted by the random number extracting means 4526, the second stop symbol determining means 4529 for determining the stop symbol in the second special symbol display 1186 using the second hit symbol table 4522 is provided. There is.

  Further, when the second variation time random number extracting means 4527 extracts the variation time random number and the second hit determination means 4528 determines that it is a big hit, the second hitting time variation time setting table 4523 is used. Then, the variation time of the second special symbol is determined, on the other hand, when the variation time random number is extracted and it is determined that it is out by the second win / loss determination means 4528, the second out-of-time variation time setting table 4524. The second variation time determination means 4530 for determining the variation time of the second special symbol using is provided.

  In addition, the special symbol fluctuation control means 4512 starts fluctuation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1186, and after the lapse of the fluctuation time determined by the second fluctuation time determination means 4530, the second stop symbol. The variation is stopped by the stop symbol determined by the determining means 4529.

  Furthermore, in the main control board 4100, when the winning to the second starting port 2102 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2109 during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, a certain number of balls (4 times) ) Is an upper limit, the second starting memory number is counted and stored, and second holding and extinguishing means 4531 is provided for repeatedly displaying the variation display of the second special symbol for the number of starting memories. In other words, the second holding and extinguishing means 4531 that waits for the execution of the second process based on the detection of the game ball by the second starting opening sensor 2109 is provided.

  Explaining in more detail the second hold extinguishing means 4531, the second hold extinguishing means 4531 is provided with a second suspending control means 4531a and a second digesting control means 4531b. During the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, if the winning to the second starting opening 2102 is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2109, the second starting memory number has reached the upper limit value "4". If not, the value of the second starting memory number is increased by "1", and the second big hit determination random number and the second big hit symbol random number are extracted, and each extracted random number is the second special symbol random number storage means 4532. It is stored in the uppermost storage area of.

  On the other hand, the second digestion control means 4531b, when the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is stopped, and the variation of the new second special symbol is enabled, the starting memory number for the second special symbol is " If it is not "0", the second big hit determination random number and the second big hit symbol random number are read from the storage area corresponding to the starting memory number [1], and the value of the second starting memory number is reduced by "1", and Each random number value stored in each storage area n is shifted to the storage area of n−1.

[Functional configuration for games on peripheral control board]
Subsequently, a functional configuration relating to a game including a decorative symbol row on the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration relating to effects on the peripheral control board (mainly the peripheral control unit 4150, the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160).

  As shown in FIG. 85, when the control command transmitted from the main control board 4100 is received by the command receiving means 4560, the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 and the upper plate side liquid crystal are based on this. Various functions for controlling the display device 470 are provided in the peripheral control unit 4150 and the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160. That is, as the production table corresponding to the first winning lottery, a first hit production mode table 4561 and a first out-time production mode table 4562 are stored in advance, and based on these tables 4561 and 4562, The effect mode in the step effect, the development effect, etc. is determined.

  First, the effect mode tables 4561 and 4562 will be described in detail. The first hit time effect mode table 4561 is used in the case of a big hit (or a small hit), and shows a relationship between a random number for effect determination (described later) and an effect mode (here, effect patterns in step effects and development effects). It is shown. Further, the first off-time effect mode table 4562 is a table used in the case of an off, and shows the relationship between the effect determination random number and the effect pattern.

  The peripheral control board 4140 is provided with first effect random number extracting means 4563 for extracting effect determining random numbers from a random counter (not shown) and first effect mode determining means 4564 for determining effect patterns. .. Upon receiving the control command via the command reception unit 4560, the first effect mode determination unit 4564 extracts the effect random number by the first effect random number extraction unit 4563, and also the win / fail command included in the control command (see FIG. 29). When the special symbol 1 designation) indicates a big hit (or a small hit), the effect pattern is extracted from the effect random number extracted by the first effect random number extracting means 4563 and the first hit effect mode table 4561. On the other hand, if the winning / disabling command indicates a deviation, the effect pattern is determined from the effect random numbers extracted by the first effect random number extracting means 4563 and the first out-effect effect mode table 4562. It is a thing.

  The effect pattern determined by the first effect mode determination means 4564 is extracted from the effect pattern storage means (not shown) and sent to the first effect display control means 4565. In the present embodiment, the touch panel 480 is provided so that the operation surface overlaps the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and its display area. The touch operation signal on the touch panel 480 is input to the first effect display control means 4565 and the second effect display control means 4571.

  The first effect display control means 4565 detects the contact state on the contact surface of the touch panel 480 of the player, acquires the coordinate value of the contact surface of the touch panel 480 indicating the center of the contact portion based on the contact state, and the coordinate value. The position represented by is specified as the detection point. In addition, by an internal mechanism (not shown), operation modes such as tapping, rubbing, and flicking on the touch panel (for example, sliding a finger in a circle, sliding the finger in zigzag, and moving five fingers simultaneously from the outside to the inside) A sweep or the like) is determined so as to converge, and the liquid crystal and sound control unit 4160 of the peripheral control board 4140 shown in FIG. The first effect display control means 4565 reads out images of those effects from the image storage means (liquid crystal and sound control ROM 4160b) based on the acquired operation information, and outputs the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the second liquid crystal display device 3252 and the upper liquid crystal display device 3252. It is led to the plate side liquid crystal display device 470.

  In the above description, the effect related to the first winning lottery has been described, but the peripheral control board 4140 is also provided with a functional configuration for performing the effect related to the second winning lottery. Specifically, as a production table corresponding to the second winning lottery, a second winning production mode table 4567 and a second off production mode table 4568 are stored in advance, and these tables 4567 and 4568 are stored. Based on this, the effect mode in the step effect and the development effect is determined. The effect mode tables 4567 and 4568 have the same configuration as the effect mode tables 4561 and 4562 corresponding to the first winning lottery, and therefore detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

  Further, the peripheral control board 4140 is provided with a second effect random number extraction means 4569, a second effect mode determination means 4570, and a second effect display control means 4571 corresponding to the second winning lottery. Since the configuration of 1 has the same function as the functional configuration corresponding to the first winning lottery, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The peripheral control board 4140 is provided with a decorative symbol variation display means 4573. The decorative symbol variation display means 4573 varies the common decorative symbol sequence based on the control command received by the command receiving means 4560, and based on the variation time and win / loss command included in the control command (that is, the lottery result). Therefore, the common decorative pattern row is sequentially stopped. In particular, a combination of decorative symbols (stop symbols) that have already stopped on the activated line at a stage before the final stop symbol string that is finally stopped among a plurality of common decorative symbol strings is a specific decorative symbol. When the combination of is satisfied, the reach state is established by using the already stopped decorative pattern as the reach forming pattern.

  Further, the first effect display control means 4565 and the second effect display control means 4571 control the lighting of the touch panel light emitting device 494, the operation light emitting device 490, the upper plate light emitting device 492, and the game board light emitting device 2150 based on the control command. To do.

[Direction]
Next, a specific effect drawn using the touch panel 480 across the display panel of the first liquid crystal display device (first effect display device) 1900 and the display panel of the second liquid crystal display device (second effect display device) 3252. Will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 92. The production control means (peripheral control board 4140) displays the first image on one of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 and displays the second image on the other liquid crystal display device. Then, the touch operation is performed on the touch panel 480, and when the touch operation on the touch panel 480 is detected, the second image is changed in the display area of the other liquid crystal display device, and the second image is changed. Then, a specific effect of changing the first image in the display area of the one liquid crystal display device is executed.

  Here, in front of the game window 101, the player sitting directly opposite the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the middle of the production of one variation of the decorative symbol drawn in the display area of the first liquid crystal display device 1900. In accordance with a message instructing that the operation timing is displayed in the display area of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the touch panel 480 provided so that the operation surface overlaps the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is rubbed. An example of the effect in that case will be described.

  In addition, "1 variation" means that the first special symbol is the first special lottery result in which the upper special symbol display 1185 of the function display unit 1180 shown in FIG. 10 is selected by receiving the game ball into the upper starting opening 2101. From the start of variation as a stop display, or the second special lottery result in which the lower special symbol display device 1186 of the function display unit 1180 shown in FIG. 10 is drawn by receiving the game ball into the lower starting opening 2102. There is a variable start as a second special symbol until it is stopped and displayed, and the effect drawn in the display area of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is also changed according to the time when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed. It is being appreciated.

  The first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls into the upper starting opening 2101 or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls into the lower starting opening 2102 is a command from the main control board 4100. Based on this, the peripheral control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4140 controls the liquid crystal and sound control unit 1460, so that as shown in FIG. 86, the left side of the display area of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is a decorative pattern 1900a, and the center is The decorative pattern 1900b is displayed on the right side, and the variable display of the decorative pattern 1900c is started on the right side, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the decorative patterns 1900a to 1900c is stopped and the first special lottery result (winning result) or the second The player can recognize the special lottery result (winning result).

  The peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control board 4140 receives the control command output from the main control board 4100 by executing the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 55). Then, when the received control command is analyzed to be the specific hit production instruction command in the received command analysis processing of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of FIG. 52, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that the specific hit production instruction command has been received. Based on the routine, the peripheral control unit steady process of steps S1009 to S1038 of FIG. 52 and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process of FIG.

  The specific hit production instruction command detects a touch operation on the touch panel 480, imparts a change to the images displayed in the display areas of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and wins or fails. It is a control command indicating that the determination result is to give a profit to the player.

[Specific example of specific hit production]
FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an example of a specific winning effect using the game board side liquid crystal display device, the upper plate side liquid crystal display device, the touch panel and a plurality of light emitting devices. 87 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific hit effect of FIG. 86, FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a continuation of the special hit effect of FIG. 87, and FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a continuation of the special hit effect of FIG. 88. 90 is a diagram showing the continuation of the specific hit effect of FIG. 89, FIG. 91 is a diagram showing the continuation of the special hit effect of FIG. 90, and FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the continuation of the special hit effect of FIG. 91. is there.

  The specific winning effect is the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the touch panel 480, the first liquid crystal display device 1900, and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device between the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the first liquid crystal display device 1900. The touch panel unit light emitting device 494, the operation unit light emitting device 490, the upper plate light emitting device 492, and the game board light emitting device 2150, which are sequentially arranged from 470 to the first liquid crystal display device 1900, are interlocked with each other. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82, four light emitting devices, that is, the touch panel light emitting device 494, the operation light emitting device 490, the upper plate light emitting device 492, and the game board light emitting device 2150 are the first liquid crystal display. They are arranged in a line on a line connecting the device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470.

  As shown in FIG. 86, in the display panel of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the left decorative symbol row 1900a and the right decorative symbol row 1900c are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, and only the middle decorative symbol row 1900b is changing. By doing so, the reach state is generated by the decorative pattern. In FIG. 86, as an example, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are stopped and displayed with the design “7”, and only the middle decorative design row 1900b is changed to reach. Then, in response to the reach, the game board light emitting device 2150 is turned on and emitted to suggest to the player to gaze at the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the touch panel 480. Incidentally, along with this, the operation portion light emitting device 490 can also be turned on and emitted.

  Next, the specific symbol TKZ is displayed on the display panel of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. In FIG. 86, as an example of the specific symbol TKZ, it is shown that a shuriken pattern imitating a shuriken thrown by a ninja or the like is displayed. Then, for example, in order to recall the operation mode of the touch panel 480, a three-dimensional model imitating the ninja of the character unit 3400 (see FIG. 8) arranged on the right side of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001. It is also possible to move the modeled character body in the left-right direction from the position at the right end to the position closer to the center side, and reciprocally rotate the right arm of the character body in the horizontal direction. As a result, it is possible to make the character body behave like throwing a shuriken. In this way, the player can be made aware of how to operate the touch panel 480 (rubbing the shuriken pattern toward the first liquid crystal display device 1900 with a finger), and it is easy to understand.

  The game board light emitting device 2150 and the operation unit light emitting device 490 are turned off before the operation timing of the touch panel 480 is reached. Then, a message indicating that the touch panel 480 is operated is displayed on the display panel of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 in accordance with the operation timing of the touch panel 480. In FIG. 87, it is shown that the character "I'm now !!" is displayed as the message MGA indicating that the operation is performed. Note that the message “now !!!!” may be displayed by voice together with the message “now !!!!”.

  When the player touches the touch panel 480 of the part where the shuriken pattern is displayed, from the player side toward the game machine side, triggered by the sign of the character display "I'm now !!", the shuriken pattern is displayed. It is displayed so as to disappear on the upper side of the display panel of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 as if it were flying toward the upper first liquid crystal display device 1900.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88, the touch panel light emitting device 494 is turned on and emitted, then the operation portion light emitting device 490 is turned on and emitted as shown in FIG. 89, and then, as shown in FIG. 90, the upper plate light emitting device. The 492 is turned on and emitted, and then the game board light emitting device 2150 is turned on and emitted as shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 92, a shuriken pattern appears on the lower side of the display panel of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and is moved and displayed toward the changing middle decoration pattern row 1900b, and the changing decoration pattern is hit and decorated. Shoot out the design. The medium decorative design is stopped and displayed as the design "7", and the decorative designs 1900a to 1900c are stopped and displayed as the same design "7" to be a "big hit".

  In this way, symbols are moved and displayed from the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 toward the display area of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, and a plurality of light emitting devices are sequentially displayed toward the first liquid crystal display device 1900. Since it is caused to emit light, it is possible to easily show that each effect display performed on the two effect display devices triggered by the touch operation on the touch panel 480 is linked and interlocked.

  Further, as a result, it becomes possible to perform an effect as if the shuriken flew from the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 to the first liquid crystal display device 1900 by the operation of the player, and the effect image of one effect display device. It is possible to express an innovative and hard-to-get big hit effect, in which the effect enters the effect image of the other effect display device and becomes a big hit, by the player participation type effect, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest of the game.

  In the light emitting mode of the plurality of light emitting devices, the touch panel light emitting device 494 is turned on and emitted at the timing when the shuriken pattern disappears on the upper side of the display panel of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and then the touch panel light emitting device is emitted. 494 is extinguished to turn on the operating unit light emitting device 490 to emit light, then the operating unit emitting device 490 is extinguished to turn on and emit the upper plate light emitting device 492, and then to turn off the upper plate light emitting device 492. The game board light emitting device 2150 may be turned on and emitted, and the game board light emitting device 2150 may be turned off at the timing when the shuriken symbol appears on the lower side of the display panel of the first liquid crystal display device 1900.

  In addition, the touch panel light emitting device 494 is turned on and emitted at the timing when the shuriken design disappears on the upper side of the display panel of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and then the touch panel light emitting device 494 is turned on and the operation portion light emitting device 490 is emitted. Light up, and then the touch panel light emitting device 494 and the operating light emitting device 490 are turned on, while the upper plate light emitting device 492 is turned on and light emitting, and then, the touch panel light emitting device 494 and the operating light emitting device 490. Also, the game board light emitting device 2150 is lit and emitted while the upper plate light emitting device 492 is emitting light, and at the next timing, the touch panel light emitting device 494, the operation portion light emitting device 490, the upper plate light emitting device 492, and the game board light emitting device 2150. All of them are turned on and emitted, and a shuriken pattern is displayed on the lower side of the display panel of the first liquid crystal display device 1900. Thereby revealed, such may be a light emitting indicator or a light emission level meter.

  FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an example of a specific effect using the first liquid crystal display device, the second liquid crystal display device, and the touch panel. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect of FIG. 119.

  As shown in FIG. 119, in the display panel of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the left decorative design 1900a and the right decorative design 1900c are stopped and displayed with the same design, and only the middle decorative design 1900b is changed to the final stop design. The reach state is generated by the decorative pattern. In this case, the changing middle decoration pattern 1900b corresponds to the first image GA1. In FIG. 85, as an example, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are stopped and displayed as the design “7”, and only the middle decorative design 1900b is changing. Then, in response to the reach, the operation unit light-emitting device 490 is turned on and emitted, and the player is instructed to pay attention to the touch panel 480.

  Note that the display operation of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 by the peripheral control board 4140 may be at least suppressed until the touch operation on the touch panel 480 is validated, for example, a blackout display mode may be set. In this way, it is possible to suppress the power consumption of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 during the operation stop time during which the player does not make a contact operation. In addition, when the touch operation on the touch panel 480 is enabled, the touch panel 480 indicates that the touch panel 480 is operated on the display panel of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and touch operation such as tap, flick, pinch open, and pinch close. You may make it display the assist screen which shows the kind of.

  Next, the second image GA2 is displayed on the display panel of the second liquid crystal display device 3252. FIG. 120 shows that, as an example of the second image GA2, a shuriken image simulating a shuriken thrown by a ninja or the like is displayed.

  Then, for example, in order to recall the operation mode of the touch panel 480, a three-dimensional model imitating the ninja of the character unit 3400 (see FIG. 8) arranged on the right side of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 in the back box 3001. It is also possible to move the modeled character body in the left-right direction from the position at the right end to the position closer to the center side, and reciprocally rotate the right arm of the character body in the horizontal direction. As a result, it is possible to make the character body behave like throwing a shuriken. In this way, the player can be made aware of how to operate the touch panel 480 (rubbing the shuriken pattern toward the first liquid crystal display device 1900 with a finger), and it is easy to understand.

  Then, a message MGA indicating that the touch panel 480 is operated is displayed on the display panel of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 at the operation timing of the touch panel 480. In FIG. 120, it is shown that the character “I'm now !!” is displayed as the message MGA indicating that the operation is performed. Note that the message “now !!!!” may be displayed by voice together with the message “now !!!!”.

  When the player touches (flicks) the touch panel 480 by rubbing the touch panel 480 from the top toward the front in response to the signal display of "now it is !!", the shuriken image is directed toward the first liquid crystal display device 1900 below. It is moved and displayed so as to disappear on the lower side of the display panel of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 as if it flew away.

  FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect of FIG. 120 when the winning / judging determination result is a win. When the winning / judging result is a hit, as shown in FIG. 121, a shuriken image appears on the upper side of the display panel of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, and the shuriken image is moved and displayed toward the changing middle decoration pattern row 1900b, Hit the changing decorative pattern and shoot through the decorative pattern. The medium decorative design is stopped and displayed as the design "7", and the decorative designs 1900a to 1900c are stopped and displayed as the same design "7" to be a "big hit".

  This makes it possible to perform an effect as if a shuriken flew from the second liquid crystal display device 3252 to the first liquid crystal display device 1900 by the player's touch operation on the touch panel 480, and the other effect display device ( The second image (shuriken image) in the display area of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is moved and displayed so as to disappear, and correspondingly, the effect in the display area of the one effect display device (first liquid crystal display device 1900) Change the content.

  In the above example, the effect image of the one effect display device (second image) enters the effect image of the other effect display device (changing middle decoration pattern as the first image) to influence, and the effect content is It is possible to express a novel and hard-to-eat big hit effect such as a change and a big hit as a result, by a player participation type effect, and it is possible to suppress deterioration of amusement of the game.

  That is, the player's intervention on the touch panel 480, which is the player's intervention, is reflected on the effect contents of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 to affect the effect contents of the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and further the second effect. The change in the effect contents on the liquid crystal display device 3252 is reflected on the effect contents by the first liquid crystal display device 1900 to influence, and gives the player a feeling that the effect contents by the first liquid crystal display device 1900 are changing. Therefore, it is possible to express a more innovative and hard-to-eat big hit production by the player participation type production, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

[Specific deviation effect]
On the other hand, when the received control command is analyzed to be the specific off effect production instruction command in the received command analysis processing of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit steady process of FIG. 52, the peripheral control MPU 4150a determines that it is the specific off effect production instruction command. Based on the routine, the peripheral control unit steady process of steps S1009 to S1038 of FIG. 52 and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process of FIG. 54 are controlled so that the specific deviation effect is executed.

  It should be noted that the specific deviation effect instruction command detects a touch operation on the touch panel 480 and imparts a change to the images displayed in the display areas of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and It is a control command indicating that the winning / judging determination result does not give a profit to the player.

[Specific example of off-specification]
A plurality of light emitting devices including the touch panel light emitting device 494, the operation light emitting device 490, the upper plate light emitting device 492, and the game board light emitting device 2150 will be defined as a link lamp. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing an example of a specific disengagement effect using a game board side liquid crystal display device, an upper plate side liquid crystal display device, a touch panel and a plurality of light emitting devices, that is, a link lamp. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific deviation effect in FIG. 93, and FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific deviation effect in FIG. 94.

  The non-specific effect is the same effect mode from the effect modes of FIGS. 86 to 91 in the specific hit effect described above. That is, in the display panel of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the reach state is generated due to the decorative pattern, and the game plate light emitting device 1250 emits light to suggest the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the touch panel 480. A specific symbol TKZ (a shuriken symbol) is displayed on the display panel of the side liquid crystal display device 470, and a message MGA of "now is !!" is displayed on the display panel of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 in accordance with the operation timing on the touch panel 480. When a rubbing operation on the touch panel 480 is detected, the shuriken pattern is moved and displayed toward the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470, and then, as shown in FIG. 88, the touch panel light emitting device 494 is lit and emitted, and then, As shown in FIG. 89, the operating portion light emitting device 490 is turned on and emitted, and then, as shown in FIG. 2 is turned emission, further next to the game board light emitting device 2150 is lit to emit light as shown in FIG. 91.

  The specific off effect is different from the specific hit effect in the following points. In the case of the specific disengagement effect, a light emission mode of the link lamp different from the light emission mode of the link lamp in the case of winning is performed. As an example of the light emission mode of the link lamp executed in the case of the specific disengagement effect, after the light emission state of FIG. 91, as shown in FIG. 93, the previous light emission state is returned to and the upper plate light emitting device 492 is turned on. The light is emitted, and then the light emission state becomes the forward direction again, and the game board light emitting device 2150 is turned on and emitted as shown in FIG. 94.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 95, a shuriken pattern appears on the lower side of the display panel of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and is moved and displayed toward the changing middle decoration pattern row 1900b, and hits the changing decoration pattern. Shoot out the decorative pattern. However, due to the light emitting mode of FIG. 93 and FIG. 94, the hit timing shift occurs and the hit design “7” is not hit, and in FIG. 95, the decorative design after one design is hit and missed. It shows that "8" has been shot through. The middle decorative design is stopped and displayed as the design "8", and the decorative designs 1900a to 1900c are stopped and displayed as "7", "8", and "7", and becomes "disengagement".

  It should be noted that the light emitting mode of the link lamp is different from the light emitting mode of the link lamp in the case of being a hit, and the light emitting mode of the link lamp which is out of order is created (so-called "inserting" is included). In this case, a portion of the light emission mode different from the light emission mode of the link lamp is defined as a ska light emission mode by using a "ska (out of lots)".

  In the case of the above-described specific disengagement effect, the light emitting mode of the link lamp shown in FIGS. 93 and 94 corresponds to the ska light emitting mode, which is extra to the light emitting mode of the link lamp in the case of a hit. It can be said that the light emitting mode is included, and the ska light emitting mode is created by the excessive light emitting modes.

  In this way, it is possible to easily show that the respective effect displays performed on the two effect display devices triggered by the touch operation on the touch panel 480 are linked and interlocked with each other by the light emission mode of the link lamp.

In addition, when the specific disengagement effect is performed, in the light emitting process of causing a plurality of light emitting devices (link lamps) arranged in a row toward the game board side liquid crystal display device (first effect display device) 1900 to emit light. Since the specific symbol (shuriken symbol) does not hit the hit symbol in the decorative symbol that is fluctuating in the display area of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the decorative symbol is disengaged and stopped and displayed as the decorative symbol. In the case of the specific off effect, each effect display performed on the two liquid crystal display devices is linked by the light emission of the link lamp arranged in a line between the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470. Although it can be recognized that they are linked with each other, the ska light emission mode is included in the light emission process, so that the player may possibly touch the touch panel 480 to operate. It is misleading while holding a pale expectation that it may have been won in the winning lottery, and it will be surprised to be surprised by the ska light emission mode, and the effect image of one liquid crystal display device will be the other liquid crystal It is possible to express a novel non-experienced specific disengagement effect in which the player enters the effect image on the display device and is disengaged, by the player participation type effect, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.
FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific winning effect of FIG. 120 when the winning / judging determination result is miss. The non-specific effect is the same effect mode from the effect modes of FIGS. 119 to 120 in the specific hit effect described above. That is, in the display panel of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the reach state is generated due to the decorative pattern, and the operation side light emitting device 490 emits light, which suggests gazing at the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 and the touch panel 480. The second image GA2 (shuriken image) is displayed on the display panel of the liquid crystal display device 3252, and the message MGA of "now!" Is displayed on the display panel of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 in accordance with the operation timing on the touch panel 480. When a rubbing operation (flick) on the touch panel 480 is detected, the shuriken image is moved and displayed toward the first liquid crystal display device 1900.

  If the winning / judging result is out of alignment, then as shown in FIG. 88, a shuriken image appears on the upper side of the display panel of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, and the shuriken image is moved and displayed toward the changing middle decoration pattern row 1900b to change. Hit the decorative pattern inside and shoot out the decorative pattern. However, the hit timing shift occurs and the hit design "7" is not hit, and FIG. 95 shows that the decorative design after one design is hit and the miss design "8" is shot. The middle decorative design is stopped and displayed as the design "8", and the decorative designs 1900a to 1900c are stopped and displayed as "7", "8", and "7", and becomes "disengagement".

  In addition, in the generation of the hit timing deviation when the winning / judging determination result is out of alignment, for example, the message MGA of “now!” For instructing the operation timing on the touch panel 480 is delayed to display the first liquid crystal display device 1900. It may be displayed on a panel.

  Similarly, when the winning / judging determination result is out, the effect image of the one effect display device (second image) enters the effect image of the other effect display device (the changing middle decoration pattern as the first image). It is possible to express a novel and hard-to-get-out deviation effect that has an influence, and the effect contents change to result in a deviation, as a result of which the player participation type effect can be suppressed, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game.

  That is, the player's intervention on the touch panel 480, which is the player's intervention, is reflected on the effect contents of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 to affect the effect contents of the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and further the second effect. The change in the effect contents on the liquid crystal display device 3252 is reflected on the effect contents by the first liquid crystal display device 1900 to influence, and gives the player a feeling that the effect contents by the first liquid crystal display device 1900 are changing. Therefore, it is possible to express a more novel and hard-to-get out-of-game production by the player participation type production, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game.

  In the specific effect in the case where the above-mentioned winning / judgment determination result is a miss, when a touch operation (flick) is performed such that the touch panel 480 is rubbed from above toward the front, the shuriken image flies toward the first liquid crystal display device 1900 below. As if going, it is moved and displayed so as to disappear on the lower side of the display panel of the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and a shuriken image appears on the upper side of the display panel of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, and the middle decoration pattern row 1900b is changing. In the example, the shuriken image (second image) that is moved toward the display and hits the changing decorative pattern to shoot through the decorative pattern is moved between the liquid crystal display devices, but the shuriken image (second image) is displayed on the liquid crystal. It may be an example of a specific effect that does not move between the display devices, which will be described below.

  When a touch operation (flick) is performed such that the touch panel 480 is rubbed from the upper side to the front side, the shuriken image flies toward the first liquid crystal display apparatus 1900 below and the display panel of the second liquid crystal display apparatus 3252 is displayed. Although it is moved and displayed toward the lower side, the shuriken image hits the lower side of the display panel of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 and is bounced back and cannot be jumped out. Even if the player flicks the touch panel 480 again. The shuriken image hits the lower side of the display panel of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 and bounces back, and the effect contents that do not pop out are repeated.

  That is, although the player's intervention on the touch panel 480 by the player is reflected in the effect contents of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 and affects the effect contents, the effect contents of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 change. It does not come to my mind. The player feels abruptly wondering, "Why, why aren't my shurikens flying, I'm sorry!"

  On the other hand, in the display panel of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the changing middle decoration pattern (first image) repeats temporary stop and change again. That is, also in this case, the change in the effect contents of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is reflected on the effect contents of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 to affect the effect contents of the first liquid crystal display device 1900. Since the player is given the feeling of being able to express a more novel and hard-to-get out-of-game production by the player participation type production, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the entertainment of the game. The symbol used for the temporary stop is not limited to the detached symbol, but may be a hit symbol. Then, finally, the middle decoration pattern is stopped and displayed as a detached design and becomes "disconnected".

  The specific hit effect and the specific off effect described above are an embodiment of a specific effect described below. That is, the specific effect, the first effect display device (first liquid crystal display device 1900) to generate a reach state by a decorative symbol, the second effect display device (upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470) to display the specific symbol, A contact operation to the contact type input device (touch panel 480) is enabled, and when the contact operation to the contact type input device is detected, the specific symbol (shuriken symbol) disappears from the display area of the second effect display device. The moving display is performed, and then the link lamp is emitted in response thereto, and then, in the display area of the first effect display device, the specific symbol is caused to appear with respect to the fluctuating decorative symbol and the moving display is performed. The light emission mode of the link lamp is different depending on whether the winning / missing result is hit or miss.

  According to this configuration, it is possible to easily show that each effect display performed on the two effect display devices triggered by the touch operation on the contact type input device is linked and interlocked.

[Other embodiment of specific effect]
Another embodiment of the specific effect by the first liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 using the touch panel 480 will be described below. FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example in another embodiment of the specific effect using the first liquid crystal display device, the second liquid crystal display device, and the touch panel. 124 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific hit effect of FIG. 123, FIG. 125 is a diagram showing a continuation of the special hit effect of FIG. 124, and FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a continuation of the special hit effect of FIG. 125. ..

  When the specific effect is started, as shown in FIG. 123, the left decorative design 1900a and the right decorative design 1900c are stopped and displayed in the same design on the display panel of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, and only the middle decorative design 1900b is changed. The reach state is generated by the decorative design by setting the final stop design sequence. In FIG. 123, as an example, the left decorative design and the right decorative design are stopped and displayed as the design “7”, and only the middle decorative design 1900b is changing.

  In addition, at the center of the lower part of the display panel of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, a message indicating that the specific effect is started is displayed together with the occurrence of the reach state due to the decorative pattern. In FIG. 123, it is shown that the character "Bomb Chance!" Is displayed as a message indicating that the specific effect has started. The message "Bomb chance!" May be displayed as a voice message together with the message "Bomb chance!" At this point, the display panel of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 is in blackout display.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 124, on the display panel of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the decorative symbols 1900a to 1900c are reduced and displayed in the upper right corner of the display panel, and the first image GA1 is displayed substantially in the center of the display panel. In FIG. 108, as an example of the first image GA1, it is shown that a bomb image with the characters “bomb” is displayed.

  Further, at the same time as displaying the bomb image on the display panel of the first liquid crystal display device 1900, the second image GA2 is displayed on the display panel of the second liquid crystal display device 3252. Note that, in FIG. 124, as an example of the second image GA2, it is shown that the detonator image in which the characters “detonator” are written is displayed.

  Further, the display of the first image GA1 and the second image GA2 is used as a trigger to cause the operation unit light-emitting device 490 to light up and emit light, and to let the player gaze at the upper plate side liquid crystal display device 470 in a bright, non-display manner, thereby touching the touch panel. This suggests that the player's touch operation on the 480 has become effective.

  Then, the touch operation on the touch panel 480 by the player is performed. An operation input signal by operating the touch panel 480 is input to the peripheral control MPU 4150a of the peripheral control unit 4150 (see FIG. 14). As illustrated in FIG. 125, when a touch operation on the touch panel 480 is detected (for example, a finger flicks toward the lower side of the touch panel 480 corresponding to the direction in which the knob portion of the detonator image GA2 is pressed down. , Rubbing with a finger), as shown in FIG. 126, the second image is changed on the display panel of the second liquid crystal display device 3252. FIG. 126 shows that the knob of the detonator image GA2 is pushed in to ignite the fuse image, and the fire of the fuse is moved and displayed as if running.

  127 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect of FIG. 126 when the winning / judging determination result is a win. After FIG. 126, the first image GA1 is changed on the display panel of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponding to the change of the second image GA2. If the winning / judging result is a hit, in FIG. 126, the bomb image is Dokan! ! It means that it exploded. At the same time, the changing middle decorative pattern 1900b in the reduced decorative patterns 1900a to 1900c displayed at the upper right corner of the display panel of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped and displayed as a hit pattern "7", and the decorative pattern is displayed. 1900a to 1900c are stopped and displayed with the same symbol "7" and become a "big hit".

  In the case of the above embodiment, the bomb image is Dokan! ! It is possible to express a novel and hard-to-get big hit effect, in which the player can experience the real feeling of a big hit due to the change in the image of the explosion, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the entertainment appeal of the player.

  FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect of FIG. 126 when the winning / judging determination result is miss. Even if the winning / judging result is wrong, the first image GA1 is changed on the display panel of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 corresponding to the change of the second image GA2, following FIG. 126. In FIG. 128, it is shown that the bomb image is rubbed into the dull ball image, the dull ball image is cracked and opened, and the banner with the character “out” is hanging from it.

  At the same time, the changing middle decorative pattern 1900b in the reduced decorative patterns 1900a to 1900c displayed in the upper right corner of the display panel of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is stopped and displayed as the detached pattern "8", and the decorative pattern is displayed. 1900a to 1900c are "7", "8", and "7", which are stopped and displayed with a combination of deviation symbols "7".

  In the case of the above embodiment, contrary to the player's expectation that the bomb image may explode, the bomb image is rubbed into the dull ball image, so that a sense of unexpectedness such as "Ah! What is that?" Moreover, the player's participation in a novel and hard-to-get-away departure production rather than being surprised by the detachment production in which the dull ball image is cracked and opened and the banner with the word "remove" is hanging from it It can be expressed by a pattern effect, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game.

  As described above, in the above-described embodiment, as the specific effect, the first image (interior decoration pattern) is displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900, and the second image (shuriken image) is displayed on the second liquid crystal display device 3252. , The touch operation on the touch panel 480 is enabled, and when the touch operation on the touch panel 480 is detected, the second image is changed (moved and displayed so as to disappear) on the display panel of the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and the second image is displayed. The first image on the display panel of the first liquid crystal display device 1900 is changed corresponding to the change of the two images (the shuriken image hits the changing middle decoration pattern and the middle decoration pattern is stopped and displayed). However, the reverse mode is also possible.

  That is, the first image (medium decoration pattern) is displayed on the second liquid crystal display device 3252, the second image (shuriken image) is displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900, and then the touch operation on the touch panel 480 is enabled. When the touch operation on the touch panel 480 is detected, the second image is changed on the display panel of the first liquid crystal display device 3252 (movingly displayed so as to disappear on the upper side of the display panel), and the second image is changed. Correspondingly, the first image on the display panel of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 may be changed (the shuriken image hits the changing middle decoration pattern and the middle decoration pattern is stopped and displayed).

  Further, in another embodiment of the above-described specific effect, the first image (bomb image) is displayed on the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and the second image (detonator image) is displayed on the first liquid crystal display device 1900. Next, the touch operation on the touch panel 480 is enabled, and when the touch operation on the touch panel 480 is detected, the second image is changed on the display panel of the first liquid crystal display device 3252 (so that the knob of the detonator is pushed in. Move and display), and change the first image on the display panel of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 in response to the change of the second image (when the hit determination result is hit, the bomb image explodes or the hit determination result is missed). In the case of, the bomb image is rubbed into the dull ball image, the dull ball image cracks and opens, and the banner with the word "detach" hangs from it) It may be.

  According to the game machine of the embodiment described above, when the touch operation on the touch panel 480 is performed using the two effect display devices that are provided visually on the game board, the display is displayed on one of the second effect display devices. The second image displayed is changed to change the effect contents by the second effect display device, and the first image displayed on the other first effect display device is linked in association with the change in the effect contents. The content of the effect changed by the first effect display device changes.

  The intervention of the player, that is, the player's operation on the touch panel 480, is reflected in the effect contents of the second effect display device to influence, and the effect contents of the second effect display device change, and further, in the second effect display device. Since the change in the effect contents is reflected in the effect contents by the first effect display device and has an influence, and gives the player a sense that the effect contents by the first effect display device are changing, the game on the touch panel 480 is played. As a result, due to an operation by the player, the player feels that the effect contents by the first effect display device are changing (related to the winning result), and there is some causality there. Since it is possible to give a sense to the player, it is possible to express a player-participation-type production by an operation input device that is more novel and less likely to get tired, and it is possible to prevent a decline in the interest of the game. That.

[Modification]
In a modified example, as shown by the broken lines in FIGS. 125 to 128, the second touch panel 280 is displayed on the display panel of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 according to the detection signal generated when the player's finger touches the contact surface of the touch panel 480. The finger image GA3 (third image) is displayed (appeared) in association with the image GA2. In FIG. 125, the finger image GA3 is displayed on the upper surface of the knob portion of the detonator image GA2. Then, when the player's touch operation on the touch panel 480 is detected, the finger image GA3 is changed together with the second image on the display panel of the second liquid crystal display device 3252 accordingly. FIG. 126 shows that the knob portion of the detonator image GA2 is pushed by the finger image GA3 and the fuse image is ignited. 127 and 128 also show that the knob portion of the detonator image GA2 is pushed in by the finger image GA3.

  As described above, in the modification, the finger image GA3 reflects the operation of the player on the touch panel 480 on the second image GA2 on the display panel of the second liquid crystal display device 3252, and affects the change of the second image GA2. It is felt more strongly and the operation of the player on the touch panel 480 is expressed more realistically, so that the player participation type production can be expressed realistically and the interest of the game can be further suppressed. You can

  Further, although the light emission mode of the link lamp differs depending on whether the hit determination is a hit or miss, each of the two effect contents displayed on the display panels of the two effect display devices is linked according to the hit or miss. You can strongly impress the sense of unity that is linked to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

  The light emission mode of the link lamp in the above-described specific effect can be as follows. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a variation of the light emission mode of the link lamp in the case of a hit. Further, FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a variation of the light emission mode of the link lamp in the case of disconnection.

  In FIG. 96 (a), the light emission mode of the link lamp in the case of the hit described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 92 is the light emission movement. Further, FIG. 96 (b) shows a light emitting indicator or a light emitting level meter as the light emitting mode of the link lamp in the case of the hit described above.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 97 (a), the ska light emission mode in the light emission mode of the link lamp in the case of the disconnection described above with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95 is excessive. Note that the ska light emission mode is not limited to that caused by the excessive light emission mode. 97 (b) and 97 (c), the ska light emission mode in the light emission mode of the link lamp in the case of the disconnection is the light emission region in one light emitting device is insufficient.

  In FIG. 97 (b), in the case where the light emission mode of the link lamp is changed to light emission, the left and right sides of the game board light emitting device 2150 are emitting light, but the central part is turned off, and the light emitting region is lost to emit light. It shows that there is a shortage. Further, in FIG. 97 (c), in the light emitting level meter as the light emitting mode of the link lamp, only the central portion of the game board light emitting device 2150 emits light, both left and right portions are extinguished, and the entire light emitting area is illuminated. It shows that the light emitting area is insufficient due to missing.

  In addition, the ska light emission mode in the light emission mode of the link lamp may be thinned out, for example, by turning off the upper plate light emitting device 492. In addition, in the case of disengagement, in any of the above-mentioned ska light emitting modes, the specific symbol TKZ (shuriken symbol) does not hit the hit symbol in the fluctuating decorative symbol (the decorative symbol deviates without hitting). It will be displayed in a stopped manner with a deviating pattern.

[17. Another example]
It is needless to say that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and can be implemented in various modes as long as they are within the technical scope of the present invention.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is described as an example, but the gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and gaming machines other than the pachinko gaming machine, for example, slot machines or The present invention can also be applied to a fusion game machine in which a pachinko game machine and a slot machine are fused (one that performs a slot game using a game ball).

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 192 Handle relay terminal board 470 Upper plate side liquid crystal display device (second effect display device)
480 touch panel (contact input device)
482 Performance explanation information switching icon 490 Operation unit light emitting device 492 Upper plate light emitting device 494 Touch panel light emitting device 4941 Touch panel first light emitting device 4942 Touch panel second light emitting device 4943 Touch panel third light emitting device 4951 Touch panel right first light emitting device 4952 Touch panel right second light emitting device 4953 Touch panel right third light emitting device 4961 Touch panel lower first light emitting device 4962 Touch panel lower second light emitting device 4963 Touch panel lower third light emitting device 4971 Touch panel left first light emitting device 4972 Touch panel left second light emitting device 4973 Touch panel Left third light emitting device 650 Ball striking device 740 Award ball device 784 External terminal board 851 Power supply board 860a Operation switch (error canceling part)
860b Error LED display 1100 Game area 1185 First special symbol display 1186 Second special symbol display 1900 First liquid crystal display device (first effect display device)
2101 Upper starting port (first starting port)
2102 Lower starting port (second starting port)
2109 Lower starting port switch (second starting port sensor)
2150 Game board light emitting device 3022 Upper starting opening switch (first starting opening sensor)
3252 Second liquid crystal display device (second effect display device)
4100 Main control board (game control board game control unit)
4100a Main control MPU
4110 Dispensing control board (dispensing control unit)
4120 payout control unit 4120a payout control MPU
4140 Peripheral control board (production control unit)
4150 Peripheral control unit 4152 Performance information table 4160 Liquid crystal and sound control unit 4165 RTC control unit 4170 Lamp drive board 4180 Motor drive board.
4501 First hit determination table 4502 First hit symbol table 4503 First hit time fluctuation time setting table 4504 First loss time fluctuation time setting table 4505 First lottery probability selection means 4506 First hit determination means 4507 Random number extraction means for hitting 4508 First random number extraction means for symbols 4509 First random time random number extraction means 4510 First stop symbol determination means 4511 First variation time determination means 4512 Special symbol variation control means 4513 Command transmission means 4514 First hold extinguishing means 4521 Second hit determination table 4522 Second hit symbol table 4523 Second hit time fluctuation time setting table 4524 Second loss time fluctuation time setting table 4525 Second hit judgment random number extraction means 4526 Random hit symbol random number extraction means 4527 2nd fluctuation time random number extraction means 4528 2nd hit determination means 4529 2nd stop symbol determination means 4530 2nd fluctuation time determination means 4531 2nd holding digestion means 4560 command receiving means 4561 1st hit time performance mode table 4562 1st Departure time effect mode table 4563 First effect random number extraction means 4564 First effect mode determination means 4565 First effect display control means 4567 Second hit time effect mode table 4568 Second off time effect mode table 4569 Second effect random number extraction Means 4570 Second effect mode determining means 4571 Second effect display control means 4573 Decorative symbol variation control means GA1 1st image GA2 2nd image GA3 3rd image TKZ specific symbol MGA message CGT character image

Claims (1)

A front door provided with a production operation unit that can be operated by a player,
An effect display unit for displaying a predetermined effect related to the game,
An operation-compatible light emitting unit capable of emitting light based on a touch operation on the effect operation unit,
The effect operation unit is capable of accepting a single operation that is a single touch operation by a player, and as the mode of the single operation, a plurality of modes according to the content of the accepted operation are provided,
The effect display unit is capable of displaying a predetermined image based on a single operation performed on the effect operation unit,
The operation-corresponding light emitting unit is a plurality of light emitters arranged between the effect operation unit and the effect display unit, and at least a part of the plurality of light emitters is provided on the front door. Yes,
Further, when the mode of the single operation performed on the effect operation unit is a special mode among a plurality of modes, the operation-corresponding light emitting unit is configured by special light emission control corresponding to the special mode. A special light emission control means for causing the plurality of light emitters to emit light ,
When the mode of the single operation performed on the effect operation unit is another mode that is not the special mode among a plurality of modes, the plurality of light-emitting bodies that form the operation-compatible light-emitting unit are used. A predetermined light emission control different from the special light emission control is performed.
A gaming machine characterized in that a plurality of light emitters that emit light by the special light emission control and a plurality of light emitters that emit light by the predetermined light emission control are the same .